Decree …/2014.

(… …) BM

of the Minister of the Interior

on the National Fire Protection Regulations

By virtue of the authorisation granted in Points 1 and 24 of Article 47(2) of Act XXXI of 1996 on
fire protection, technical rescue, and firefighting, with regard to Article 287 and Annexes 19-20
based on the authorisation granted in Points 12 and 24 of Article 47(2) of Act XXXI of 1996 on fire
protection, technical rescue, and firefighting, acting within the scope of my duties as set forth in
Point q) of Article 37 of Government Decree 212/2010 (VII. 1.) on the duties and authority of
certain ministers and the State Secretary heading the Prime Minister’s office, I order the following:

I.
GENERAL PROVISIONS

Article 1
(1) The fire protection requirements set forth in these provisions must be followed
a) during the design, construction, conversion, expansion, renovating, updating, repair, and
use of the facility, structure, or partial structure, and amendment of the provision,
b) during the erection, maintenance, conversion, termination or use of the installed fire
protection equipment set forth in the provisions and government regulations,
c) during the use and storage of machines, equipment, devices,
d) during the production, use and storage of materials,
e) use of other devices securing the fire protection of the establishment,
f) during open-air events, and
g) other use and activities involving fire safety.

(2) If this Decree does not contain provisions for the cases under paragraph (1), the fire
protection regulations of the relevant technical requirements or an equivalent solution must be
applied.

(3) The technical provisions defined in this Decree do not apply to products manufactured or
marketed in one of the Member States of the European Union or in Turkey, or those manufactured
in one of the EFTA states partaking in the agreement regarding the European Economic Area,
according to the prevailing regulations there, provided that the prevailing regulations provide
protection equivalent to the protection set forth in this Decree with regard to human health and life,
and public safety.
Article 2

(1) The scope of this Decree does not extend to fire protection regulations related to
combustion and combustion agents and pyrotechnical products.

(2) The provisions of this Decree apply to the following only if the law does not establish
alternate rules with regard to the contents defined in Points a)–c):
a) aboveground areas of land mines,
 2

b) underground areas of land mines, i.e. underground mine regions established with mining
technology for exploration and exploitation of mineral raw materials, as well as the open regions of
deserted mines,
c) the following comparable opencast mining areas as defined in Point b):
ca) establishments and structures directly connected to underground mining areas at the
surface of the Earth, in particular mine towers, mine transport equipment, ventilation equipment,
underground transport equipment to surface powerhouse,
cb) deep drilling for the exploration of liquid and gas mineral resources, and equipment
within a safety zone or drilling site, required for drilling activities,
cc) wells used for the exploitation of liquid and gas mineral resources, and equipment,
accessories related to production activities within a safety zone, in particular well separator,
wellhead, glycolate equipment, pumped deep rocker,
cd) geological structures for underground gas storage, well systems connected to natural or
artificial caves and wellheads of wells,
ce) crude oil and natural gas pipelines and accessories, such as connecting separators, gas
compressors, pumps, and precipitation collectors,
cf) production and injection well system required for underground coal gasification, and
wellheads of wells.

(3) The provisions of this Decree must be applied to unique establishments using nuclear
energy if the regulation relating to the use of nuclear energy does not establish differing
requirements pertaining to these.

(4) In case of remodelling, expansion, renovation, repair of an existing establishment or

partial establishment, or in case of its amended use, this Decree shall be applied with consideration
of the degree and scope of the renovation, and the effects influencing the fire safety status of
establishments or partial establishments.

Article 3

(1) The fire protection authority may authorise a derogation from the provisions, upon
request, in the event that other regulations of at least the same safety standard are followed, with the
exception of the following provisions: Article 1–15, Article 19(3), Article 79(3)–(5), Article 80(1)
and (4), Article 81, Article 100, Article 109, Article 123(2), Article 135(3)–(4), Article 139,
Article 140(1), Article 145, Article 154(1)(b), Article 154(2), Article 165, Article 166(2) and (3),
Article 172(8), Article 175(1), Article 176, Article 177(2) and (3), Article 184(1), Article 185(1),
Article 186, Article 187(1), Article 190(2), Article 191(6)–(8), Article 194(2), (3) and (5),
Article 195(1), Article 196(3), Article 197(2), Article 198(1), Article 199, Article 200(1),
Article 201, Article 202(5)–(7), Article 203(1), Article 205(1), Article 207(1), Article 219,
Article 237(1), Article 253(2)–(4), Article 262(1), Article 263, Article 264(2), Article 266,
Article 267(1)–(2), Article 269(1), Article 270(2), and (5), Article 272, and Article 273.

(2) Deviation from the provisions set forth in this Decree is allowed if the Applicant
confirms that the safety objectives set forth in this Decree have been fulfilled, at a safety level that
is at least equivalent.
 3

(3) Upon request, the fire protection authority may authorise a solution that entirely
derogates or partially derogates from the fire protection technical directives or national standards, if
the Applicant verifies that it is at a safety level that is at least equivalent.

(4) The authorisation for derogation and the application for authorisation according to
Section (3) contains
a) the name of the regulation or requirement affected by the derogation,
b) the reason for the derogation,
c) the name of the establishment, partial establishment, or outdoor area affected by the
derogation,
d) in case of derogation authorisation, verification that the safety goals have been fulfilled,
e) in case of authorisation according to paragraph (3), the fulfilment of the safety level set
forth in this Decree,
f) adequately detailed technical documentation supporting the contents of Points d) and e).

(5) The fire protection authority provides an opportunity, in the cases and in the manner
specified in the provisions, to have a dialogue to verify the fire protection requirements.

II.
DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

Article 4

(1) For the purposes of this Decree, the provisions of:

a) Chapter IX shall be seen as requirements relating to firefighter intervention,
b) Chapters XVIII–XX set forth the requirements of fire protection during the use of
buildings, and
c) the requirements not specifically covered by subparagraphs a)–b) shall be taken to
constitute the requirements of fire protection during building construction.

(2) For the purposes of this Decree, the provisions of:

1. tunnel length: the length of the longest traffic lane as measured along the completely
covered section of a tunnel,
2. basic designated purpose: a classification of units of risk, including independent
functional components, by primary purpose of use typical of the unit of hazard so as to differentiate
units of risk by designated purpose and to establish related fire protection requirements, such as
a) industrial/agricultural: the basic designated purpose of a unit of hazard containing an
independent functional unit serving industrial/agricultural purposes,
b) community: the basic designated purpose of a unit of hazard containing an independent
functional unit serving community purposes,
c) residential: the basic designated purpose of a unit of hazard containing homes, recreation
units not classified as accommodation and rooms with related functions.
d) storage: the basic designated purpose of a unit of hazard containing an independent
functional unit serving storage purposes,
e) mixed: the basic designated purpose of a unit of hazard containing an independent
functional unit serving other purposes.
3. footprint: the area determined by the vertical projection machinery and equipment; the
area inside the boundaries of the area designated for storage in open-air storage facilities, and the
net floor space of a room or an area fully or partially surrounded by building structures,
 4

4. scaffold-like building: a building with support structures dimensioned to meet the

stability requirements of the purpose of use, without external wall structures, and with walking
surfaces at certain elevations to meet its designated purpose and for human access,
5. suspended ceiling: non-load-bearing horizontal structure used to divide spaces and
attached to ceilings, ceilings below roofs or lofts, deck structures with a suitable suspension
mechanism to serve aesthetic, acoustic, thermal insulation of fire protection purposes; it is only the
bottom surface of suspended ceilings that delimits spaces suitable for human occupation: both parts
of the air space divided by suspended ceilings belong to one and the same functional unit or fire
compartment,
6. access floor: a horizontal structure for space division with unique fire resistance limit
values, which is propped up on a load-bearing surface and may be used as a receptacle of building
engineering or electric installations:
a) elevated or double floor: a pre-fabricated floor system including floor plate, load-bearing
props on the floor structure and bearing bars or other components that provide a suitable lead
bearing structure to be installed in a building,
b) hollow floor: a load-bearing surface propped up by a special underlying mechanism,
which may include legs for support to provide space between the load-bearing surface and the floor
structure for installations such as telecommunications, power supply, heating or ventilation lines,
7. coefficient of discharge (cv coefficient): a number calculated as the ratio of effective
orifice area and geometric orifice area to describe the efficiency of heat and smoke exhaust and air
supply mechanisms,
8. temporary protected area: a room or group of rooms or an area constructed on an
occupied floor level of a building capable of ensuring the security of people escaping or evacuated
to that location transitionally until a rescue operation,
9. atrium floor area: the largest vertical projection of the undivided air space,
10. installed fire alarm: a fixed device installed indoors or outdoors to detect and signal fire
and to perform automatic fire protection actions in the early stages of fire development,
11. installer of installed fire alarm and fire extinguisher: the person or organisation
responsible for the whole process of installation,
12. commissioning installed fire alarms and fire extinguishers: a procedure whereby the
commissioning engineer verifies whether or not the installed device complies with the requirements
laid down in applicable laws and regulations, national standards, by the fire protection authority and
the manufacturer and with approved and licensed plans,
13. component of an installed fire alarm: a component defined as Type I or Type II in the
related technical specification,
14. installed fire extinguisher: a fixed manually operated and/or automatically actuated
device installed indoors or outdoors to put out fires, to facilitate intervention, to prevent fires from
spreading and to reduce fire damage, provided that an extinguisher does not qualify are a source of
fire water,
15. installed fire-retardant equipment: an automatic fire protection equipment used instead
of fire-retardant building structures to prevent fires from spreading, which blocks fire for a certain
period of time from reaching into spaces that should be protected by fire-retardant building
structures, which the unit replaces,
16. installed fire protection unit: a fixed device installed to detect, signal and extinguish
fires, to prevent the propagation of fire and to vent off heat, smoke and combustion gases generated
during fires,
17. protection of equipment: protection ensured by automatic sensors installed inside units
for the early detection and signalling of internal fires,
18. emergency elevator: an elevator, for firefighting or evacuation, connecting to a
smokeless stairway, fire-retardant entrance foyer of a building or with outdoor connection, which
can also be operated during a building fire,
 5

19. safety symbol: a symbol created by combining a specific geometric shape, colour and a
pictorial signal (pictogram) placed permanently to help people escape, to warn of hazards, to
prohibit actions or ways of behaviour and to mark the location of equipment and devices used for
signalling and extinguishing fires,
20. emergency power supply: electric power supplied from an emergency source,
21. emergency power source: a power source with capacity to supply electric power to
firefighting consumers for the required period of time,
22. safe area: a location outdoors that allows evacuating persons access to public land
without the need to return to the affected building,
23. reaching safe area: leaving a building via an exit to outdoor space or along an outdoor
passageway that provides access to outdoor connection at ground level,
24. cycle time: the maximum period of time permitted between two consecutive inspections,
reviews or maintenance actions,
25. family dwelling: a residential building with one or two apartments, related garages and
other storage rooms,
26. peak pressure: the highest level of explosion pressure arising under laboratory
conditions setting in a room without rupturing, or rupturing-opening surfaces,
27. distance to access: the length of the communication route between one's location and
the location to be reached as measure along the axis of the route,
28. protection for rescuing lives: protection provided by a fire alarm installed to ensure
proper conditions for evacuation by giving early fire signals so as to ensure the security of people
inside a building or fire compartment,
29. acceptance: the process whereby a designer or installer justifies for its principal that the
a fire alarm or a fire extinguisher, as designed and installed, meets the specified requirements,
30. height of placement: the location for posting hazard signs and escape routes, such as
a) low position: signs and elements placed at floor level or with bottom edges no more
than 0.4 m above floor level,
b) medium position: placement of signs and elements between low and high position
with bottom edges between 1.5 and 1.8 m above floor level,
c) high position: placement of signs and elements with bottom edges at least 1.8 m and
at most 3 m above floor level,
31. person to be rescued without preparation: an immobile person who can be rescued
without preparation,
32. person to be rescued after preparation: an immobile person who cannot be rescued
unless previously prepared (to ensure and maintain fit for transport condition),
33. person not eligible for rescue even with preparation: an immobile person whose rescue
is infeasible,
34. anterior wall (vertical membrane): a self-supporting vertical structure for space division,
which has unique fireproofing limit values which are independent of other structures,
35. primary building structures: structural elements that support the stability of a building
or its floors in the case of fire along with structures blocking the propagation of fire,
36. space or room to accommodate people: room or space where, due to its designated
purpose, people are expected to stay for an uninterrupted period of at least 30 minutes or several
consecutive periods of less than 30 minutes, which if added up will reach 2 hours in any period of 4
hours,
37. floor: a horizontal load-bearing partition between building levels and the loft and a
building level, including the floor under a loft,
38. flame retardant: a protective agent, which, if applied efficiently to a combustible
substance (by coating or saturation), will ensure more favourable fire hazard classification of the
combustible for a specific period or up to repeated treatment,
39. building material: construction products used for building, i.e. materials forming the
components of building structures.
 6

40. affected technical solution: fire protection appliance, system or mechanism required by
law or a fire protection authority, and systems subject to review as provided in this Decree,
41. protection for rescuing valuables: protection provided by a fire alarm or fire
extinguisher installed to ensure proper conditions for protecting valuables placed in a building, a
fire compartment or outdoors,
42. roof structure: the load-bearing component of the roof, which supports and is used for
fixing the roof cover,
43. review: all measures and activities performed by an authorised person to obtain
evidence about the operability, effectiveness of an affected technical solution and about whether or
not the operator has performed checks, maintenance and repairs along with documenting the same
in writing,
44. warning sign: a hazard sign that calls attention to a source of hazard,
45. curtain wall: a non-load-bearing partitioning wall structure mounted on, and normally
positioned in front of the plane of, the load-bearing structures, normally floors of a building.
46. smoke damper: an automated closing mechanism to be integrated into an air ventilation
line to allow the propagation of smoke or hot combustion gases in open position for a period as
required or to block such propagation in closed position,
47. smoke doors and windows: integrated structures that, once closed, will block the
propagation of smoke and toxic gases produced by fire from one side of the space they isolate to the
other side to a specific degree and for a specific period,
48. smoke collector area: the top section of the air space in a smoke compartment above the
layer of smokeless air, with sides preventing smoke from spreading, and with the capacity to
prevent smoke from cooling to ensure buoyancy,
49. smoke barrier: a building structure or piece of equipment used for separating smoke
compartments and to prevent smoke from spreading laterally,
50. smokeless stairway: a staircase where the entry of smoke and toxic gases produced in a
fire is limited so that the staircase will be suitable for secure evacuation and rescue for a specific
period of time,
51. smoke extraction: any solution that prevents dangerous volumes of smoke from entering
the protected room,
52. smoke compartment: a room or a part thereof laid out in a manner to prevent smoke
from entering an adjacent some compartment,
53. smokeless layer of air: the bottom part of the air space in a room with limited presence
of dangerous smoke other than the column of smoke rising from the fire,
54. rupturing and rupturing-opening surfaces: building structures which are integrated into
the partition structures of buildings or building components and will get destroyed or will burst
open when exposed to harmful explosion overpressure to allow pressure relief,
55. rupturing surfaces: building structures that get destroyed to open an enclosed area so as
to release overpressure,
56. rupturing-opening surfaces: building structures that help release overpressure by
opening up, turning or tipping, and have adjustable opening pressure values,
57. efficient ventilation: one that ensures that the concentration of combustible gases,
vapours and dust stays below 20 % of the bottom explosion limit value,
58. local (partial) protection: coverage with automatic sensors of the parts representing fire
hazard in a building, structure, fire compartment or outdoor area protected by built-in fire alarms,
59. flame spread limit for building façades: the time that elapses from starting the required
technical test to reaching the boundary state typical of flames spreading on building façades,
60. longitudinal removal of heat and smoke: diverting smoke towards the entry or the exit
of a tunnel with one end of the tunnel venting smoke and the other end replenishing fresh air,
61. manual operation of heat and smoke protection equipment: opening natural heat and
smoke ventilation and air intake structures, switching pressurised smoke extraction equipment on
 7

and off, switching mechanical smoke ventilation and mechanical air replenishment units into fire or
normal mode, which may require manual or remote operation,
62. heat and smoke protection: any solution that restricts the propagation of heat and smoke
produced by fires and helps remove heat and smoke,
63. heat and smoke extraction: any solution that helps direct the heat and smoke that enters,
or is produced in, a protected room into open space,
64. firefighter control panel of heat and smoke extraction: an operating interface which
allows the firefighter to operate all of the heat and smoke protection units remotely from a central
location,
65. heat and smoke extraction equipment: mechanical equipment used to propel heat and
smoke outside in forced flow,
66. heat and smoke extraction system: the interconnected system of apparatus and
equipment used to remove heat and smoke and to supply air, any solutions ensuring their operation
and any related fixtures, except for built-in fire alarms,
67. heat and smoke extraction structure: a structure that allows heat and smoke to escape
naturally into open space outdoors if it is opened in case of fire,
68. authorised person: a person who has the necessary qualification, knowledge, tools,
experience and privileges and is appointed or authorised by the operator to perform regular reviews,
maintenance and repairs,
69. maintenance: any measures taken or activities performed to ensure the operability and
efficiency of the affected technical solution, to prevent defects and to document the same,
70. diagonal extraction of heat and smoke: an activity whereby heat and smoke are
removed and fresh air is replenished via designated openings; extraction occurs in the upper third of
the cross-section of the tunnel while fresh air is replenished in the bottom third,
71. supplementary sign: an information board used in combination with hazard signs,
72. key open-air event with music and dance: an event with music and dance held outdoors
with over 10 000 people in attendance or in an area over 20 000 m2, which is subject to the
Government Decree on making open-air events with music and dance more secure,
73. exit level: the level where people inside can leave while escaping from the building or
special structure and access the connecting ground level terrain,
74. conveyor isolation apparatus: a fire blocking isolation which, if closed, will prevent
fires from spreading across the opening in a building structure for a conveyor forwarding materials
or products for a specific period of time,
75. first stage of evacuation: a part of the escape between a person's actual location and the
person reaching the escape route or the transitionally protected or safe area in case a person can be
rescued without using the escape route,
76. second stage of evacuation: a part of the escape between a person reaching the escape
route and accessing the safe or transitionally protected area,
77. evacuation: departure or removal of persons inside a building or special structure in the
case of fire, including escaping and rescuing,
78. hazard unit: a building or any part thereof with definite borders specified for blocking
the propagation of fire, in respect of which the circumstances determining hazard class are taken
into account to the same degree and in the same manner during design,
79. hazard class: a classification expressing the degree of threat and the severity of the
resulting damage or loss in case of fire and the degree of other jeopardy the fire may cause,
80. combined extraction of heat and smoke: a system developed by the application of the
both longitudinal and diagonal extraction of heat and smoke,
81. protection of combined nature: the simultaneous application of safeguarding lives and
valuables in fire protection equipment,
82. community purpose: designated purpose not classified as residential, industrial,
agricultural or storage.
 8

83. external partition wall: the partition wall of a façade facing the external space and that
of an internal courtyard, atrium, air shaft or air duct facing the open courtyard it delimits,
84. blow-down: removal of explosion overpressure into some space where overpressure
may expand and thus the internal space will be relieved of the harmful effects of overpressure,
85. blow-down reception space: enclosed space which receives and conveys outdoors
overpressure removed from rooms without open-air connections during the release of pressure from
such rooms,
86. air supply: any and all solutions used for the replenishment of air needed during heat
and smoke extraction,
87. air supply unit: a piece of equipment which ensures the supply of air into a room where
it is needed for the extraction of heat and smoke mechanically by forced flow,
88. air supply structure: a structure that allows air to flow naturally into a room fitted with
smoke extraction equipment in quantities needed for replenishment if it is opened in case of fire,
89. stairway: a communicating arrangement use for bridging level differences with stairs
and with building structures surrounding it from all sides.
90. stair support elements: the complete stair structure without auxiliary structures such as
balustrade, base, banister, railing, tread surface covering and cladding,
91. erection: a sequence of processes including planning, installation, occupying and
acceptance,
92. facility: the combination of buildings and open-air spaces on a single plot of land,
93. vital system component: a facility, building or a building section identified in line with
the applicable legal rule,
94. high-rise building: a high structure, which is classified as a building,
95. secondary explosion: an explosion triggered by another already developed explosion,
96. opening pressure: level of pressure at which a rupturing-opening surface starts to open
up,
97. underground station: a station with platform level more than 20 m below terrain surface,
98. person with limited capacity to escape: a person who cannot escape independently
because of age (0-10 years or above 65 years), mental or physical health condition or some external
constraint,
99. special institution for persons with limited capacity to escape: an institution to provide
care, treatment, education, instruction, nursing to persons with limited capacity to escape where the
capacity to escape of persons who are placed, taken care of, treated, educated, brought up or nursed
there is affected adversely by factors other than age,
100. emergency elevator: a safe elevator which occupants may also use in case of fire,
101. emergency sign: a safety symbol that indicates the location of and the direction in a
building, structure or outdoors along the communication (exit) path to the exit to be used for escape
or the emergency exit,
102. escape route signalling system: a system that provides clearly visible and unambiguous
information and visual instructions for occupants to leave the area in case of an emergency along a
designated escape route by applying clearly laid out visual tools, signs and markings,
103. escape route: the communication route used by escaping persons, which is designed to
ensure the safety of such persons for the time it takes to escape (from a room with numerous
occupants along a route taking people to the door used for evacuation) during the second stage of
evacuation in case of a fire,
104. escape route protection: the coverage of the escape routes and adjoining rooms with
automatic sensors in a building, structure or fire compartment protected by built-in fire alarms,
except for spaces that can be ignored for the purposes of protection,
105. standard risk category: a grouping of a building or an independent building section that
corresponds to the most severe hazard classification of the units of hazard,
106. standard fire compartment: the fire compartment in a facility that requires the largest
volume of fire water,
 9

107. immobile person: a person without the ability to escape, and whose rescue requires staff
and additional tools, as necessary,
108. non-combustible substance: non-organic substances or those with limited organic
content, whose ignition temperature cannot be ascertained below the temperature limit set in an
applicable technical specification, and building materials classified to belong to fire protection
categories A1 or A2,
109. non-load-bearing floor (horizontal self-supporting membrane): a self-supporting
horizontal partition in the structure of a building with fireproofing limit values of its own,
independently of other structures,
110. standard lightning protection: lightning protection developed in compliance with the
MSZ EN 62305 standard,
111. normal power supply: electric power supplied from an normal source,
112. normal power source: power source supplying power to electric consumers,
113. pressure-time state curve: a curve that describes the process of an explosion in a
reference system where pressure and time are the coordinates,
114. separate building section: a section of a building which is statically independent from
other building sections and is separated with structures blocking the propagation of fire where
evacuation is possible without entering adjoining building sections,
115. person with the ability to escape independently: an escaping person who, based age,
mental and physical health status, can escape on his/her own relying on supplementary directions, if
any, and whose escape is not limited externally by forcible restraint,
116. canopy structure: a building where the material used against the forces of weather in the
building shell is made by weaving or another substitute technology from natural or man-made fibre
and can support surface loads, is used as external partition to form fully or partially independent
spaces and thereby provides the conditions of use,
117. reduced overpressure: the pressure level that can develop in internal spaces despite
effective pressure relief,
118. explosion: high velocity process of combustion where the speed of the moving flame
front is at or above 10 m/s but is below 100 m/s,
119. status of explosion risk: the presence of certain amounts of, the mode of occurrence and
the condition of a substance representing explosion hazard which couples at least with either
oxygen concentration or ignition energy from among the conditions precedent to burning and
exploding,
120. person escaping with assistance: a person with limited capacity to escape who can
escape with physical help or guidance or upon the controlled removal of external restraint and
guidance,
121. special structure: in terms of fire protection special structures include highway tunnels,
pedestrian subways, underground railway lines, observation towers, canopy structures, scaffold-like
buildings and sheds,
122. outdoor exit: an exit in the external partition structure of a building which allows
escaping persons to leave the building and reach safety outside,
123. area of open-air event: the enclosed area of an event delimited by natural or man-made
barriers restricting movement and the area marked responsibly by the organiser of non-delimited
event,
124. open-air event: events held outdoors with over 1 000 people attending or in an area
larger than 5 000 m2, not including events related to the operating licence of the facility,
125. open-air storage area: an area outdoors used for storing materials, goods and objects
and the protection of the same from weather, if necessary; parking lots, placing a vehicle in a plot of
land and storage on the roof of a building are not classified as open-air storage areas,
126. calculation: the determination of the specific or approximate value of one or more
status indicators or characteristics by applying the laws of mathematics, physics and/or chemistry,
 10

127. calculated headroom: the ratio of the volume to floor area of a smoke compartment
identified in m,
128. structural stability: the capability of a fire compartment, an independent building
section or a building to withstand loads which are contemporaneous with fire for the required time,
including the capability of the support structures of connected fire protection building structures and
built-in fire protection equipment to remain functional; provided that support structures also include
structural components and related connections,
129. combustible solids: organic substances or substances with limited non-organic content
that take solid state at room temperature and whose ignition temperature can be determined using
the applicable technical procedure, as well as solid building materials classified to belong to fire
protection categories B-F,
130. floor structures dividing floor levels: an internal level developed by dividing part of the
air space of a room (by erecting a horizontal structure dimensioned not to exceed 25 % of the floor
area of the bottommost level of the room) and by ventilating the section below the ceiling, without
erecting a room and a solid banister standing taller than 1 metre,
131. shed: a partially or fully covered single-storey structure connecting directly to the
ground with at least 50 % of the total surfaces left open on one or more sides,
132. technological conveyor: a conveyor belt, a transport table or similar structure or
equipment used for forwarding materials or products,
133. comprehensive protection: protection which ensures full coverage of a structure,
building, fire compartment or open area protected by built-in fire alarms with automatic sensors,
except for spaces that can be ignored for protection purposes; provided that the limits of covered
areas coincide with fire compartment limits,
134. baffle: a wall structure suitable for altering the direction of blow-down,
135. rupturing-opening baffling surface: a rupturing-opening surface with terminal opening
value specified in a manner to direct blow-down in a non-hazardous direction,
136. roof covering: the external part of a roof structure offering insulation against
precipitation,
137. skylight: a building product used to illuminate the space or room below the structure
enclosing the room from the above
138. roof panel: the ceiling structure enclosing the top level of a building from above,
139. roof panel support structures: all structural parts of the roof panel whose destruction
results in general building decay or one that affect large areas or in the collapse of a major section
of the roof panel as well as that of voluminous (normally non-light-weight) load-bearing cover
structures potentially resulting in other structural damage, penetration through lower floors,
provided that constant load must be calculated taking into account the load of suspended and
superimposed objects,
140. dividing structure of roof panel: (self-supporting) light weight panels made of layers of
no more than 60 kg/m2 surface volume propped up by roof panel supporting structures, provided
that constant load must be calculated taking into account the load of suspended and superimposed
objects,
141. roof structure: the structure enclosing the top floor of a building from above, including
roof-truss and roof covering,
142. degree of propagation of roof fires: the degree of propagation of independent burning
(with flames, charring or smouldering) on the surface and in the layers of a roof insulation system
or roofing,
143. barrier and dividing strip to prevent propagation of fire: a barrier and dividing strip
disconnecting the fields in combustible roofing applied to offer protection against heat or rainwater
in order to prevent the propagation of fire,
144. prohibition sign: a safety sign that forbids hazardous forms of behaviour, and refers to
the prohibition of activities which are considered to pose a hazard in a given location,
 11

145. progressive collapse: a form of destruction of a building triggered by a building

structure losing load-bearing capacity and leading on to the destruction of one or more additional
primary building structures,
146. building designed for numerous occupants: a structure classified as a building serving
the purpose of receiving large masses of people,
147. fireproof cabling system: a combination of electric power or data communication lines,
cables, encased bars and related ducts, coatings and covers, bearing and support structures,
distributing and connection boxes that can remain operational for a specific period of time even if
exposed to fire load and without the occurrence of shorts or power outage,
148. fire resistance limit: the time expressed in hours or minutes between starting the
applicable fire test in line with technical requirements and the moment the tested building structure
reaches its boundary state of fire resistance,
149. consumer during fire: an electric consumer that must operate or remain operational for a
specific period while exposed to fire,
150. main fire switch: a manual or remotely operated power-off switch to be used in case of
fire,
151. powering off in case of fire: switching off the power supply to all the electric consumers
of a building from a single location all at once or in several groups locally with a manual or a
remotely operated switch,
152. basic fire break structure: a common term for firewalls, bulkheads, partition walls and
floors acting as fire barriers,
153. fire breaking foreground: independently ventilated foreground surrounded by fire
breaking building structures, with doors fitted with automatic closing mechanisms and of a size to
ensure fast escape,
154. fire breaking building structure: a building structure used to offer protection against
propagating fires, as it can prevent fire from spreading between the compartments of space it
separates for a specific period of time; fire breaking building structures include basic fire break
structures, fire blocking and fire spread barriers,
155. fire breaking wall: a wall structure that prevents fire from spreading between the fire
compartments or the units of independent purpose or the rooms it separates for a specific period of
time,
156. fire breaking flooring: a floor structure that prevents fire from spreading between the
fire compartments or rooms it separates for a specific period of time,
157. fire blocking: a technical solution used to prevent fires from spreading across the
openings and perforations of building structures and along cables and cabling systems, which is
capable of preventing the propagation of fire through openings, perforations and along cables for a
specific period of time; such solutions include fire doors and windows, fire breaking termination
elements, fire breaking systems for filling or closing gaps and apertures and fire breaking linear
joint fillers,
158. fire breaking linear joint filler: a fire breaking termination which, by filling gaps or
apertures where building structures connect will prevent fires from spreading across the gap or
aperture for a specific period of time,
159. fire doors and windows: fire doors, fire windows, fire gates, curtain gates, rolling
shutter gates and fire breaking termination closing the leads-through of cribs and conveyors, which,
if closed, will prevent fires from spreading for a specific period of time,
160. fire breaking systems for filling gaps and apertures: structures, technical solutions and
products closing the gaps and apertures created in partitioning building structures to accommodate
air handling and other technological lines, cables and line systems in a manner to block fire for a
specific period of time,
161. fire breaking partition wall: a non-bearing wall structure erected without fire breaking
closure, which (according to solid wall surface tests) is capable of preventing fire from spreading
between the rooms it separates for a shorter period of time than that required of fire walls,
 12

162. fire breaking closing element: a fire breaking closing of active or reactive operation
which prevents fire from spreading along the building engineering line that leads across fire
breaking building structures for a specific period of time,
163. firefighting access area: an area of proper load-bearing capacity with solid paving
constructed in front of the building façade for firefighting and rescue operations in a manner to
ensure that firefighting equipment and firefighter units can operate as deemed necessary for the
purposes of the given intervention,
164. firefighting access route: a paved road of proper load-bearing capacity suitable for use
with fire trucks approaching the site of access for firefighting,
165. firefighting elevator: a safe elevator to be used exclusively by firefighters in case of fire,
166. fire extinguisher maintenance organisation: a business employing maintenance staff
and operating a maintenance workshop for maintaining fire extinguishers,
167. fire extinguisher maintenance person: a person or organisation identified by law as
responsible for maintaining fire extinguishers in a state of good repair,
168. identification code of NDDM, fire extinguisher maintenance organisation: a sticker
with holographic fraud prevention and unique numbering to identify the workshop of the
maintenance organisation, which maintenance organisations can purchase from distributors licensed
by the National Directorate for Disaster Management (NDDM),
169. inspector of fire extinguishers: a business employing maintenance staff to maintain fire
extinguishers, which does not operate a maintenance shop and is provided with an NDDM code by
the maintenance organisation,
170. firefighter intervention centre: a room with access to controlling the fire protection
equipment needed during and assisting a firefighting intervention, and to building surveillance
systems that monitor the operating status of fire protection equipment,
171. firefighter key safe: a component of built-in fire alarm that allows smooth access to a
building and its rooms during firefighter interventions,
172. fire compartment: a specific section of a building, special structure or open-air storage
area which is protected from fires spreading from adjacent sections of buildings and areas,
173. area of fire compartment: the sum expressed in m2 of the floor area of all the rooms in a
fire compartment,
174. clearance: the smallest permissible horizontal distance between adjacent buildings,
adjacent open-air storage units, adjacent buildings and open-air storage units belonging to separate
fire compartments,
175. fire spread barrier: a fire breaking building structure attached to the flooring or a wall
or erected on the roof so as to prevent fire from spreading between floor levels, fire compartments,
roof zones and adjacent buildings by virtue of its shape, size, fire resistance performance and
capacity to prevent the propagation of fire,
176. protection against fire spread: any and all solutions that, if applied perpetually, will
prevent fire from spreading into a protected building, building section or unit of open-air storage by
means of clearance, fire breaking building structures, built-in fire protection units and other
configurations ensuring fire propagation or fire resistance limit values,
177. limit of fire spread: the time expressed in hours or minutes between starting the
applicable fire propagation test in line with technical requirements and the moment the tested
building structure reaches its boundary state of fire resistance,
178. fire sign: a security sign indicating the location of fire protection equipment, devices or
fire extinguishers,
179. Fire Protection Technical Compliance Manual: a fire protection document that lays
down fire protection data as such evolved after the construction, reconstruction or expansion of a
building along with the terms of use pertaining to the safe operation of the building,
180. fire protection class: a category set up based on the typical behaviour of building
structures exposed to fire established on the basis of tests administered in line with applicable
technical requirements,
 13

181. fire protection operation log: a document verifying the control, review and maintenance
of technical solutions relating to fire protection,
182. fire breaking suspended ceiling: suspended ceiling installed in a room and in no more
than a single fire compartment with fire breaking parameters that taken together with the floor or
roof structure above it will ensure compliance with the required fire resistance limit values.
183. fireproof cladding or cover: the outermost or bottommost layer of material that protects
the inner layer connecting directly or indirectly to a vertical, horizontal or diagonal building
structure from fire damage,
184. fire breaking capacity: the capacity of the cladding on a wall or ceiling to protect the
underlying material from fire, charring or other damage for a certain period of time,
185. fire hazard class: a classification of a substance or a mixture that characterises its
behaviour and degree of hazard based on physical and chemical properties from the perspective of
fire protection,
186. activity representing a fire hazard: an activity involving temperatures higher than the
ignition temperature or flame point of a combustible substance in the vicinity, open flame or
glowing, smouldering or sparkling, which can be assumed to act as a source of ignition,
187. commissioning engineer: a contracted person responsible for commissioning on behalf
of the principal installed fire alarm units or fire extinguishers, for performing the related inspections,
checks and operation tests and for evaluating the appropriateness of the equipment, provided that
such person shall be qualified to design fire alarms and fire extinguishers as required under law,
188. operator: a person or organisation responsible for running a facility, building or
building section and for ensuring the specific circumstances laid down in Article 18 of Act XXXI of
1996 on Fire Protection, Technical Rescue and the Firefighter while doing so,
189. operator inspection: asserting, typically by visual inspection, and recording in writing
the operability and state of good repair of a technical solution performed by a person acting as the
operator's auditor or one holding the operators letter of engagement,
190. person performing operator inspection: a person engaged or authorised by an operator
to perform an operator audit,
191. plastered heat insulation system: a complex system and set of elements comprising
several layers and an insulating core, fitted on an external perimeter wall to offer protection against
external weather and mechanical impacts by means of its protective cladding or cover,
192. partition wall: a non-bearing wall structure delimiting a room from floor to floor,
193. spandrel wall: a non-bearing wall structure supported and fixed for solidity with a
structure of beams,
194. protective structures: structural elements that ensure the protection of occupants and the
stability of a building in case of fire.
195. protection level: a category with parameters such as the level of development of built-in
fire alarms and fire extinguishers and the size of the area controlled by a fire alarm and affected by
extinguishing capacity due to the presence of a fire extinguisher,
196. protective wall: a wall structure capable of intercepting the force of explosion
overpressure released through a rupturing and rupturing-opening surface,
197. emergency exit: an exit not used during regular operations but taken into account for
evacuation purposes,
198. fire protection audit of electric equipment: an audit performed by an authorised person
with a view to verifying the appropriateness and finding the faults of and classifying electric
equipment from the perspective of fire safety,
199. applicable technical requirement: any and all national and European Union standards.
200. enclosed walkway: a communication passage delimited by primary building structures
from all sides
 14

III.
GOALS OF PROTECTION AND DESIGN PRINCIPLES

Article 5

(1) The fire protection requirements laid down in this Decree shall be implemented for
achieving goals related to saving lives, safeguarding community and proprietor valuables.

(2) The purpose of saving lives includes in particular:

a) ensuring that persons exposed to threats can escape or be rescued,
b) ensuring living conditions in the course of escaping or rescue,
c) protection of the participants of firefighting intervention,
d) ensuring the conditions for firefighting intervention.

(3) The purpose of safeguarding community valuables includes in particular:

a) protection of residential property,
b) protection of individual elements of vital systems,
c) protection of institutions that ensure fundamental provisions for society,
d) protection and safeguarding of cultural heritage,
e) protecting and safeguarding the environment – soil, flora and fauna, air and water – to
prevent irreversible harm or harm that can only be remedied with disproportionately large
investment.

(4) The purpose of safeguarding proprietor valuables includes in particular:

a) ensuring the continuity of operations and functioning,
b) protection of property, inventory and livestock,
c) protection of assets and equipment and keeping them in a state of good repair,
d) avoiding loss of market and
e) optimisation of the costs of ownership, insurance and operation.

(5) Measures taken by proprietors in an attempt to achieve objectives related to safeguarding

valuables may not adversely affect the attainment of objectives related to saving lives and
community valuables.

Article 6

(1) When designing building products and building structures, they shall be selected in a
manner to ensure that
a) supporting structures retain their load-bearing capacity and dividing structures retain
their integrity and thermal insulation capacity for a period of time specified in this Decree taking
into account the expected impact of fire,
b) building structures and building products designed to achieve a fire protection related
objectives fulfil their role and remain functional for a period of time specified in this Decree and
respond to the presence of fire effectively,
c) they block, render more difficult or direct the propagation of fire and its concomitants in
line with their function, and
d) the volume of heat, smoke and combustion products they give off is kept to a bare
minimum.

(2) Barriers should be applied to prevent fire and its concomitants from spreading to
a) adjacent buildings,
b) escape routes,
 15

c) adjacent fire compartments,

d) adjacent units with independent designated functions,
e) building levels other than the floor where the fire started,
f) spaces delimited with fire breaking structures,
g) temporary protected areas.

(3) The following shall be ensured for building occupants

a) that they can reach the escape route from any point of the building during the period of
time while living conditions are provided for along the way to the escape route,
b) that they can use the escape route without delay, that escape routes are recognisable,
illuminated, obstacles are removed and routes have proper throughput capacity,
c) that escape routes are protected from fire and its concomitants,
d) that they can reach a safe or a transitionally protected area within a period or distance
specified in line with the capacity to escape or that the location they occupy is protected, and
e) depending on the actual risk that they are provided with
ea) prompt information about the fire with appropriate content adjusted to the stages of
evacuation,
eb) alternative escape options and evacuation in several directions,
ec) technical solutions reducing the likelihood of panic developing, and
ed) a suitable area in the vicinity of the building necessary for leaving the building.

(4) As the heat and smoke generated during a fire has detrimental effects, protection against
heat and smoke shall ensure
a) protection for escaping persons,
b) the reduction of heat impact on supporting structures,
c) that the source of fire is perceivable and is accessible from at least one direction, and
d) the protection of valuables depending on the proprietor's decision and willingness to take
risks.

(5) The following shall be ensured for the sake of effective firefighting interventions:
a) obstacles are cleared to provide smooth access to the building with vehicles,
b) appropriate supply of extinguishing materials are supplied in and around the building,
c) opportunity to recognise sources of threat,
d) equipment and tools assisting firefighter interventions and that the firefighter can handle
them and
e) depending on the actual risk
ea) that the firefighter is alarmed promptly, is given information of appropriate detail about
the location of the fire and any circumstances affecting intervention,
eb) an available area as necessary for the operation of fire trucks and technical equipment in
the vicinity of the building, and
ec) entry into the building without causing damage.

Article 7

(1) Initial parameters of fire protection design:

a) the fire protection solutions of a building shall be designed and dimensioned taking into
account the harmful effect of a single fire starting at any location inside the building at any time,
b) the building is used according to its designated purpose when the fire starts,
c) the number of people exposed to threat and their capacity to escape match the designated
purpose,
d) the fire covers a single fire compartment including the location where it started, and
 16

e) no simultaneous event occurs at the time of the fire, such that would pose a threat or risk
or would render fire protection solutions inoperable.

(2) When designing the interrelations, connections and junctions between fire safety
equipment and technical solutions, the effect of defects resulting in inoperable state shall be taken
into account.

IV.
CLASSIFICATION BY FIRE HAZARD AND RISK

Article 8

Fire protection requirements shall be established on the basis of the fire hazard category of
substances, the risk category of units of hazard and the standard risk category of independent
building sections and special structures.

1. Fire hazard categories of substances

Article 9

(1) The Explosion Hazard category includes:

a) substances and mixtures described in the Act of Chemical Safety as explosive, highly
flammable, flammable or moderately flammable,
b) liquids or melts with indoor flash point below 21 °C, or open-air flash point at most 55 °C,
or where the operating temperature is higher than the value of the open-air flash point reduced by
20 °C,
c) combustible gases, vapours, mists,
d) dust that forms an explosive mixture when combined with air, and
e) substances classified in fire hazard categories “A” or “B” prior to the effective date of this
Decree.

(2) The Fire Hazard category includes:

a) combustible solids, unless classified as explosive,
b) gas oils, heating oils and petroleum with open-air flash point at or above 50 °C.
c) liquids or melts with open-air flash point above 55 °C, or with operating temperature
below open-air flash point by at least 20 °C,
d) gases that are not combustible themselves but feed combustion, except for air,
e) building materials defined using a procedure complying with the applicable technical
requirements with ignition temperature above 150 °C and classified in fire safety categories B-F,
f) aqueous dispersion systems whose flash point cannot be established using standard
methods and contain over 25 % combustible substances and less than 50 % water, and
g) substances classified in fire hazard categories “C” or “D” prior to the effective date of
this Decree.

(3) The No Fire Hazard category includes:

a) non-combustible substances,
b) building materials classified to belong to fire safety classes A1 or A2, and
c) substances classified in fire hazard category “E” prior to the effective date of this Decree.

2. Definition of risk
 17

Article 10

(1) To determine the risk that influences fire protection requirements, the following shall be
specified:
a) the units of hazard in a building and in an independent building section, the related risk
categories and in turn the standard risk category of the building and the independent building
section, and
b) the risk category of special structures.

(2) The unit of hazard may be:

a) a unit with independent designated purpose,
b) a group of adjacent units with independent designated purpose as defines in Article 11,
c) a special structure or
d) a part of the building, the independent building section or special structure identified by
the person responsible for preparing fire safety documentation by taking the provisions of
paragraph (3) into account.

(3) When identifying the size of units of hazard, the person responsible for preparing fire
safety documentation takes into consideration
a) the designated purpose,
b) the capacity of rooms and the interconnections between individual rooms,
c) the location of rooms compared to the exit level,
d) the capacity of occupants to escape, their familiarity with the location and wakefulness,
e) the tools and equipment required for rescuing persons, and the necessary and available
number of staff that can assist rescue efforts,
h) the quantity of substances produced, used, generated and stored, along with fire hazard
characteristics, classifications and whether they are extinguishable,
i) the circumstances of production, use and storage that affect fire hazard,
j) stored, exhibited materials and objects, and those affected by the activity associated with
designated purpose from the perspective of safeguarding community valuables and whether or not
they can be replaced,
k) the amenities of existing buildings,
l) the characteristics of vital system elements,
m) the circumstances and typical features of the activity, the conditions emanating from the
particular technology and their characteristics,
n) the availability of built-in fire alarms and fire extinguishers.

(4) In addition to the factors identified in subparagraphs a)–c) of paragraph (2) a unit of
hazard may include
a) communication passages,
b) storage rooms used for storing items related to the designated purpose,
c) a parking garage accommodating no more than four vehicles,
d) an electric and a building engineering room,
e) if the basic designated purpose is industrial, agricultural or storage, then a room for social
welfare and one related to performing business administration jobs.

Article 11

(1) The following may be placed in one and the same unit of hazard:
a) apartments with apartments,
 18

b) apartments and units with independent designated functions serving a community purpose,
if the latter
ba) are classified as VLR or LR in row 4 of Table 1 of Annex 1,
bb) are classified as VLR in Tables 2–4 of Annex 1
bc) are fitted with built-in fire alarm or fire extinguishing equipment, provided these are
uniformly installed across the whole unit of hazard,
c) apartments with independent units serving a community or industrial purpose, if
ca) the risk category of the apartments is VLR or LR according to Table 1 in Annex 1,
cb) the risk category of the independent unit serving a community or industrial purpose is
VLR according to Table 1 in Annex 1,
cc) the floor area of the independent unit serving an industrial purpose is at or below 100 m2,
and
cd) they are fitted with built-in fire alarm or fire extinguishing equipment, provided these are
uniformly installed across the whole unit of hazard.

(2) As regards the cases described in paragraph (1), the basic designated purpose of the unit
of hazard is the same as the basic designated purpose of the independent unit occupying the largest
floor space in the unit of hazard from among the independent units with identical designated
purpose based on the total size of floor space consolidated by designated purposes.

Article 12

(1) The hazard category of a unit of hazard shall be determined on the basis of:
a) the provisions of Chapter XII for special structures,
b) the provisions of paragraph (2) for industrial and agricultural designated purposes not
mentioned in Table 4 of Annex 1,
c) Tables 1–4 of Annex 1 in other cases.
(2) The person responsible for preparing fire safety documentation determines the hazard category
of units of hazard by examining and evaluating the parameters listed in Article 10(3) and all other
circumstances affecting fire protection status and by taking into account the risk categories assigned
to similar designated purposes in Table 4 of Annex 1.
(3) Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph (4), the standard risk category of buildings,
independent building sections and special structures shall be identical to the most severe risk
category assigned to their units of hazard.
(4) The standard risk category of buildings, independent building sections and special structures
shall be one category higher in severity than that established on the basis of paragraph (3) in the
event the capacity of the building or independent building section surpasses
a) 500 persons in category VLR,
b) 1 500 persons in category LR,
c) 3 000 persons in category MR,
(5) Classified by the degree of risk, buildings, independent building sections, special structures and
units of hazard may belong to the category of
a) Very Low Risk or VLR,
b) Low Risk or LR,
c) Medium Risk or MR,
d) High Risk or HR.

V.
GENERAL STRUCTURAL REQUIREMENTS
 19

Article 13

(1) Materials with ignition temperatures below 150 °C, determined by tests complying with
the relevant technical requirements, cannot be used as building materials, except for tar, bitumen,
and dried paint and glue.

(2) Building materials with fire classifications of F, Ffl and FL can only be incorporated if
a) its use is specifically authorised by the technical specifications,
b) during its use a multi-layered building structure is established, which this Decree requires
to comply with fire resistance performance requirement, and the created building structure,
examined in combination with building materials and building products with fire classifications of F,
Ffl and FL A1, belong to the fire classifications of A2 or B and meets the fire resistance performance
requirement.

(3) The multi-layered building product with fire classifications of F, Ffl and FL can only be
incorporated if, when examined in combination with building materials of F fire classification, it
belongs in the fire classifications of A1, A2 or B and the continuity of the material belonging to fire
classification F can be interrupted in justified cases, at fire compartment boundaries, with materials
belonging in the fire classifications of A1 or A2.

(3) The characteristics of the building material and building structure must be verified
according to Act XXXI of 1996 on fire protection, technical rescue, and firefighting. The
implementation documentation’s fire protection section does not substitute the documents that
verify the fire protection characteristics of the building product and building structure.

(4) Building methods with system permits, and buildings that are being built with
lightweight technology, can only be established with structural elements, layers, designs, and
technology tested by accredited institutions.

Article 14

(1) Fire classification A1 consists of

a) building structures built from materials classified under fire classification A1,
b) building structures with load-bearing components or reinforcing elements consisting of
materials classified under fire classification A1, which has armament, crust element of fire
classification A1, and the fire resistance threshold of the armament/crust also complies
independently with the specific requirements, including the warm-up threshold, regardless of the
fire classification of materials (thermal insulation, sound insulation, other filling materials) under or
above the armament/crust,
c) building structures whose basic structure or internal frame, the material of the thermal and
sound insulation layer between the frame, and the external layer of its multi-layered armament from
the user space belong to fire classification A1, and whose internal armament layers belong to fire
classification A1 or A2.

(2) Fire classification A2 consists of

a) building structures built from materials classified under fire classification A2,
b) a layered building structure whose armament or crust element materials belong to fire
classification A1 or A2, and its internal layer protected by this armament/crust belongs to fire
category B, C, or D, but whose heat of combustion is at most 10 MJ/m2, projected to the average
surface,
 20

c) a silicate based, homogeneous lightweight building structure of fire classification B-E,

which complies with the fire resistance performance requirement specified for the structure, verified
by laboratory tests, and which has a heat of combustion of at most 5 MJ/kg,
d) building structures with load-bearing components or reinforcing elements consisting of
materials classified under fire classification A2, which has armament, crust element of fire
classification A2, and the fire resistance threshold of the armament/crust also complies
independently with the specific requirements, including the warm-up threshold, regardless of the
fire classification of materials (thermal insulation, sound insulation, other filling materials) under or
above the armament/crust.

(3) Fire classification B consists of building structures

a) whose materials or components are at least fire classification B,
b) whose internal components were built from materials with C-E fire classification, but
which are covered by material with at least a fire classification B to protect against fire or heat in
such a way that within the specific fire resistance threshold according to the requirements, no
hazardous amount of smoke or combustible melt rises towards the protected space.

(4) Fire classification C consists of building structures

a) whose materials or components are, at least fire classification C,
b) whose internal components were built from materials with D-E fire classification, but
which are covered by material with at least a fire classification C to protect against fire or heat in
such a way that within the specific fire resistance threshold according to the requirements, no
hazardous amount of smoke or combustible melt rises towards the protected space.

(5) Fire classification D consists of building structures

a) whose materials or components are, at least fire classification D,
b) whose internal components were built from materials with E fire classification, but which
are covered by material with at least a fire classification D to protect against fire or heat in such a
way that within the specific fire resistance threshold according to the requirements, no hazardous
amount of smoke or combustible melt rises towards the protected space.

(6) Fire classification E consists of building structures built from materials of fire
classification E, without special protection provided for fire or heat effects.

(7) The fire classification of the structure is not affected by

a) in case of structures with fire classification A1
aa) a coating or covering, which has a thickness of at least 1.5 mm and a heat of combustion
of at most 2 MJ/m2,
ab) an internal non-significant component, whose heat of combustion is at most 1.4 MJ/m2,
b) in case of structures with fire classification A2
ba) a coating or covering, which has a thickness of at least 1.5 mm and a heat of combustion
of at most 4 MJ/m2,
bb) an internal non-significant component, whose heat of combustion is at most 4 MJ/m2,
bc) a vapour barrier foil of at least a fire classification of E, used in an assembled roof
structure consisting of building products with fire classification A1-A2, whose heat of combustion
is at most 10.5 MJ/m2, and whose heat of combustion for the entire roof structure does not exceed a
criteria of 3 MJ/kg, furthermore, whose transitions and penetrations are ensured to have fire
resistant closures in such a way that the vapour barrier foil cannot ignite at the transitions within the
time period specified for the roof structure.
 21

(8) Classification of structures whose fire classification cannot be clearly determined based
on paragraphs (1)–(7), must be determined with consideration of the behaviour of their components
as detected during the fire technical tests, and according to the fire classification of its components.

3. Structural stability in fire event

Article 15

(1) The supporting structures of buildings and special building structures must be designed
and implemented in such a way that in case of a fire, and until the time period specified in this
Decree,
a) their load-bearing capacity is maintained,
b) by their structural stability they ensure the intended function of the protective structures
and
c) the fire compartment or separate building section is able to fulfil its protective ability
against fire and its accompanying effects.

(2) No fire protection requirement exists with regard to the building structures of the
following edifices:
a) ground floor buildings used exclusively for plant cultivation,
b) ground floor storage buildings for the storage of only non-flammable materials, and
products/items made from such materials, without combustible packaging materials or storage
devices,
c) a ground floor, independent building of commercial purpose with a floor area up to 15 m2,
and
d) a ground floor agricultural, industrial, or storage building with standard risk classification
of Very Low Risk or Low Risk, and an area up to 1 000 m2, if
da) evacuation of all rooms to the outdoors is ensured in the first stage of evacuation,
db) the number of persons simultaneously staying in the building is no more than 10.

(3) Containers not containing electrical or mechanical installations must comply with the
requirements pertaining to the outdoors.

(4) Containers containing electrical or mechanical installations must comply with the
requirements pertaining to buildings.

Article 16

(1) The supporting structure elements ensuring the structural stability of structures must
comply with the requirements set forth in Table 1 of Annex 2.

(2) The fire classification and fire resistance performance requirement of bridging materials
a) when used in fire walls, fireproof walls and in fireproof bulkheads is A1 R x, where x is
equivalent to the time duration requirement specified for the host wall,
b) in other cases is equivalent to the requirement for the load-bearing pillar.

(3) The requirement, set forth in Table 1 of Annex 2, pertaining to single-storey buildings
with a basement level, can be applied to the structures of buildings having a single storey or single
storey with basement, with basic functions of only industrial, agricultural, or storage risk units, if
the building has at least one additional level above the ground floor, not exceeding 20 % of the floor
area of the building.
 22

(4) Establishing a level-dividing roof and stairs for it is permitted from a structure with at
least a fire classification D.

(5) Fastening and installation of fire event service leads and related must be carried out
according to Article 137(1) and (2).

(6) Requirements pertaining to each building structure must be determined with

consideration of its static role within the building and the order of load transfer. A structure of lower
fire resistance than the required fire resistance for the structure in question cannot be used for the
support, propping, suspension, or buttressing of a building structure.

VI.
PROTECTION AGAINST THE SPREAD OF FIRE

4. Protection against the spread of fire between adjacent structures,

and open-air storage units

Article 17

(1) The spread of fire must be prevented

a) between adjacent buildings on the same lot or an adjacent lot,
b) between the open-air storage area’s storage unit and an adjacent building,
c) between fire compartments formed from the adjacent storage units of an open-air storage
area and
d) and between special structures and an adjacent building or special structure, if this Decree
specifies.

(2) There is no need to provide protection against the spread of fire between adjacent
buildings on the same lot, if
a) the buildings can be designed as part of a single fire compartment,
b) the building section containing the building and the façade opposite of the building within
the fire separation distance can be designed as a single fire compartment, or
c) if the building sections containing the buildings and the façade opposite of the building
within the fire separation distance can be designed as a single fire compartment.

(3) There is no need to provide protection against the spread of fire between buildings and
an open-air storage area’s storage unit on the same lot, if the open-air storage area or part of it or the
building or part of it can be designed as a single fire compartment according to paragraph (4).

(4) The open-air storage area’s storage unit can be part of the fire compartment of the
building or partial building if the storage unit would be part of the fire compartment if it were to be
designed as a storage place.

(5) In cases listed in paragraph (1), protection against the spread of fire is necessary
a) by maintaining the fire separation distance,
b) by establishing a firewall in case of buildings on an adjacent lot or a building and a
storage unit in an open-air storage area on an adjacent lot,
c) by establishing a firewall between adjacent fire compartments of open-air storage areas,
exceeding the storage height by at least 1.0 m, and having a fire resistance performance of at least
REI 90-M,
 23

d) by adequately implementing the requirements pertaining to the separation of the fire

compartments of the building, protected against the spread of fire on the façade and roof within the
fire separation distance in case of buildings on the same lot or a building and open-air storage area’s
storage unit on the same lot.

5. Fire separation distance

Article 18

(1) The fire separation distance must be determined

a) according to Tables 1–3 of Annex 3,
b) in case of special structures, according to Section XII, or
c) by calculation.

(2) In case of determining the fire separation distance according to Table 3 of Annex 3, out
of the fire separation distances assigned to each fire compartment of the storage units of different
adjacent open-air storage areas, the greater one should be used.

(3) The fire separation distance from the building is to be measured

a) from the plan projection of the building’s façade or any partial building jutting out from
the frontal plane,
b) in case of a technological equipment outside of a building, or in connection with it, from
its plan projection, and
c) in case of open-air storage in the same fire compartment with the building or part of the
building, from the side border of the storage area.

(4) The fire separation distance to be maintained from the storage unit is to be measured
from the side border of the designated storage area, from the smallest plan projection of the stored
material.

(5) For technological equipment outside of a building, not in connection with it, the need for
and degree of a fire separation distance will be determined by the person responsible for preparing
the fire protection documentation.

Protection against the spread of fire between parts of structures

Article 19

(1) Protection against the spread of fire must be ensured

a) between adjacent fire compartments,
b) between adjacent risk units,
c) on the façade and roof, if this Decree requires,
d) within special structures, if this Decree requires,
e) between adjacent premises and groups of premises belonging to the same fire
compartment, if this Decree requires,
f) between structure levels belonging to the same fire compartment, if this Decree requires.

(2) If used for protecting fire resistant building structures from the spread of fire, the fire
classification and fire resistance performance requirements set forth in Table 1 of Annex 2 must be
followed.
 24

(3) The permanently installed spread of fire prevention equipment used to protect against the
spread of fire must comply with the following requirements:
a) the equipment is automatically activated in case of sensing fire,
b) the operating equipment prevents the spread of fire, heat, and smoke between the spaces it
separates for the duration of the fire resistance performance requirement specified for the
substituted fire resistant building structure to the degree required by the substituted building
structure’s function and based on the specifications pertaining to the fire protection test,
c) the equipment’s suitability to protect against the spread of fire
ca) supporting a realistic sized fire test result has been accepted by the central Disaster
Management Body for the designated purpose or
cb) the inspection body verified it through a realistic sized fire test, coordinated by the
central Disaster Management Body according to the inspection plan.

Article 20

(1) A fireproof bulkhead, fireproof wall, or permanently installed spread of fire prevention
equipment substituting these must be used to separate
a) a separate unit of designation from an adjacent space,
b) a space subject to heat and smoke protection from an adjacent space,
c) an escape route from an adjacent space,
d) a space with capacity for over 20 persons from an adjacent space,
e) a space from an adjacent space, as required by this Decree.

(2) A fire resistant closure is not required in a bulkhead as defined in paragraph (1) at the
transfer site of mechanical or electrical wiring systems.

6. Establishing fire compartments

Article 21

(1) Fire compartments must be established

a) within the risk unit, if its floor area exceeds the maximum allowed fire compartment
size, and from the storage units of an open-air storage area, if their combined floor area, extent
exceeds the maximum allowed fire compartment size,
b) in a special structure according to Section XII,
c) in a utility tunnel, if the fire protection authority considers it necessary for preventing
the spread of fire.

(2) The maximum allowed size of the structure’s fire compartments are listed in
a) Table 1 of Annex 5 in case of residential and community functions,
b) Table 2 of Annex 5 in case of storage functions,
c) Table 3 of Annex 5 in case of industrial and agricultural functions,
d) Section XII in case of special structures.

(3) The maximum allowed size of the fire compartment established from storage units of
open-air storage areas
a) is 10 000 m2 in case of exclusively materials and products of non-flammable
classification, if they are stored without the use of combustible packaging or storage device,
b) is 4 000 m2 in case of exclusively materials and products of flammable classification if
they are stored with the use of combustible packaging or storage device,
c) is 2 000 m2 in case of materials or products of flammable classification, regardless of the
combustibility of the packaging.
 25

(4) The maximum allowed floor area of the fire compartment in case of a separate unit of
designation with differing functions, placed in the same risk unit, consists of
a) the maximum allowed fire compartment floor area assigned for the function taking up
the largest part of the risk unit’s floor area,
b) in case the floor areas taken up by each function is the same, the maximum allowed fire
compartment floor area connected to the function resulting in the smallest fire compartment floor
area.

7. Fire compartment connections on external structures of buildings

Article 22

(1) At the fire compartment boundary line, a barrier against the spread of fire or
substituting permanently installed spread of fire prevention equipment must be established
a) between external partition wall surfaces belonging to different fire compartments, with
the exception of those listed in paragraph (2),
b) on the roof.

(2) In case of external partition wall surfaces belonging to different fire compartments, and
closing an angle less than 120°, the wall surfaces belonging to different fire compartments and
located up to 5 m from each other must be established with protection against the spread of fire.

Article 23

(1) At the connection of fire compartments of various heights, protection against the spread
of fire must be established
a) on the façade of the higher fire compartment, up to a height of 10 m measured vertically
from the connection (according to Figure 1 of Annex 4) or
b) on the roof surface of the lower fire compartment, measured from the façade of the
higher fire compartment, within 5 m horizontally (according to Figure 2 of Annex 4).

(2) If the height of one of the fire compartments measured from the fire compartment
boundary line horizontally within a distance of 5 m exceeds the roof surface height forming the fire
compartment boundary, protection against the spread of fire must be established
a) on the roof surface of the fire compartments, measured horizontally within a distance of
5 m from the higher façade (according to Figure 4 of Annex 4) or
b) on the roof surface between the fire compartment boundary and the higher façade and
on the higher façade up to a height of 10 m measured vertically from the roof surface (according to
Figure 3 of Annex 4).

8. Additional requirements of protection against the spread of fire on the façade

Article 24

(1) Protection against the spread of fire on the façade includes

a) following the requirements regarding the fire classification of the external partition wall,
insulation material, and the cladding, coating, plastered insulation system, as well as the
requirements for interruption,
b) in case of establishing a ventilated cavity walls, preventing the spread of fire within the
cavity,
c) following the façade fire spread threshold, as required by this Decree.
 26

(2) The external partition wall segment belonging in the same fire compartment must be
established with the protection against the spread of fire on the façade, except for
a) external partition walls of fire classification A1 and A2 without an opening,
b) the plinth wall that has no opening of the façade with opening,
c) façade sections belonging in a space consisting of a single airspace,
d) a single-storey building,
e) having a ground floor and up to two additional levels
ea) a single-unit residential building,
eb) retreat not qualifying as a lodging and
f) an external partition wall satisfying the criteria of a barrier against the spread of fire on the
façade when using cladding, coating, plastered insulation systems without cavity wall, belonging in
fire classification A1 or A2.

Article 25

(1) The fire classification of the applied façade insulation material may be
a) A1 exclusively, with the exception of the plinth, in case of an external partition wall
designed with a ventilated cavity wall,
b) A1-E on the plinth surface.

(2) The cladding, coating, plastered insulation system of the external partition wall may be
a) fire classification A1 or A2 exclusively
aa) on the external partition walls of high-rise buildings with or without openings,
ab) on the lower surface of roofs bordering, from below, protruding building sections of
buildings classified as Medium Risk and High Risk,
ac) on the wall and ceiling surfaces of open passages and gateways of buildings classified as
Low Risk, Medium Risk, or High Risk, if these are the only possible escape route and the only
access route for the fire department,
ad) on a fire wall up to a height of 5 m measured vertically from the ground connection,
with the exception of the plinth, and
ae) in case of a ventilation shaft designed with a wall with an opening, and
b) classification A1-D at other places.

(3) On external partition walls without openings, with the exception of those listed in
paragraph (2)(a), B-E fire classification, B-D fire classification cladding, coating, and other
plastered insulation system with an insulation nucleus of over 10 cm thickness, can be used if it is
separated from the generally used cladding, coating, insulation system with fire classification A1 or
A2 on the external partition wall surfaces with opening, using a minimum of 20 cm thick fire
protection strip.

(4) Cladding, coating, and other plastered insulation systems of fire classification B-E,
having an insulation nucleus thicker than 10 cm, must be implemented according to one of two
solutions listed in points a) and b):
a) above the façade doorways everywhere a fire protection strip consisting of fire
classification A1 or A2 material with at least 90 kg/m3 density, and at least 20 cm thickness must be
installed instead of the generally used material on the façade surface, and at least in the same
thickness, which must extend at least 30 cm past the two sides of the basic structure of the opening;
insulation of fire classification B-E cannot be used between the fire protection strip that consists of
fire classification A1 or A2 material and the door,
b) the fire protection strip with material and height requirement listed in Point a) can also be
designed without interruption above the façade doorways, if the distance between the upper edge of
 27

the façade doorway’s basic structure and the lower edge of the fire protection strip above it is at
least 50 cm, and the strip is created by levels.

(5) In case of using cladding, coating, and other plastered insulation systems of B-E fire
classification and with an insulation nucleus of over 10 cm thickness, if the façade doorway falls in
insulation plane, a fire protection strip of a material with fire classification A1 or A2, at least
90 kg/m3 density, and at least 20 cm thickness must be installed everywhere around the façade
doorway instead of the normally used material, and at least in the same thickness.

(6) In places where renovation for energy purposes is being implemented with state subsidy,
and there is a façade fire spread threshold requirement in place with regard to the building, the start
of implementation with fire classification B-E insulation nucleus, or the start of implementation
with cavity wall façade cladding, coating, and other plastered insulation systems, must be reported
by the contractor in writing prior to the start of the contract work, at least 15 days in advance, in a
statement with the approval of the recipient, submitted to the inspection body verifying the
implementation of the subsidy. The inspection body verifying the implementation of the subsidy
will inspect that the contractor work is suitable in case of state-funded projects, and will send the
record made of the inspection to the fire protection authority within eight days.

(7) In buildings not qualified as high-rise buildings and in buildings that have at least two
additional levels above the ground floor, fire classification D, and in case of more than two levels
specialised industry loggia tailboards of fire classification B with opening may be used, if the loggia
is located in front of a separate unit of designation, and if the loggia is bordered by at least 1.20 m
roofs and side walls of adequate fire resistance for the building’s standard risk class, and these do
not contain combustible cladding, coating, and other insulation systems, furthermore, the loggia
balustrade and its rail is made of material with fire classification A1 or A2.

(8) The plant runners, shading or acoustic structures in front of the façade must be
established in such a way that they do not adversely influence the spread of fire on the façade.

Article 26

(1) There is a façade fire spread threshold requirement

a) for external partition wall structures with openings,
b) for external partition wall structures of fire classification B–E,
c) for the external partition wall structure involved when using cladding, coating, and
plastered insulation systems of fire classification B-D, attached, assembled without air-gap, and
when using cladding, coating, and plastered insulation systems of fire classification A1-D.

(2) Ensuring the façade fire spread threshold by test can be substituted
a) by designing the façade in accordance with a façade fire spread barrier in case of
paragraph (1)(a) and (b),
b) in cases according to paragraph (1) by establishing a permanently installed fire spread
barrier equipment or an external partition wall with fire resistance performance for the same period
of time as the façade fire spread threshold requirement.

(3) The façade fire spread threshold requirement for the external partition wall for the entire
height of the building, verified by tests based on relevant technical requirements
a) is 15 minutes in case of ground floor and at most 2 additional levels,
b) is 30 minutes in case of ground floor and at least 3, at most 4 additional levels, and
c) is 45 minutes in case of ground floor and more than four additional levels.
 28

9. Mechanical and electrical transfers

Article 27

(1) In building structures between premises with E and I fire resistance performance, as
specified by this Decree, in the thread-through locations of electrical or mechanical wire systems
through the structure, in gaps, openings, joints between the wire and building structure, the spread
of fire must be prevented until the fire resistance performance requirement period specified for the
building structure affected by the thread-through.

(2) At the thread-through locations listed in paragraph (1), in case of fireproof closure, the
fireproof closure must be permanently labelled on both sides of the building structure affected by
the thread-through, with the exception of the internal surface of electrical and mechanical tunnels.
The labelling must include with regard to the applied closure
a) its name,
b) its fire protection characteristics,
c) the certificate of conformity or performance statement identifier,
d) the name of business carrying out the implementation,
e) date of implementation and
f) in the event of breakdown, warning of the necessity to replace it.

(3) Insulation of mechanical wires under fire classification B-E on the fire compartment
boundary must be threaded through in such a way that the method of thread-through will prevent
the spread of fire until the same period of time as the fire resistance performance period of the
structure that forms the fire compartment boundary.

(4) The electrical and mechanical wire systems thread through in groups between building
levels
a) if the standard risk classification of the building, separate building section is Medium
Risk, it must be threaded through in an electrical and mechanical tunnel,
b) if the standard risk classification of the building, separate building section is High Risk,
it must be threaded through in a separate electrical and mechanical tunnel containing only
mechanical wire systems.

(5) The walls of electrical and mechanical tunnels used for the attachment of wire systems
must be built from blocks or reinforced concrete of at least 12 cm thickness.

(6) The electrical and mechanical tunnel threaded through sections of building levels that
belong in the same fire compartment must be developed and positioned in such a way that the fire is
not allowed to spread between building levels over each other during the fire resistance
performance requirement period specified for the slab between levels, except for spreading within
the mechanical wire.

(7) Trash chutes, laundry chutes, or similar equipment transferred through building levels
belonging to the same fire compartment should be developed and positioned in such a way that the
fire does not spread over to the slab between levels during the fire resistance performance
requirement period
a) between building levels over one another, or
b) outside of spaces used to place trash chutes, laundry chutes, or other similar equipment.

10. Additional requirements of solutions for protection against the spread of fire
 29

Article 28

(1) The development of barriers against the spread of fire, its geometry must comply with
Figures 1–5 of Annex 6.

(2) An electrical or mechanical wire system can only cross the barrier against the spread of
fire if, at the protection plane of the spread of fire, the spread of fire along the wire system is
prevented by a suitable protective measure, or due to its development and designation, the wire
system itself is a barrier to the spread of fire.

(3) On a façade fire spread barrier, cladding, coating, and insulation belonging to fire
classification B-E cannot be implemented.

(4) The least amount of distance measured between the folded B-E fire classification
insulation against heat and rainwater positioned on either side of the spread of fire barrier at the
attic level, protruding out of the attic plane, and the surface of the barrier must be at least 0.6 m.

Article 29

(1) The firewall must be developed in such a way that it vertically intersects the entire
building, including the roof structure.

(2) In the firewall, openings with fireproof closures can be developed necessary for moving
between buildings and for technology connections, with a combined opening surface not exceeding
10 % of the firewall surface.

Article 30

(1) The fire resistant closure ensures protection against the spread of fire continually with its
closed condition or by automatically closing the opening in case of breakthrough or thread through
fire.

(2) With the exception of the maximum 0.1 m diameter wire used for wet room ventilation,
the fireproof closing element, controlled by the permanently installed fire alarm, must be used for
the fireproof closure of the HVAC wire passing through the fire compartment boundary, and its
control without delay must be ensured by the fire alarm if
a) at least one of the separated spaces is protected by a permanently installed fire alarm
and fire resistant closure is established or
b) establishing fire resistant closure and establishing a permanently installed fire alarm at
least in one of the separated spaces shall both take place within the framework of the construction
or conversion of the building or building section concerned.

(3) In cases listed under paragraph (2)(a) and (b), when passing the maximum 0.1 m
diameter wire used for wet room ventilation through the fire compartment, a fireproof closing
element operating by the principle of reactive functioning may be used to inhibit the spread of fire
within the wire.

(4) The permanently installed fire alarm must stop, without delay, the central ventilation
supplying the area controlled by the permanently installed fire alarm upon detection of fire.
 30

(5) The permanently installed fire alarm must control, without delay, the closing of the fire
resistant doors, installed within or at the border of fire compartments affected by the fire alarm,
which are open under normal operation, and controlled by the permanently installed fire alarm,
except in the following cases:
a) if the fire resistant doors, installed in building structures intersecting the transportation
routes of vehicles and transport equipment, material and product transport routes, or on the routes of
vehicles and transport equipment, material and product transport routes, are set to close with a
minimum of 0.5 or a maximum of 1.0 minute delay after detecting fire, and during the delay period,
the persons there call attention to the fact of the closing,
b) if the door is used for the evacuation of a space that holds crowds, and the delay period
does not exceed the time required for emptying the space.

(6) The stopping of the technological transport route passing through the fire compartment
boundary and the closing of the opening’s fire resistant must be controlled without delay by at least
one of the fire alarm installed in one of the affected fire compartments in case of a fire alarm, after
the opening becomes free in the fire compartment.

(7) The person responsible for preparing the fire protection documentation must determine
the classification of the fireproof door according to the automatic closing test cycle, with
consideration of expected use.

11. Requirements of roofs and attics

Article 31
(1) The roof covering
a) must be of A1-A2 fire classification in case of buildings with standard risk classification
of Medium Risk and High Risk, and in case of a separate building section,
b) in case of a building or separate building section of Very Low Risk and Low Risk
classification, it must be at least a classification of Broof(t1).

(2) A material of E or F fire classification may be used as roof covering, if the building has
at most a single storey and the fire protection authority has approved it for that building.

(3) In case of the construction of an attic, there must be a partition structure or coating
between the attic rooms and the roof structure that complies with the requirements for the
supporting structure of the roof slab with regard to its fire resistance performance. The fire
classification of the partition structure must be A1-A2
a) in case of a structure with more than four stories, not counting the attic level, of
Medium Risk standard risk category, and
b) in case of a structure of High Risk standard risk category.

(4) The use of the partitioning structure or coating listed in paragraph (3) is not required on
the roof structure’s element passing through the attic room in the following cases:
a) the fire resistance performance of the element passing through meets the requirements for
the supporting structure of the roof slab, and
b) the fire classification of the element passing through
ba) is at least D in case of a structure of Very Low Risk and Low Risk standard risk
category,
bb) is at least B in case of a structure with at most 4 stories, not counting the attic level, of
Medium Risk standard risk category, and
c) if the element and partition structure, coating connection that passes through is sufficient
with regard fire resistance.
 31

(5) The use of the partitioning structure listed in paragraph (3) is not required if the
possibility of the spread of fire between the separate units of designation and the unfinished part of
the attic is prevented by the time period of the fire resistance performance requirement specified for
the roof slab supporting structure.

(6) In case of attic installation, the insulation of the high roof must be
a) in case of a residential building with a single home or residential separate building section
of Very Low Risk, must be of A1-E fire classification,
b) in case of a building or separate building section of Very Low Risk that differs from that
listed in Point a), it must be of A1-D fire classification,
c) in case of a building or separate building section of Low Risk, it must be of A1-C fire
classification, and
d) in case of a building or separate building section of Medium Risk or High Risk, it must be
of fire classification A1-A2.

Article 32

(1) In case of a building with Medium Risk or High Risk standard risk categories, the roof slab
of up to 60 kg/m2 surface mass, which also contains partition elements
a) shall have a thermal insulation of A1-A2 fire classification,
b) shall have a rainwater insulation of A1-E fire classification.

(2) In case of a building with Medium Risk or High Risk standard risk categories, the roof
insulation system must be a category of Broof(t1).

(3) In case of a building with Very Low Risk or Low Risk standard risk categories, the thermal
insulation and water insulation material of the roof slab of up to 60 kg/m2 surface, which also
contains partition elements, must be an A1-E fire classification and the roof insulation system must
be a category of Broof(t1).

(4) The fire classification of the roof skylight surface,

a) in case of storage, industrial, or agricultural designations of Very Low Risk and Low Risk
units
aa) must be at least E d0 on the escape route,
ab) at least E at other locations, and
b) at least D d0 in other cases.

(5) A free opening, ventilation, skylight, heat and smoke extraction device must be spaced at
least 2.5 m away from the fire compartment boundary, and at least 5.0 m away from the firewall.

VII.
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS DEPENDING ON DESIGNATION

Article 33

(1) The premise designated for the production, processing, use, storage, and marketing of
potentially explosive materials must be separated from other areas with a fire resistant building
structure, and may be connected with another premise through a fire resistant foyer that ventilates
directly to the outdoors. In case of natural ventilation, at least 1 % of the floor area of the foyer, but
a minimum of 0.16 m2 area must be available for an effective ventilation surface. In case of an
 32

artificial construction, the foyer must have an available relative pressure of at least 50 Pa (0.0005
bar).

(2) The floor covering and plinth of the premise used for the production, processing, and
storage of potentially explosive materials, must be conductive in terms of electrostatics, not causing
an ignitable spark upon mechanical effect, if the material occurs in an explosive condition. In case
of flammable liquids, it must be designed in a way that is impervious to liquids.

(3) The door of the garbage collection room within the building that does not open to the
outdoors must be at least a fire classification D and fire resistance performance of EI2 30-C, and
furthermore its bordering wall structure must be at least a fire classification A2 and fire resistance
performance of EI 30.

(4) In residential or community buildings of Medium Risk or High Risk category, the
unfinished attic and basement door must be at least a fire classification D and fire resistance
performance of EI2 30-C.

(5) The wall structure of a premise of greater than 100 m2 floor area, used for the storage of
flammable materials, must be constructed from slab to slab. The wall structure must be at least a
fire classification A2 and fire resistance performance of EI 30, its door must be at least a fire
classification D and fire resistance performance of EI2 30-C.

(6) Central ventilation and air-conditioning units can only be placed and constructed in
separated spaces in an attic.

(7) The following must be bordered by appropriate fire resistant building structures appropriate
for the standard risk classification for the building in question:
a) a boiler room of over 140 kW total performance,
b) gas engine rooms, if the total performance exceeds 140 kW,
c) mechanical rooms over 200 m2 floor area, ventilating engine rooms,
d) attic space of the central air-conditioning,
e) transformer rooms,
f) electrical switch rooms and rooms containing the safety power supply equipment,
g) rooms containing the booster pump providing the fire water supply,
h) rooms containing equipment that support the energy supply and operability of hospitals,
national priority system elements,
i) fire intervention centre, and
j) locations specified by the fire protection authority on the basis of national security and
fire safety aspects.

(8) The extinguisher central room, engine room of the permanently installed extinguisher must
be separated from adjacent rooms by building structures of at least equivalent time to the required
operating time of the equipment. In the event that the operating time requirement exceeds the fire
resistance performance requirement time specified for the load-bearing wall of the structure, then
the partitioning wall must meet the fire resistance performance that is applicable to the load-bearing
wall.

(9) Accessibility to the sprinkler centre, pump house of the sprinkler system must be provided
from the outdoors, from a smokeless stairway or smokeless stairway foyer.

Article 34
 33

(1) Ventilation systems must be constructed in such a way that the ventilation system does not
allow the spread of potential fire or waste gas between different levels and units of separate
designations.

(2) The ducts and insulation of the ventilation equipment located outside of a mechanical shaft,
passing through several fire compartments must be made of materials classified under fire
classification A1 or A2.

(3) The ventilation duct passing through the mechanical shaft and other rooms within the fire
compartment must be made of material of at least a fire classification C, except in the event that
potentially explosive materials are present, in which case the materials must be classified in fire
classification A1 or A2.

(4) The ventilation grid must be made of materials of fire classification A1 or A2.

(5) A building structure under fire classification B-F is not allowed to come into contact with
the electric motor of the artificial ventilation.

Article 35

(1) In premises used for the production, processing, or storage of potentially explosive
materials and in explosion danger zones, the possibility of ventilation must be ensured.

(2) In case of artificial ventilation, ventilation equipment must be used that ensures that no
ignition spark is created when it is turned on or during operation, and that an external ignition
source does not constitute an ignition hazard through the equipment.

(3) In cases determined by law or by the fire protection authority, an automatic sensor and
indicator equipment must be used, which sounds an alarm when 20 % of the lower flammability
limit concentration is reached; furthermore, upon reaching 40 % of the lower flammability limit
concentration, it initiates the required interventions, emergency ventilation, and stops the
technology.

(4) In rooms used for the production, processing, and storage of potentially explosive materials,
and in explosion danger zones, recirculated ventilation may not be used.

(5) The exhaust of polluted air must be developed in such a way as to not endanger the
environment.

(6) In case of exhausting flammable materials, the dust chamber or settling vessel may only be
constructed from materials classified A1 or A2 fire classification. The interior surface cannot cause
an ignitable spark as a result of a mechanical effect.

12. Residential, resort designation

Article 36

(1) In case of residential designation, buildings classified in Very Low Risk or Low Risk
categories must have partition walls between residences of at least a fire resistance performance of
EI 30. In buildings classified in Medium Risk and High Risk category, the partition wall must be
constructed as a structure that has a fire resistance performance at least equivalent to a fireproof
wall.
 34

(2) In case of residential or resort designation, with the exception of a Very Low Risk
classification, residential doors opening into closed hallways, escape routes, or stairways must be at
least a fire classification D and fire resistance performance of EI2 30-C.

(3) In case of residential designation, with the exception of the Very Low Risk and Low Risk
classifications, residential doors opening into a closed middle or side hallway, escape route or
stairway must be at least a fire classification D and fire resistance performance of EI2 30.

13. Lodging designation

Article 37

(1) In case of lodging designation, the partition wall between room units must be at least a fire
resistance performance of EI 30 minutes.

(2) Except for the Very Low Risk and Low Risk categories, the entrance doors within room
units must be at least a fire classification D and fire resistance performance of EI2 30-C.

(3) The doors of storage rooms with floor area greater than 20 m2 that open to escape routes
must be at least a fire classification D and fire resistance performance of EI2 30-C.

(4) In case of rooms of buildings or building sections with lodging designation used for
containing crowds
a) the wall coverings, ceiling coverings, and internal wall thermal and sound insulation
must be at least a B-sl, d0 fire classification, and
b) the floor covering must be at least a Cfl-s1 fire classification.

14. Educational, childcare, playground designation

Article 38

(1) Daycare designation can only be established on a ground floor or exit level location.

(2) Preschool designation can only be established on a ground floor or exit level location, or at
an elevation at most 7.0 m higher.

(3) A separate unit of educational designation must be separated with a fire resistance building
structure from other units of designation.

(4) The premises used to accommodate children for extended periods

a) must have a wall covering of at least B-s1, d0 fire classification in case of Medium Risk
category, and at least A2-s1, d0 fire classification in case of High Risk category,
b) must have a ceiling covering of at least B-s1, d0 fire classification in case of Medium Risk
category, and at least A2-s1,d0 fire classification in case of High Risk category,
c) must have a floor covering of at least Bfl-s1 fire classification in case of Medium Risk and
High Risk categories, and
d) must have an internal wall thermal and sound insulation of A1 or A1 fire classification.

(5) If a permanently installed automatic fire alarm and extinguishing equipment protest the
entire unit of designation, materials classified under fire classification B may be used instead of A2
fire classification, in case of High Risk category.
 35

(6) In case of a home daycare, the general fire protection requirements for evacuation must be
followed according to the act on the protection of children and guardianship administration.

(7) In case of establishing multiple home daycare centres within one residential unit, in
accordance with the act on the protection of children and guardianship administration, if the home
daycare centre is not located on the ground floor or first floor of the building, in addition to the
contents set forth in paragraph (6), two-way evacuation must be made possible, and the regulations
of this Decree with regard to the heat and smoke extraction in atriums and corridors considered for
rescue, must be fulfilled.

(8) In case of establishing playgrounds with a floor area greater than 200 m2, the room
accommodating the children must be provided with heat and smoke protection. In case of
gravitational smoke extraction, a heat and smoke extraction system with effective opening surface
reaching 1 % of the floor area of the room, and an air supply surface must be established. In case of
mechanical heat and smoke extraction, the required extraction and air supply performance must be
2 m3/s calculated for each m2 of the effective opening surface relating to gravitational smoke
extraction and air supply.

15. Office, administrative designation

Article 39

Rooms of buildings and building sections with office and administrative designation, used for
containing crowds
a) must have a wall covering, ceiling covering and interior heat and sound insulation of at least
B-s1, d0 fire classification, and
b) must have a floor covering of at least Cfl-s1 fire classification.

16. Healthcare designation

Article 40

(1) Surgeries and central surgical areas — in case of multiple surgical units — must be
designed in a separate fire compartment together with their connected mechanical, electrical, and
medical technology rooms in such a way that the operability of the heat supply, electrical supply,
ventilation system and any other systems used by the surgery are protected even during potential
fire of the adjacent fire compartments. The required operating time must be determined based on the
medical technology protocol.

(2) Rooms and groups of rooms used for accommodating people who can be rescued with
preparation or without preparation must be separated from all other rooms by a fire resistant
building structure and a door of at least D fire classification, fire resistance performance of EI2 30-C,
and smoke resistance performance of Sm.

(3) Building sections used for intensive units of hospitals and the care and placement of
patients requiring isolation must be established as separate fire compartments.

(4) Rooms used for the prolonged accommodation of stationary patients, and for containing
crowds
a) must have a wall covering, ceiling covering and internal heat and sound insulation of at least
B-s1, d0 fire classification,
 36

b) must have a floor covering of at least Bfl-s1 fire classification.

17. Social designation

Article 41

(1) Room units must be separated from one another by a wall structure of at least EI 30 fire
resistance performance.

(2) The entry doors of room units within the building must be at least D fire classification and
fire resistance performance of EI2 30-C.

(3) If the housing services is established in a residence or house for up to 12 people, according
to the act on social administration and social services for disabled persons, psychiatric patients or
addicts, the requirements pertaining to fire protection for residential designations must be enforced.
If the housing services take place in a residence or house designed for more than 12 persons, the
requirements pertaining to fire protection for social designations must be enforced.

(4) A risk unit of at least Low Risk category social designation and a daycare centre for the
accommodation of children under the age of six can only be established at an exit level location and
at an elevation up to 7.0 m higher.

(5) The wall covering, ceiling covering, and internal heat and sound insulation of rooms used
for containing crowds must be at least B-s1,d0 classification, and the floor covering at least Bfl-s1
classification.

18. Cultural and religious designation

Article 42

(1) A cultural or religious unit of designation must be separated from other units of designation
by a fire resistant building structure.

(2) In theatre premises used for containing crowds, decoration materials, installations and
props effectively treated with flame retardant agents, and at least class 1 curtains may be used,
verified by an independent accrediting testing and rating laboratory, according to the relevant
technical requirements.

(3) A room with a floor area greater than 100 m2 used for the storage of decoration materials
must be separated from adjacent rooms by a fire resistant building structure.

(4) The theatre scenery maker and maintenance workshops must be separated from adjacent
rooms by a fire resistant building structure.

(5) In case of auditorium-like arrangements, in rooms with a capacity of more than 100, but
less than 301 persons, chairs must be arranged fixed to each other or to the floor structure, and in
rooms used for containing crowds, the chairs must be arranged fixed to the floor structure.

Article 43

(1) In case of Medium Risk and High Risk categories for theatre or film theatre designations,
in case of a stage opening over 8 m height, if the number of people in the auditorium exceeds 300,
 37

the audience traffic areas must be established as separate fire compartments from the working
spaces, including the stage.

(2) The wall covering, ceiling covering, and internal heat and sound insulation of rooms used
for containing crowds must be at least B-s1,d0 classification, and the floor covering must be at least
Bfl-s1 classification.

19. Music service designation provided through hospitality, selected

record release or live performance

Article 44

(1) In rooms used for musical, dance and theatre stage events in front of crowds, decoration
materials, effectively treated with flame retardant agents, and at least class 1 curtains may be used,
verified by an independent accrediting testing and rating laboratory, according to the relevant
technical requirements.

(2) The wall covering, ceiling covering, and internal heat and sound insulation of rooms used
for musical, dance and theatre stage events in front of crowds, must be at least A2-s1,d0, ceiling
covering must be at least A2-s1,d0, and floor covering must be at least Bfl-s1 fire classification.

20. Commercial designation

Article 45

(1) Storage locations and groups of rooms of buildings of commercial designation, with a floor
area greater than 500 m2, must be separated by fire resistant building structures from the audience
traffic areas.

(2) Buildings, sections of buildings with commercial designation, used for containing crowds
a) must have a wall covering, ceiling covering, and internal heat and sound insulation of at least
B-s1, d0 fire classification, and
b) must have a floor covering of at least Cfl-s1 fire classification.

21. Forced stay structure

Article 46

(1) A safe area must be established within the building according to the dimension of the
capacity of the fire compartment in question.

(2) Building structures and coverings with at least A2 fire classification may be incorporated in
forced stay locations.

22. Sports designation

Article 47

In case of a location with sports designation, the auditorium

 38

a) must have a wall covering and internal heat and sound insulation of at least B-s1, d0 in case
of a structure of Medium Risk category, and at least A2-s1,d0 fire classification in case of High
Risk category,
b) must have a ceiling covering of at least B-s1, d0 in case of a structure of Medium Risk
category, and at least A2-s1,d0 fire classification in case of High Risk category, and
c) must have a floor covering of at least Bfl-s1 fire classification in case of a structure of
Medium Risk and High Risk category.

23. Vehicle storage designation

Article 48

(1) The location used for vehicle storage for over 20 vehicle parking spaces must be established
as a separate fire compartment from other designations, which are non-related to it in terms of
function.

(2) In case of over 20 vehicle parking spaces, the heat and sound insulation materials used in
the vehicle storage facility must have B-s1, d0 fire classification in case of structures in Low Risk
and Very Low Risk categories, and A2-s1 d0 fire classification in case of Medium Risk and High
Risk.

(3) In cases of 20 or fewer vehicle parking spaces, the heat insulation material used in the
vehicle storage facility must have at least D-s2, d0 fire classification.

24. Agricultural designation

Article 49

In case of structures with a floor area of over 1 000 m2 used for livestock farming, an at least
2 m sized door must be established on at least two opposite ends of the structure for the rescue of
animals.

25. Industrial designation

Article 50

(1) In case of a building with industrial designation used for the production, processing, use,
storage, and distribution of potentially explosive materials, the wall and ceiling covering of the
facility and the internal heat and sound insulation must have at least A2-s1,d0 fire classification,
and the floor covering at least Bfl-s1 fire classification.

(2) Facilities of a building, building section with industrial designation used for containing a
crowd
a) must have a wall and ceiling covering and internal heat and sound insulation of at least B-s1,
d0 fire classification, and
b) flooring should have at least a Cfl-s1 fire classification.

VIII.
EVACUATION

26. General requirements of evacuation

 39

Article 51

(1) Buildings must be constructed in such a way that during a fire event
a) the persons housed inside
aa) can leave their location through an adequate number of installed exits, through an adequate
capacity to exit, and an appropriately located exit door,
ab) are able to exit to an escape route, safe area, or temporary protected area within the allowed
access distance from the location of stay,
b) the location of stay for persons who cannot be rescued provides sufficient protection from
fire and its concomitants.

(2) The possibility of rescue must be ensured from a temporary protected area for persons who
are limited in escape.

(3) In case of people escaping independently, escape to a temporary protected area can be
planned if it is designated as a separate fire compartment, from which exit to a safe area is provided
within the allowed access distance from the site of entering the fire compartment.

(4) Evacuation of special structures must be ensured according to Section XII.

(5) Evacuation of open-air events must be ensured according to Articles 207–218.

Article 52

(1) The direction of evacuation, the layout of the escape routes, and the dimensions of the
escape route must be designed
a) according to the contents of paragraphs (2)–(3) or
b) by calculation.

(2) The access distance and maximum allowed length of the escape route, safe area, and
temporary protected area are listed in Table 1 of Annex 7.

(3) In case of escape through stars, the length of the road travelled must be calculated by
multiplying the change in level by three.

(4) The capacity of the facility is determined by the greater one of the following numbers:
a) evacuation number according to the designer’s or operator’s data report,
b) the evacuation number calculated with a weighted value according to Table 3 of Annex 7.

Article 53

(1) The minimum clear width of the escape route and the minimum clear internal dimensions of
the installed doors on the escape route, at its entire length, must be determined depending on the
number of escaping people on the escape route in question, based on Table 3 of Annex 7.

(2) The doors of the escape route and the minimum clear height of the escape doors of the
facility with a capacity of over 50 people is 1.95 m.

27. Designation for the placement, care, treatment, education, training of

persons with limited capacity to escape
 40

Article 54

(1) In case of a designation for the placement, care, treatment, education, training of persons
with limited capacity to escape, with the exception of elementary schools not qualifying as special,
and where this Decree specifies based on designation, for persons limited in escape, not including
persons who cannot be rescued, the following must be ensured:
a) exit level entry to a safe area,
b) in case of building elevations other than an exit level, exit to a protected area.

(2) In case of making accessible a designation other than that listed in paragraph (1), the fire
protection authority may order the necessity and characteristics of the temporary protected area.

(3) A rescue elevator must be established if the fire protection authority orders it to assist in the
rescue.

(4) The rescue elevator must meet the technical requirements applicable for firefighting
elevators, with the following additions:
a) the clear width of the landing door of the elevator must be at least 0.9 m,
b) in front of the elevator’s landing door, there must be a clear floor area of at least 1.5 x 1.5 m,
c) the elevator must service at least those building levels for the evacuation of which it is taken
into account.

28. Temporary protected area requirements

Article 55

(1) A temporary protected area may be

a) a separate building,
b) a fire compartment having a separate escape route,
c) resting area of a smokeless stairway, or
d) roof slab.

(2) The temporary protected area dimensions are to be determined in such a way that its
capacity must be suitable for the maximum number of people, simultaneously staying at the
building level in question, who are limited in escape.

(3) The temporary protected area must be positioned and designated in such a way as to allow
the implementation of the escaped, rescued persons from that location to be rescued to the safe area
through the escape route.

(4) The fire protection authority may order

a) the establishment of a two-way communication connection between the temporary protected
area and a location in the building specified by the authority, or
b) the placement of escape symbols on the access route of the temporary protected area.

Article 56

(1) The temporary protected area established as a separate facility

a) must be designated in connection to the corridor forming the escape route, the smokeless
stairway, the foyer of the smokeless stairway, or foreground of the escape elevator,
b) must be shielded by fire resistant building structures from adjacent facilities,
 41

c) must be designed to be protected from façade spread of fire,

d) must be supplied with safety lighting, and
e) must be supplied with the safety symbol indicating its designation.

(2) The entry door of the temporary protected area designed as a separate facility must have, in
addition to the specified fire resistance performance, a smoke rating of Sm. In case of an entrance
door of a temporary protected area opening from a smokeless stairway or its foyer, a smoke rating
of Sa is adequate for the door.

(3) The temporary protected area designed as part of the smokeless stairway rest area, must be
positioned in such a way that the people waiting there do not hinder the use of the doors and the
escape. The protected area must be supplied with the safety symbol indicating its designation and
the borders of the area designated for waiting must be marked on the floor.

(4) A temporary protected area can be established on the roof slab, if

a) the contents of paragraph (1)(a)–(c) cannot be implemented,
b) the persons walking or waiting there are not endangered by smoke, and
c) protection against falls is ensured.

(5) In case of a temporary protected area established on the roof slab

a) if the insulation against rainwater remains open from above, the roof insulation system must
be Broof (t1) and the thermal insulation must be A1-A2 fire protection classification, or
b) thermal insulation of B-E fire classification is allowed, if the insulation layer against heat or
rainwater is covered from above by at least 5 cm thick A1 or A2 fire protection layer without gaps.

29. Protecting the waiting area

Article 57

(1) The waiting area for people who can be rescued with preparation and those who are not
eligible for rescue even with preparation
a) must be shielded by fire resistant building structures from adjacent areas,
b) must be established protected from façade spread of fire,
c) must be supplied with safety lighting, and
d) must be established in such a way that normal operation and the operation of the required
equipment and systems are ensured.

(2) The location of the fire resistant structure according to paragraph (1) and the necessary
period of maintaining operability must be confirmed with the fire protection authority with
consideration of medical technological aspects.

(3) Deciding the period for the waiting location, protection, and operability of the persons to be
rescued with preparation is sufficient based on the period required for preparation, if after the
preparation, the rescue to a safe area or temporary protected area can be implemented.

30. Requirements of the escape route

Article 58

(1) An escape route may be

a) an area that forms the transport route,
b) a stairway,
 42

c) an entrance stair, or
d) an atrium, open foyer, or dependent corridor.

(2) Slide, elevator — except for an emergency elevator — escalator, or a slope that is steeper
than 25 % cannot be considered for rescue, unless the law provides otherwise.

(3) An emergency ladder or emergency rung can be used for rescue in case of industrial,
agricultural, or storage designations, as well as in case of mechanical rooms, engine areas.

(4) The fire characteristics of escape route building structures must comply with the
requirements listed in Table 1 of Annex 2.

(5) The heat and smoke protection of the escape route must be solved according to Section X.

(6) The escape route must be supplied with safety lighting, escape symbols, and an escape path
indicator system according to Chapter XIII.

31. Built-in escape route doorways

Article 59

(1) Doors used for escape in a room with the capacity of over 50 people, and the door used for
rescue of those residing in such a room
a) must open towards the direction of evacuation, or must be able to be installed on the escape
route, regardless of the direction of opening,
b) must be able to be installed on the escape route in terms of its ability to open, and
c) its opening must be able to have a threshold of up to 15 mm height installed.

(2) In case of escape doors that function with controls, opening with manual power must be
ensured at all times.

(3) A curtain or windbreak can only be positioned at the door installed on the escape route if it
does not narrow the exit when pulled aside. The curtain may not reach the plane of the floor, and its
internal edges must be marked with a different coloured strip.

(4) The escape doors of a room used for containing crowds and the doors installed on the
escape route of a room used for containing crowds must be designed in such a way that they can be
opened with a single motion.

(5) In case of industrial, agricultural, and storage purpose structures, the use of gates with
pushing, tilting, lifting shutters is allowed, if they are able to safely open bilaterally and manually
within 20 seconds and at least in the width and height specified in Article 53, and if the number of
persons residing in the room does not exceed one person per every 20 m2.

(6) The entrance doors of homes and residential buildings, and installed doors on the corridor
leading to them can be closed if it is ensured that all persons concerned can open them.

(7) Opening of the rescue door, which is normally locked with a key, can be ensured by placing
a keybox, if
a) a single lock is installed on the door, the key to which is contained in the keybox,
b) the keybox is located in a place that is accessible for the escaping person, at a maximum of
0.5 m from the door and it is marked with a safety symbol,
 43

c) the number of people escaping through the door is no more than 50, and
d) there is only one door installed for escape at the location.

(8) In case of using an access control system that hinders escape, the following must be ensured:
a) undelayed thoroughfare for the escaping person at the site of entry, the controls and
resources required for this, and their usability,
b) the necessary width of the cleared route at the entry point, and its ability to let people pass
through,
c) the device that blocks passing through can be set in a position that does not influence the
escape,
ca) automatically, or
cb) manually, with no more than 220 N required power.

(9) The access control system operating with electrical power, blocking escape must
automatically make passing through available in case of termination of the energy supply, according
to the contents of paragraph (8)(c).

32. Requirements for stairways, stairs used for escape

Article 60

(1) The vertical section of the escape route must be implemented on stairs of up to 48 m in
length that make up the escape route, located in a stairway, entrance stairs or in an atrium qualifying
as an escape route.

(2) The stairway used for escape must be constructed,

a) in the event that the elevation between the exit level from the stairway and the farthest entry
level into the stairway is at most 14 m, as a stairway equipped with heat and smoke extraction,
b) in case of an elevation that differs from that in Point a) in a building or separate building
section classified as Very Low Risk, Low Risk or Medium Risk, as a smokeless stairway,
c) in case of a stairway that consists of a risk unit classified as High Risk, as a naturally
ventilated smokeless or foyered pressurised smokeless stairway,
d) in a special structure, according to Chapter XII.

(3) the entrance stairs must be constructed in such a way that the structure of the stairs and the
users of the stairs are not endangered by the fire and its concomitants, such as flame, heat radiation
and smoke.

(4) Stairs wider than 4 m, forming the escape route of the building used for containing a crowd,
must be separated by railing, in such a way that the open width of the parts of the separated parts of
the stair is 2.00–2.50 m.

(5) Arched stairs or spiral staircases can be used if

a) the number of people escaping through the stairs do not exceed 50 people, and the stairway
used for escape spans a change in level of at most 10 m, or
b) the entry width of all steps used for escape within the flight width
ba) is at least 0.24 m in a residence or resort unit,
bb) and at least 0.30 m in other cases.

(6) The smokeless stairway forming the escape route must be established in such a way that a
safe area can be entered from the stairway
a) directly,
 44

b) through a corridor bordered by fire resistant building structures, or

c) through two fire compartments having separate escape routes.

33. Additional requirements of evacuating a space, or building section

Article 61

The evacuation and intervention criteria of a building used for forced must confirmed by the
fire protection authority.

Article 62

(1) When designing spaces for containing crowds,

a) the doorstep on the escape route of the area used for containing crowds cannot exceed
0.15 m, and stairs must not be installed in the doorways on the escape route,
b) evacuation from spaces for containing crowds must provide at least two different exits, in
two different directions for evacuation.

(2) When designing auditoriums, theatres, or halls, the following rules must be followed:
a) it must be constructed with at least two exits, spaced at least 10 m apart from each other
aa) a basement level space with capacity of over 50 persons, and spaces also having a floor line
over 30 m,
ab) spaces with capacity of over 100 persons, not having a floor line that is at the ground level
exit,
ac) spaces with capacity of over 200 persons, designed with chairs that are not fixed,
b) the space for containing crowds can only be constructed with standing room or with fixed
seating, in such a way that the number of seats solidly fixed to the floor structure or to one another
must be at most 20, calculated from the connecting evacuation route within the room,
c) the seats must be organised within the space in such a way and the transport route must be
constructed in such a way that the length of the route leading to the exit shall not exceed
ca) 12 m when moving through the rows of seats,
cb) 15 m when moving up through stairs or stands with stairs,
cc) 30 m when moving down through stairs or stands with stairs,
cd) 45 m when moving through rising or sloping planes, and 45 m when moving horizontally,
and
d) in case of spaces with capacity greater than 5 000 persons, a separate escape route must be
designed at least per each started 1 000 persons.

34. Evacuation calculation

Article 63

In case of evacuation calculation, compliance with the standard evacuation times set forth in
Table 4 of Annex 7 must be verified.

35. Computer simulation

Article 64

If using computer simulation, it must be checked and verified that the escaping persons can
safely evacuate the examined building or partial building
 45

a) within the allowed evacuation period, or

b) with consideration of the spread of smoke.

IX.
REQUIREMENTS ENSURING THE INTERVENTION OF FIREFIGHTING UNITS

36. General requirements

Article 65

(1) The firefighting access area and route for firefighters must be ensured
a) in case of structures the highest structure levels exceeding 14 m,
b) for buildings of commercial and mixed designations exceeding the aggregate per level floor
area of 3 000 m2,
c) for sports establishments with capacity of 5 000 or more people,
d) for educational institutions for minors with capacity of 300 or more people,
e) for hospitals and institutions caring for people with limited capacity for escape, with the
capacity to house over 300 people, including the number of beds, outpatient numbers and staff
number.

(2) Roads for approaching the buildings and the firefighting access route and area must be
ensured primarily on public land.

(3) Firefighting access area and routes cannot be marked out and created on the adjacent lot of
the building to be established, except in the case of public land.

(4) The establishing of the firefighting access area and route must be defined by the fire
protection authority, based on the properties of the site based on the parameters of own and
assisting unit elevators and vehicle hoses, within the framework of the building permit procedure.

(5) The method of closing the firefighting access area and route must be synchronised with the
fire prevention authority.

(6) In case of facilities having a floor area of more than 30 000 m2, two entrances must be set
up on the two separate sides of the facility, which is suitable for the traffic of fire engines.

37. Parameters of the firefighting access area

Article 66

(1) The length of the firefighting access area provides the conditions of intervention and rescue
on the whole length of the façade of the building looking to the direction of the staging area, its
width is at least 6 m. In front of the frontal rescue points confirmed by the fire protection authority,
a minimum of 7.5 m wide staging area must be created and indicated in a visible manner. The
longitudinal axis distance from the rescue façade must be 8–14 m in length.

(2) If a lower building section or building is joined to the front of the building on the side of the
firefighting staging area, its façade surface must be at a distance determined in Table 3 of Annex 8,
in front of the highest elevation buildings over the façade plane of 14 m of elevation.
 46

(3) At the firefighting access area and water resource areas, no parking lots can be established.
At these places the parking ban must be indicated with signs and in case of the ordinance of fire
protection authority even with road markings.

(4) At the firefighting access area, on the building side of the staging area, no overhead wires or
elements supporting or suspending these, can inhibit the operation of rescue vehicles from the sky.

(5) The gradient of the firefighting access area can be at most 5 %.

(6) If at the firefighting access area or between the access area and the façade suitable for
rescue, a line of trees is established, the distance of the trees from each other must be at least 15 m
on the rescue side, except if the design is in accordance with the measures defined in paragraph (2).
The same rule applies to the allocation of tram and other supporting columns as well.

Article 67

(1) At least one façade rescue point per ground floor structure levels and fire compartments
must be ensured on the façade of the buildings listed in Article 65(1)(a), facing the firefighting
access area, in an area confirmed with the fire protection authority, above the ground floor and at an
elevation up to 50 m. The rescue point must be accessible on the given floor and by the occupants
of the fire compartment.

(2) The façade rescue point can be windows, loggias or balconies of maximum 1.0 metre at
parapet height. The glazed surface of the window which breaks in crumbles and which is intended
for rescue is without division, is breakable from the outside with handheld devices, must be at least
0.90 m in width and 1.20 m in height. The locations of windows used for rescue must be indicated
on the façade and at the entrance of the room and group of rooms that include the window, in a well
visible and permanent way.

(3) The distance between the lowest edge of the window placed to the level of the roof used for
rescue and the floor under the window having at least 1.0 m in width can be a maximum of 0.6 m,
and the window must be accessible by technical devices ensuring the rescue. The window used for
rescue must be able to be opened.

(4) The firefighting access area near the firefighting access route must be such that the fire
engines and rescue teams doing the rescue from the sky are able to leave the scene safely, without
backing up.

(5) From the aspect of water supply requirements for fighting the fire, from the firefighting
access area of the building, in addition to the general regulations
a) there must be at least one fire hydrant at most 50 m from the access route, and
b) in case of access routes longer than 50 m, fire hydrants may be placed up to every 50 m

Article 68

(1) If one of the criteria defined in Article 66 are not met, or if four or more criteria defined in
Article 67 are not met, the firefighting access area is not ensured.

(2) If up to three criteria defined in Article 67 are not met, the regulations regarding the
firefighting access area are not fully fulfilled.
 47

Article 69

(1) In case of buildings required to establish firefighting access area, except for structures of
highest structure level, having more than 30 m elevation, if the specifications cannot be ensured
entirely concerning the firefighting access area, requirements listed in paragraphs (2)–(3) must be
applied. If the firefighting access area is not ensured, requirements listed in paragraphs (4) or (5)
must be applied.

(2) In case of establishing a stairway, it must be a smokeless stairway that has a foreground,
pressurised ventilation or natural ventilation.

(3) In case of establishing multiple stairways, one of the stairways must be established as a
smokeless stairway and passages must be ensured on every floor between the stairs to be evacuated.

(4) If no firefighting access area can be established, building structures of High Risk category
must be applied, and with the exception of residential buildings, automatic fire alarm system and
fire extinguisher must be established in the whole area of the building which is in accordance with
the relevant regulations. All stairways that are considered for evacuation must be established as
smokeless stairways and passages must be ensured on every floor between the stairways. In case of
residential buildings, automatic fire alarm must be established that extends to community areas.

(5) In case of building an extra storey on the existing residential buildings or building an attic,
building structures of High Risk category must be applied, all stairways considered for evacuation
must be established as smokeless stairways, and a passage must be ensured between the stairways
on the newly established floor.

Article 70

(1) In case of structures on the highest structure level, having more than 30 m of elevation, if
the regulations concerning the firefighting access area cannot be fully ensured, the requirements of
paragraph (2) must be applied.

(2) At least two fire compartments must be established in the building on every floor and on
every other floor there must be a fire compartment horizontally as well. In each fire compartment at
least one smokeless stairway must be established that has a foreground, pressurised ventilation or
natural ventilation, along with an emergency elevator. Between the stairways passages must be
ensured on every floor.

(3) If no firefighting access area can be established, in addition to establishing fire

compartments and emergency elevators as described in paragraph (2) a built-in automatic fire alarm
system and fire extinguisher must be established in the whole area of the building, all stairways
must be established as smokeless stairways that have a foreground, pressurised ventilation or
natural ventilation and between the stairways a passage must be ensured on every floor. In addition
to the above, in a community building, and in its entire area, an evacuation amplification system
must be established.

38. Ensuring the necessary extinguisher substance for firefighting

Article 71

The installation location of fire water resources and wall hydrants must be confirmed with the
fire protection authority.
 48

Article 72

(1) The necessary fire water intensity for firefighting must be defined based on the area of the
standard fire compartment according to Table 1 of Annex 8.

(2) In case of buildings having an area of more than 1 200 m2 and serving as livestock farming,
the necessary fire water intensity is 1 800 L/minute.

(3) The fire water supply must be ensured continuously, to the standard fire compartment of the
facility, depending on the risk category of the risk unit of the standard fire compartment
a) in case of VLR category at least for half an hour,
b) in case of LR category for at least one hour,
c) in case of MR category for at least one and a half hour,
d) in case of HR category for at least 2 hours.

(4) At transformer stations of over 10 MVA integrated rated output power, calculated from the
main dimensions of the largest transformer for the surface covered, without calculating underlying
surface, with 16 L/min. x m2 specific flowrate, three times the quantity of fire water for 10 minutes
of extinguishing time, must be ensured.

(5) The area of the outdoor municipal landfill must be ensured 1 800 L/minute fire water
intensity for one and a half hour.

(6) In case of water extinguisher equipment supplied for the entire area of the standard fire
compartment, the amount of fire water intensity set forth in Table 1 Annex 8 may be reduced, at the
most to 70 %, with the ratio of the water supply required (in L) for the operation of the sprinkler
equipment, based on the relevant technical requirements, and the fire water time (in minutes), which
must be continually supplied according to paragraph (1).

(7) If the fire water intensity is reduced according to paragraph (6), the storage tank or
intermediate tank of the sprinkler system must be established while taking into consideration the
contents of Article 82(2)–(3) and (6)–(8).

(8) Every water resource area must be established in a way that enables fire engines to access it
at any time, and the specified amount of fire water to be removed regardless of the weather, and in
case of natural surface water, regardless of water level.

Article 73

(1) The specified amount of water to the area of the standard fire compartment must be ensured
from water pipes or, if it cannot be resolved in any other way, from a fire water reservoir.

(2) As fire water, non-periodic natural surface waters may also be considered, with the
permission of fire protection authority, which are located no more than 200 m from the building to
be protected. The distance must be measured at the access route.

(3) In case of establishing or expanding a settlement, the fire water must be ensured
simultaneously with the occupation of each compartment.

(4) The fire water can be ensured jointly with adjacent facilities, with the permission of the fire
 49

protection authority.

(5) The water resource area must be established in a way that enables the firefighting vehicles
to access it at any time and allow the unhindered removal of fire water.

(6) At the cable and public utility tunnels and at public utility corridors, the possibility of two
fire water entry points must be ensured at two places in each fire compartment.

39. Establishing a fire water network

Article 74

(1) The internal diameter of the water main network ensuring the fire water must be scaled
based on the fire water intensity and outflow pressure requirement, and by taking into consideration
the developing of the utility system. In case of one-way feeding, the pipeline must be at least NA
100, and in case of circular system it must be at least NA 80.

(2) With the permission of the fire protection authority, the water pipeline network ensuring
fire water can be scaled differently than described in paragraph (1) in case of a settlement with less
than 1 000 inhabitants,
a) in which, or outside of which, a water abstraction plant built on a natural or man-made water
source area is present, to be considered as a fire water source, within a distance of 200 m of all of its
buildings to be protected, as well as its open-air areas, which would provide a sufficient amount of
water for the standard fire compartment area, or
b) in which the adequate fire water intensity to the area of the standard fire compartment is
ensured with other technical solutions.

40. Establishing fire hydrants

Article 75

(1) In case of establishing the main water pipeline network, the fire water must be ensured with
fire hydrants above the ground.

(2) When renovating and converting the water pipeline network which ensure the fire water, the
affected existing underground fire hydrants must be changed to fire hydrants above the ground.

(3) In a fire water supplying water pipeline network, an outflow pressure of 200 mm2 at wall
fire hydrants, and at least 200 kPa (2 bar) at outflow cross-sections must be ensured at the least
favourable fire hydrant, from the aspect of water outtake, except for public area fire hydrants.

(4) Notwithstanding paragraph (3), in case of structures having more than 30 m elevation on the
highest structure level, an outflow pressure of 200 mm2 at wall fire hydrants, and at least 600 kPa (6
bar) at outflow cross-sections, must be ensured at the least favourable fire hydrant, from the aspect
of water outtake. At each wall hydrant of these buildings a 52-C sized connection possibility must
be ensured separately for the fire department units.

(5) Notwithstanding paragraph (3) at establishments processing flammable liquid and at tank
storage areas greater than 1 000 m3 storing flammable liquid of fire hazard class I-II, and in case of
gas storage where the capacity of the pressurised gas container or gas listed as frozen explosive is
more than 200 tonnes, a fire water pipeline network must be established, which supplies at the least
 50

favourable wall hydrant from the aspect of water outtake 200 mm2 at wall fire hydrants, and at least
1 200 kPa (12 bar) at outflow cross-sections.

Article 76

(1) The fire hydrants cannot be located more than 100 m distance from an open-air flammable
material storage area and building to be protected, calculated on the access route, and they can be
no closer than 5 m from each other, with the exception of fire hydrant groups.

(2) In the establishment it is not necessary to install fire hydrants if the fire hydrants of the
public land ensure the necessary amount of water for firefighting and if the requirements of
paragraph (1) are also met.

(3) At the fire hydrants, a staging area must be ensured for the firefighting vehicles in a way
that leaves at least 2.75 m of adjacent area free for road transport.

Article 77

(1) The midline height of the upper discharge nozzles of the aboveground fire hydrant, installed
according to the manufacturer’s instructions, must be between 650 and 900 mm from the soil level.

(2) The operation of the valve of the aboveground fire hydrant must be ensured with an
aboveground hydrant wrench, in accordance with the relevant technical requirements.

(3) The discharge nozzles of aboveground fire hydrants must be assembled with two pieces of
port terminals of 75-B size and at least 65 mm internal diameter, ensuring against loosening and
turnabout, as shown in Figure 1, Annex 8.

(4) The aboveground fire hydrant may be provided with a protective house or houses. The
house must be created in a way that enables it to be opened and closed safely with the hydrant
wrench above the ground and that it does not inhibit the connection of firefighting pressure hose
and the usage of the key clips for connection.

Article 78

(1) The port terminals must be locked with terminal caps secured against loss.

(2) The material of the terminal cap, in case of fire hydrants applied to the industrial pressure of
1 600 kPa (16 bar), regarding its solidity, must be in accordance with the relevant technical
requirements.

(3) The port terminals of the fire hydrants applied to a maximum of 1 000 kPa (10 bar)
industrial pressure can be closed with plastic terminal caps as well.

(4) The safe opening and closing of terminal caps and plastic terminal caps with port terminals
must be ensured.

41. Establishing wall fire hydrants

Article 79
 51

(1) In case of water pipeline supply, a wall hydrant must be established, with the exception of
residential buildings having up to 14 m of floor height.
a) where the law provides,
b) in case of parking lots having more than one storey, or
c) in High Risk category risk units having larger than 200 m2 floor area, in Medium Risk
category risk units having larger than 500 m2 of basic area, and in Low Risk category risk units
larger than 1 000 m2 floor area.

(2) No wall hydrant has to be established in opened or partly opened buildings, in the chilled
areas of cold stores, in buildings serving as livestock farming and in the storage rooms of bulk grain
storage buildings.

(3) No wall hydrant can be established in fire compartments where the usage of water may
cause risk to life, fire, or explosion, or may promote the spread of fire.

(4) At places defined in paragraphs (2) and (3), and where the water is not suitable for
extinguishing fire arising in the building, instead of a wall hydrant, fire equipment, device, gadget,
accessories and material suitable for extinguishing the material must be kept at the scene in
readiness, confirmed with the fire protection authority.

(5) In smokeless stairways and their foregrounds no wall hydrant can be allocated.

(6) The wall hydrant network must be created and scaled according to Table 2 of Annex 8.

(7) Wall hydrants must be allocated in such way that they enable the firefighting of the
furthermost place, the access route must be taken into account with the laid down hoses, and the
wall hydrants should cover the whole area of the fire section. A water stream of 5 m can be
considered within a room, if it is not inhibited by building structure or built-in furniture, or
equipment.

Article 80

(1) In the course of the allocation of the wall hydrant, the wall hydrant can only ensure the
protection of the given fire compartment, and cannot be planned in the protection of another fire
compartment.

(2) In the course of establishing wall hydrants, a pressure meter must be placed for monitoring,
at the least favourably located wall hydrant, from the aspect of outflow pressure.

(3) Before using the wall hydrants, the contractor is required to perform or have someone
perform a pressure and performance test, simultaneously, and to confirm its result to the fire
protection authority.

(4) The dry rising fire water hoses still must be supervised periodically; they can be broken
down only if a wet wall hydrant network is established instead.

Article 81

(1) The existing dry rising fire water hoses can be altered with the permission of the fire
protection authority.

(2) In the course of the alteration of the existing dry rising fire water system
 52

a) the place of water removal must be ensured only on the 6th floor and above it on every
second floor,
b) the places of water removal must be ensured with joining nozzles allocated in a closed
cabinet, the mode of opening must be granted permission by the fire protection authority and
c) the altered dry rising fire water system must be labelled with safety sign at the entrances by
indicating the connection levels, as well as on the given floors.

42. Fire water reservoirs

Article 82

(1) The capacity of the fire water reservoir cannot be smaller than 30 m3 and its lower floor can
be up to 7 m deeper than the ground level.

(2) The removal place of the reservoir must be created in such a way as to enable firefighting
vehicles to access it.

(3) The distance between the reservoir and structure, the outdoor space to be protected cannot
exceed 200 m. The distance must be measured on the access route.

(4) The following can be considered as fire water:

a) water coming from the tank of cooling tower or other, technological water, which does not
induce danger in the technological equipment due to being used for fire extinguishing, or
b) water quantity of the municipal reservoir of the public water works, if there is adequate
water removal opportunity for connecting the firefighting vehicles.

(5) A separate reservoir of under 100 m3 must be provided for firefighting purposes, provided
with at least one intake manifold, and in case of larger ones, one after each 100 m3 of capacity.

(6) The internal diameter of the intake manifold must be at least NA 100, its lower end must be
provided with filter, and its upper horizontal end must be provided with a standard A (NA 100) port
terminal and terminal cap. The intake manifold connection location must be created horizontally, at
a height of 0.8–1.2 m from the ground level.

(7) The intake manifolds must be allocated from each other at a distance of at least 5 m.

(8) The water removal place must be established in a way that enables the firefighting vehicles
to approach it at any time and enables the constant unhindered removal of fire water regardless of
water level.

43. Firefighter key safe

Article 83

Key safes must be located

a) in case of industrial, agricultural, producing, storing and processing establishments that have
an area greater than 10 000 m2,
b) in structures of any designation over 30 m elevation level,
c) in community buildings that have a larger than 6 000 m2 area,
d) in commercial buildings and logistic centres that have an area larger than 10 000 m2,
 53

e) in buildings used for the placement of monuments and national treasure that have an area
larger than 10 000 m2 and
f) where the fire protection authority specifies it in the interest of non-destructive entry
if a fire alarm system is installed on the area of the building.

44. Firefighter intervention centre

Article 84

(1) A firefighter intervention centre must be established if

a) an installed fire alarm system is operating in the building or part of it, and the number of
signals exceeds 1 000, and
b) the number of structures where heat and smoke protection can be directed independently on
the fire department's heat and smoke extraction operating panel.

(2) The firefighting technical equipment determined by the fire protection authority must be
ensured in the firefighter intervention centre.

(3) The operation of the controls and the reception of feedbacks must be ensured up to the
specified capacity of the controlled firefighting technical devices.

45. Fire department radio amplifier

Article 85

(1) If the law does not provide otherwise, the cooperating agencies’ conditions of radio traffic
must be ensured in the course of damage control, which must be examined with regard to
compliance before the occupancy process.

(2) During the damage control, in terms of the radio telecommunications system used by the
cooperating agencies, the handheld indoor radio coverage, i.e. the equipment ensuring normal
working condition, must be established and ensured by the building’s owner.

46. Firefighting elevator

Article 86

(1) Firefighting elevator must be established

a) in high-rises,
b) in buildings having more than three basement levels or
c) where the fire protection authority specifies it in the interest of ensuring firefighter
intervention

(2) The allocation of the firefighting elevator must be confirmed with the fire protection
authority.

(3) The firefighting elevator can be

a) a normal elevator, which complies with the requirements specified for a firefighting elevator,
or
b) an elevator deliberately established for this purpose.
 54

47. Solar panels

Article 87

(1) In the direct proximity of solar panel modules, on the DC side, electric power-operated and
manual shut-off option must be developed.

(2) The remote control unit switch should be located in the direct proximity of the structure's
electric fire-case power switch.

(3) A “solar switch-off” label must be placed above the switch.

(4) In case the solar panel is placed on the façade of the building, façade fire spread limit value
relevant to the building must be kept.

(5) If solar panels are used on the roof, the roof covering must also comply with fire protection
requirements for cladding.

X.
PROTECTION AGAINST HEAT AND SMOKE

48. General provisions

Article 88

(1) Heat and smoke extraction must be established in the following locations:
a) in premises with a floor area greater than 1 200 m2,
b) rooms that contain crowds,
c) on escape routes, with the exception of a smokeless stairwell, the hall to a smokeless
stairwell, and fireproof hall,
d) in single-storey premises with a floor area greater than 100 m2,
e) in covered atriums,
f) in places, where this Decree specifies on the basis of function,
g) in case of a special premises, based on Chapter XII
h) in places, where the fire protection authority specifies, on the basis of function and
characteristics of smoke development, to ensure conditions required for evacuation and firefighting
intervention.

(2) By way of derogation from paragraph (1), heat and smoke extraction is not required in the
following locations:
a) engine rooms or group of rooms with a floor area up to 500 m2 and a designation of at least
EI2 15 C entry doorway,
b) in non-community purposed premises with a floor area up to 500 m2, where typically non-
flammable class materials are stored,
c) in premises with a floor area up to 200 m2, if the upper third of the internal height has a
glazed, façade opening with free aperture equivalent to at least 5 % of the floor area, which can be
opened from the floor level,
d) in a ground floor storage building used exclusively for the storage of non-flammable
materials and products or items made only from this material, without non-combustible packaging
and storage device,
e) in bulk storage agricultural crop storage facilities,
 55

f) in warehouses without permanently installed extinguisher equipment, which has a roof

covering or other top closing mechanism has no substantial protection against fire,
g) in premises with a floor area up to 20 m2 on an escape route,
ga) in windbreak rooms,
gb) in corridors with an exit doorway opening to a safe space, and
h) in premises operating on the principle of space filling, protected by full flooding
permanently installed extinguisher equipment, with the exception of the escape route.

(3) Smoke extraction must be established in the following locations:

a) stairways serving several basement levels,
b) in places, where the fire protection authority specifies on the basis of function and
characteristics of smoke development, to ensure conditions required for evacuation and firefighting
intervention, or
c) in places, where this Decree specifies on the basis of function or to ensure evacuation.

49. Operation, control

Article 89

(1) Manual operation of heat and smoke extraction must be provided

a) in stairways,
aa) in locations next to the external side of doors opening into stairwells, viewed from the
staircase, which are used for evacuation, and detectable from all directions of the escape route, and
ab) at the exit level of the stairway, next to the external or internal side of the evacuation door
leading out of the stairway,
b) in other instances, in a location and in a manner agreed upon with the fire protection
authority.

(2) To ensure conditions required for evacuation and firefighting intervention, the fire
protection authority may require
a) establishing reclosure and reopening after manual opening or remote opening and
b) establishing of a firefighting operating panel.

(3) The firefighting operating panel for heat and smoke protection must display the operating
status of controlled devices: ready mode, operating mode, failure.

(4) In case of facilities with multiple smoke compartments, the manual operation of heat and
smoke extraction of each smoke compartment must be ensured from a single location.

(5) Permanently installed extinguisher equipment must control the heat and smoke protection
devices in premises protected by permanently installed extinguisher equipment. The control system
cannot be activated with MCP signal if the MCP does not produce clear information required for the
sufficient operation of heat and smoke protection.

(6) In premises with permanently installed extinguisher equipment, controls for the
permanently installed extinguisher equipment must be provided in a way that does not limit the
effective operation of the extinguisher equipment.

50. Heat and smoke extraction

Article 90
 56

(1) Heat and smoke extraction may be provided

a) through natural means with a heat and smoke extraction device,
b) through mechanical means with a heat and smoke extraction equipment, or
c) through a combination of a natural and mechanical solution.

(2) Ventilation equipment may be used for heat and smoke extraction in the event that it
a) fully meets the requirements of heat and smoke extraction, or
b) it meets the requirements for heat and smoke extraction, with the exception of heat resistance,
and the temperature of the smoke and the compartment temperature remains under the verified
temperature of 50 °C.

(3) The adequacy of the heat and smoke extraction must be supported by calculation in case of
a) using natural smoke extraction in a space not classified as a stairway, with an internal height
of over 15 m,
b) using a combination of natural smoke extraction and mechanical air supply with a greater
entry speed than required by this Decree,
c) natural air supply with natural smoke extraction, in case of supplementing with mechanical
air supply of a greater entry speed than required by this Decree.

(4) The lowest level of natural heat and smoke extraction must be determined according to
Table 1 of Annex 9 or by calculation.

(5) In case of mechanical heat and smoke extraction, the required extraction performance is
2 m /s calculated for each m2 of the effective opening surface of natural smoke extraction.
3

(6) During the design of heat and smoke extraction, the connection between spaces with
specialised smoke extraction systems and spaces with smoke extraction must be taken into
consideration, as well as pressure conditions that develop with concurrent operation, and manual
opening of the closing systems must be provided, in accordance with the specifications in
Article 98(8).

51. Heat and smoke extraction device

Article 91

(1) The heat and smoke extraction device

a) is classified A1-D with regard to the fire protection of its illuminating surface, dome,
b) has reliability opening cycles
ba) of Re 1 000 in case of community purpose smoke compartment,
bb) Re 300 in case of smoke compartments of other functions,
bc) Re 10 000 + 1 000 in case of a dual function device in a community purpose smoke
compartment,
bd) Re 10 000 + 300 in case of a dual function device,
c) has wind deflector vibration of greater than 10 Hz absorption,
d) has an external suction resistance (static resistance, symbol: WLmin) of 1 500 Pa,
e) heat resistance of B = 300 °C and
f) has burn drip category of d0, with the exception of a device that opens greater than 120°
compared to horizontal.

(2) The opening of the heat and smoke extraction device must be ensured for up to 250 Pa
vertically distributed load (snow load, symbol: SL).
 57

(3) Opening at a low internal temperature must be ensured at a temperature of

a) T = 0 °C in the case of general-purpose rooms, and
b) at T = –15 °C in the case of cold store technology.

(4) The flow factor of the heat and smoke extraction device must be determined by tests.

(5) When establishing, renovating, updating the smoke extraction of an existing building or
partial building, in case of use as a smoke extraction device of an existing closure built into a side
wall, the flow factor according to Table 2 of Annex 9 can be used in the absence of test results, if
the use was approved by the fire protection authority with consideration of the degree and scope of
the renovation.

52. Heat and smoke extraction equipment

Article 92

(1) The smoke exhaust fan and smoke extraction air duct requirements are contained in Table 3
of Annex 9.

(2) The smoke exhaust air duct and its suspension/support system must be designed in such a
way that it is suitable for thermal expansion that occurs in case of fire.

(3) The suction performance of the mechanical smoke extraction must be determined in such a
way that mechanical smoke exhaustion can operate simultaneously at any fire compartment of the
building, at any level, in any room with smoke extraction.

(4) In case of a premises consisting of separate smoke compartments, the smoke extraction
fan’s suction performance must be determined with the consideration that simultaneous smoke
extraction from the two largest smoke compartments requiring the greatest degree of smoke
extraction must be guaranteed.

(5) The requirement of the single-stage smoke valve according to the test with 600 °C fire
effect is at least E600 30-S (io) C, and the multi-stage smoke valve requirement is at least EI 30-S
(io) C.

(6) The requirements of smoke extraction and air supply must be applied to heat and smoke
extraction designs that operate with air supply.

53. Establishing smoke compartments

Article 93

(1) Smoke compartments must be established in rooms affected by heat and smoke extraction,
if
a) the greatest length of the escape route exceeds 40 m, in case of a corridor or hallway, as set
forth in paragraph (2), or
b) if the floor area is greater than 1 600 m2 or length greater than 80 m, in case of other areas.

(2) The escape route considered stretches from the point of the smoke compartment to the
outlet of the smoke compartment.
 58

(3) In case of a floor area greater than 1 200 m2 and longer than 4 m of internal height, the size
of the smoke compartment area
a) may be increased up to 2 000 m2 if the effective opening surface prescribed for the smoke
compartment of the heat and smoke extraction equipment were increased at a ratio of 10 % for each
100 m2 begun, or
b) may be increased to a degree determined by calculation, if the result of the calculation
confirms that the smoke-poor air layer set forth in this Decree is provided.

(4) Adjacent smoke compartments in corridors and hallways must be separated from one
another
a) by a fire wall with a fire classification specified for the wall adjoining the escape route and
built-in smoke suppressant doorway, or
b) in case of fire, by a mobile smoke barrier lowered to the floor level, making escape possible
if it is in a location intersecting the escape direction.

(5) In a room that is not considered a corridor, the adjacent smoke compartments must be
separated from each other by mobile or stable smoke barriers. The smoke barrier may substitute a
solid construction structure, if its fire classification is B or better and its reaction-to-fire
performance is at least E15.

(6) Material and product storage can be planned and established in the smoke accumulation
area if
a) the remainder of the smoke accumulation area and the smoke extraction performance
ensures that heat and smoke are extracted, confirmed by calculation, and
b) the temperature in the smoke accumulation area is verified by calculations not to increase to
over 150 °C, or the entire area of the room is protected by ESFR sprinkler system.

Article 94

(1) The doorway used at the smoke compartment boundary must be

a) at least Sa C quality
aa) in case of corridor smoke compartment,
ab) within a fire compartment that is fully protected by a permanently installed water
extinguisher system,
b) in other cases, it should be of Sm C quality.

(2) The person responsible for preparing the fire protection documentation must determine,
taking into consideration expected use, the classification of smoke control doors according to the
test cycle related to automatic closing.

(3) The time/temperature requirement for the smoke barrier is Dx, where x is equal to the fire
resistance performance/requirement period specified for the support structure affixing the smoke
barrier in the separate building receiving the smoke compartment.

54. Air supply

Article 95

(1) The rate of natural air supply is the same as the rate of natural smoke extraction set forth in
Table 1 of Annex 9.
 59

(2) The rate of mechanical air supply is 90–100 % of the lowest rate of mechanical smoke
extraction specified.

(3) In a room forming a single air space and consisting of multiple smoke compartments, the air
supply must be adjusted based on the smoke compartment that is required to have the greatest
amount of smoke extraction,
a) in case of two smoke compartments, increased by 1/3 of the other smoke compartment’s
smoke extraction,
b) in case of three smoke compartments, increased by 1/3 of the smoke extraction of the other
two smoke compartments,
c) in case of four or more smoke compartments, increased by 1/3 of the smoke extraction of the
smoke compartment required to have the second, third, and fourth highest rate smoke extraction.

(4) The requirements of the smoke extraction fan applies to the fan providing the air supply,
with the exception of the heat resistance requirement. The specifications of Table 3 in Annex 9 shall
be followed with regard to the air duct network providing air supply.

(5) In case of mechanical air supply, with the exception of the cases listed in Article 91(3), the
entry inlet velocity
a) must be up to 3 m/s in rooms, where a smoke-poor air layer must be provided,
b) must be up to 5 m/s in all other cases.

(6) The flow factor of the air replacement device must be determined according to Table 4 of
Annex 9.

55. Installation location

Article 96

(1) The location of the smoke outlet to the outdoors must be selected in such a way that the
exiting smoke
a) should not endanger
aa) the escape routes,
ab) air supply required for heat and smoke extraction,
ac) air supply of smoke removal,
ad) firefighting intervention,
ae) those residing in adjacent buildings or fire compartments, and
b) as not to elicit secondary ignition hazard.

(2) The location of smoke removal and implementation of air supply inlet must be determined
in such a way that the smoke cannot return to the building through these locations or where the
return or resuction of the smoke into the building is avoidable.

(3) In case of using a natural heat and smoke extraction or air supply device, the prevailing
wind direction must be taken into consideration when placing the structure.

(4) The heat and smoke extraction device must be installed in the upper third measured from
the floor plane, on the area of the roof or external boundary wall that promotes the outflow of
smoke.
 60

(5) In case of a room with a floor area greater than 1 200 m2, the adjacent heat and smoke
extraction devices on the roof must be installed to at least a distance from each other that is
equivalent to the larger lateral dimensions or diameter values of the two.

(6) In case of natural smoke extraction, at least one heat and smoke extraction device must be
installed, in a room with a floor area of greater than 1 200 m2, every 200 m2 in case of community
function, and every 300 m2 in other cases. The maximum distance of the heat and smoke extractors
from each other or from the edge of the roof, and from the walls can be a maximum of 20 m.

(7) When installing the heat and smoke extraction device on a roof surface, the contents of
Article 32(5) must be taken into consideration.

(8) Air supply should be carried into the room

a) in the smoke-poor air layer in case of a room with greater than 4 m internal height,
b) in case of an atrium at its lower part,
c) in case of a stairway, at its lowest level or at the exit level,
d) in case of a corridor or hallway, within a 2 m height from the floor plane,
e) and in other cases, in a location at the lower third of the internal height.

(9) In premises with a suspended ceiling, heat and smoke extraction can be carried out from the
ceiling space, if
a) the design or penetrability does not affect the flow of smoke negatively,
b) the suspended ceiling elements, equipment and items located in the space above the
suspended ceiling, do not move from their locations during operation to a degree that threatens
smoke extraction, and
c) the emission entering the suspended ceiling space does not threaten the operation of the
safety equipment and does not constitute an ignition hazard.

56. Smoke removal

Article 97

(1) The smoke removal of the stairway must be ensured by natural ventilation or by mechanical
method via air pressure into the stairway.

(2) The naturally ventilated, smoke removed stairway air space is continuously, or
automatically in case of a fire, connected to the external open-air space, at every aboveground level
of the stairway,
a) reaching at least 20 % of the stairway floor area, but with a minimum of 4 m2 converging
open surfaces, or
b) through an open smokeless hallway established with a surface set forth according to Point a).

(3) The stairway-related façade doorway cannot be placed within a 3 m distance from the
corridor opening of a stairway described in Article (2)(a).

(4) The engineering of the pressurised, smokeless stairway must provide an air flow of at least
1 m/s velocity
a) 50 Pa ± 10 % relative pressurisation, in case of all stairway closures in closed condition,
b) 10 Pa pressurisation in case of an open stairway door,
c) and in case of an open stairway closure of the number specified in paragraph (6), air flow of
at least 1 m/s velocity must be provided in the cross-section of the open closures.
 61

(5) In case of pressurised smokeless stairway with foyer, the relative pressure according to
paragraph (4)(a), compared to the foyer in the stairway is 50 Pa ± 10 %, in the foyer it is 10–15 Pa.

(6) When determining the size of the stairway, the open condition of the foyer doors in their
entire cross-section must be presumed, at the exit level and four levels opening into the stairway, as
well as one more level for escape. In case of multi-leaf doors, the door width required for escape
must be calculated.

(7) The required reaction time of the stairway engineering for ensuring the characteristics set
forth in paragraph (4) at connection, then during operation in case of a drop or increase in pressure,
is at the most 3 seconds.

(8) The automatic drawing off of the air entering from the pressurised area on an escape route
connected to a pressurised smokeless stairway or foyer must be provided.

57. Smokeless stairway room connections, closures

Article 98

(1) In the smokeless stairway, only an elevator installed with manual or automatic fire event
control can be used.

(2) An elevator shaft defined in paragraph (1) can be connected to the smokeless stairway and
its foyer, if the shaft door does not open to another room.

(3) The naturally ventilated smokeless stairway can serve, at the most, only one basement level.

(4) In case of stairways serving several basement levels, a pressurised smokeless foyer must be
established between the stairway and basement level rooms, where a pressure of 20–25 Pa must be
ensured in case of fire.

(5) Rooms specified in Table 5 of Annex 9 can open into smokeless stairways and smokeless
foyers, with the closures described therein.

(6) When renovating existing non-residential buildings or building portions to a pressurised

smokeless building, the existing rooms opening into the stairway may open into the smokeless
stairway, if
a) the closure is Sm-C and has a fire resistance performance of at least EI2 60-C and
b) the entire area of the relevant fire compartment is protected by a permanently installed
extinguisher equipment.

(7) The closure not qualifying as a door of the pressurised smokeless stairway and pressurised
smokeless foyer must be designed in such a way as to
a) automatically close in case of a fire, or
b) be in a permanently closed state and only open with an aid.

(8) The use of the closures of the pressurised smokeless stairway and pressurised smokeless
foyer being used for escape cannot be hindered by the developing pressure; the required effort for
opening must not exceed 100 N.

XI.
 62

PRESSURE DISCHARGE AND PRESSURE DISCHARGE/VENTING AREAS

Article 99

At the premises of risk units primarily serving industrial or storage functions where materials
classified as explosive are being manufactured, processed or stored, pressure discharge and pressure
discharge/venting areas must be established for diverting excess pressure from explosions.

Article 100

This chapter applies to the design requirements of blow-off pressure discharge or pressure
discharge/venting areas, to be employed as prescribed in legal provisions and technical
specifications, intended to divert any excess pressure created in vapour cloud explosions or
explosions caused by something other than blasting agents on the premises of sites serving
industrial, storage or agricultural functions.

58. Determining the surface area of pressure discharge areas

Article 101

The size of a pressure discharge area should be determined by using Formula 1 in Annex 10,
without regard to the special cases recorded in paragraph 104.

Article 102

The venting pressure of pressure discharge/venting areas cannot be higher than 110 % of that of
the expected wind load at their installation sites, unless other needs, such as anti-burglary security
systems or technological excess pressure require an increase of this value.

59. Determining the surface area of pressure discharge/venting areas

Article 103

The size of a pressure discharge/venting areas should be determined by using Formula 2 in

Annex 10, without regard to special cases recorded in paragraph 104.

60. Special cases

Article 104

(1) If the length of the premises is at least four times their width, then the values calculated
according to paragraphs 101–103 should be increased by 20 %.

(2) Venting to a blow-off area is allowed as an exception if no other means exist for venting an
interior space. In such a case, the volume of the receiving area must be at least five times that of the
vented area and it must have a pressure discharge or pressure discharge/venting surface towards the
outside.
 63

(3) Use of a ventilation well for venting is permissible if the geometric relationships of its walls
in the direction of venting satisfy the requirements of Article 106(4), Article 106(6)(a) or (b), and of
Article 106(7).

(4) If pressure discharge and pressure discharge/venting areas are installed in combination, and
the dimensions of the pressure discharge/venting areas are smaller than those of the pressure
discharge areas, or if their venting pressure exceeds 1 kN/m2, the combined surface size should be
determined in paragraph 101.

(5) If pressure discharge and pressure discharge/venting areas are installed in combination, and
the dimensions of the pressure discharge/venting areas is the same as, or exceeds, those of the
pressure discharge areas, the size of the combined surfaces should be determined in paragraph 103.

(6) If the venting pressure of the pressure discharge/venting areas is between 1-3 kN/m2, the
surface size should be determined in paragraph 101.

61. Protection against secondary explosions

Article 105

Equipment that is explosive in itself and the destruction of which would pose a secondary
explosive danger to their immediate environment must be vented to an area away from an
environment carrying further explosive risk.

62. Protection of the environment receiving venting

Article 106

(1) For the protection of traffic routes and spaces, the venting surface should be designed to be
in the floor slabs of the premises.

(2) If it is technically impossible for the venting surfaces to be in the floor slabs, they can be
designed to be in the side walls, in keeping with the requirements set forth in (3)–(7).

(3) The protective clearance in the direction of venting should be determined based on Figure 1
of Annex 10.

(4) Apart from the plant's traffic route, any other traffic route or space appropriate for a person
to be in can be within protective clearance limits only in the presence of a protective wall, a
deflector wall or a pressure discharge/venting surface deflecting forces in a direction that does not
pose any risk of danger.

(5) The protective wall and the deflector wall must prevent the media streaming through the
venting surface from endangering any traffic route other than the plant's traffic route and any space
appropriate for a person to be in, as shown in Figure 2 of Annex 10.

(6) The protective wall and the deflector wall should be designed so as not to interfere with the
venting process with its positioning, to ensure adequate free venting space:
a) max 60°, per Figure 3 of Annex 10;
b) max 30°, per Figure 4 of Annex 10;
 64

c) max 30° but with a supplementary angle of minimum 60°, per Figure 5 of Annex 10.

(7) If the traffic area to be protected is beside a structure that poses explosive risks where
venting also occurs via the roof, then
a) The protective clearances for pressure discharge areas are to be set forth in (3) and (5);
b) If pressure discharge/venting areas deflecting in dangerous directions are used, the protective
clearances are to be set in Figure 6 of Annex 10;
c) If pressure discharge/venting areas deflecting in non-dangerous directions are used, and if
side wall venting makes this possible otherwise, the protective clearance, per Figure 7 of Annex 10,
is 8 m.

Article 107

(1) There can be no door or window within 10 m in the direction of venting, and no other
structure or section thereof can be closer than 6 m. The dimensions of structures beyond the
previously-cited distances should follow guidelines set in Article 106(7).

(2) For fixtures placed within 3 m in front of pressure discharge or pressure discharge/venting
areas, the surface of the 60°-projection over the pressure discharge, pressure discharge/venting
surfaces of such fixtures must be disregarded, per Figure 8 of Annex 10, when determining the
dimensions of the venting surfaces.

(3) If a fixture is within 6 m of venting surfaces in the direction of venting, then the fixture's
dimensions must be designed to be able to absorb venting pressures applied to deflector walls.

63. Structural loads

Article 108

(1) If pressure discharge areas described in paragraph 101 are used, then the 3 kN/m2 static load
applying to the primary load-bearing structures should be taken into consideration in all directions
within the interior space as an extraordinary load.

(2) If a pressure discharge/venting area described in paragraph 103 is used, then the 2 kN/m2
static load applying to the primary load-bearing structures should be taken into consideration in all
directions within the interior space as an extraordinary load.

(3) If pressure discharge/venting areas described in (2) or those designed for low-pressure
fixtures are used, then reduced excess pressure must be taken into consideration, with a loading
time period of 0.02 sec., or by using a pressure-time state graph that can be described.

(4) Pressure discharge and pressure discharge/venting areas must be evenly distributed along
bordering surfaces, or they must be concentrated where the explosion is very likely to occur. The
distance between pressure discharge areas cannot be more than 12 m within one pressure relief area.

(5) The load-bearing structures of spaces to be protected with pressure discharge and pressure
discharge/venting areas should be designed in such a way that the destruction of their individual
elements could not lead to progressive collapse.
 65

(6) Secondary load-bearing structures should be designed with efforts made towards limiting
their ability to communicate forces to primary load-bearing structures, thereby reducing excess
loading of the latter.

(7) Loads applying to protective walls and deflector walls, if the protective walls and deflector
walls are the following distances from venting areas:
a) within 5 m: 6 kN/m2;
b) between 5–10 m: 5 kN/m2;
c) between 10–20 m: 3 kN/m;
d) Over 20 m away: 1 kN/m2;
The dimensions of the walls should be designed for the static load applying in the direction of
the venting. Due to the effect of negative pressure, 20 % of the loads must also be taken into
consideration in the direction opposite to that of venting.

XII.
FIRE PROTECTION OF SPECIAL STRUCTURES

Article 109

For cases not provided for in this chapter, general chapters should be applied.

64. Public road tunnels

Article 110

(1) Public road tunnels that are up to 300 m long are classified as Low Risk (LR), those longer
than 300 m but not exceeding 1 000 m are classified as Medium Risk (MR), while those that are
longer than 1 000 m are classified as High Risk (HR).

(2) In public road tunnels of the HR class, aboveground fire hydrants must be designed to be
placed at every 100 m. Mechanical protection must be provided for the fire hydrants. The fire
hydrant network must be designed so as to ensure 4 800 L/min. water volume with any 4 hydrants
operating simultaneously for 180 minutes.

(3) An emergency exit must be designed for public road tunnels, with the distance between two
emergency exits not to exceed 500 m. The tunnel's ends leading to the outside, as well as protected
spaces with fire protection closures between tunnel tubes with access to the outside can be
considered to be emergency exits.

(4) Structures belonging to fire classifications A1 or A2 may be built into public road tunnels.

(5) The maximum fire compartment size requirement does not apply to public road tunnels.

(6) The wall, floor and shell delimiting the tunnel

a) in public road tunnels of the LR class should have a fire resistance performance rating of at
least REI 60 with a test done according to the hydrocarbon fire curve in Standard MSZ EN 1363-2
of the Hungarian Standards Institute;
b) in public road tunnels of the MR class should have a fire resistance performance rating of
at least REI 90 with a test done according to the hydrocarbon fire curve in Standard MSZ EN 1363-
 66

2 of the Hungarian Standards Institute or according to the public road tunnel fire curve of the RABT
ZTV standard;
c) in public road tunnels of the HR class should have a fire resistance performance rating of at
least REI 120 with a test done according to the public road tunnel fire curve of the RABT ZTV
standard.

(7) The loss of stability in case of a fire of tunnels running under water or under buildings
cannot result in flooding or damage to the buildings.

Article 111

(1) Structures within protected spaces should have a fire resistance performance rating of at
least EI 120 with a test done according to the hydrocarbon fire curve in Standard MSZ 1363-2 of
the of the Hungarian Standards Institute or according to the public road tunnel fire curve of the
RABT ZTV standard.

(2) The fire resistance performance rating of emergency exit doors according to the fire curve
of Standard MSZ EN 1363-1 or with a test done according to Standard MSZ 1634-1 of the
Hungarian Standards Institute should be at least EI1 90, while for the HR class it should be at least
EI1 120. The fire classification of the doors should be at least A2.

(3) In the case of twin-tube tunnels of the HR class, connecting tunnels of an adequate cross-
section profile and equipped with fire protection closures must be provided, at least every 1 500 m,
for emergency response brigades.

(4) Where transport of dangerous substances is allowed, diversion of flammable or toxic

substances must be provided for by way of drains built into tunnel segments or via other measures.
The drain system should be designed and maintained so as to enable fire prevention and prevention
of the spread throughout the tunnel and between tunnel tubes, as well as to the outside, of
flammable or toxic substances.

(5) Control interfaces for fire safety equipment must be provided at tunnel openings leading to
the outside of MR class tunnels.

(6) Fire service intervention centres must be set up for tunnels of the HR class.

(7) Fire service intervention centres and the control interfaces for fire safety equipment should
be placed outside the tunnels, if possible.

(8) Manual starter devices and fittings for fire extinguishing equipment, communication
systems for aiding escape and the control centre for the fire signalling equipment should all be
placed in the fire service intervention centre.

Article 112

(1) Natural vents to conduct heat and smoke away from the tunnel can also be utilised in
tunnels of the LR class.

(2) In tunnels of the MR and HR classes, up to 3 000 m of lengthwise or combined heat and
smoke venting is allowed only if in an emergency situation traffic and escape control are provided
for, and if the distance between emergency exists has been reduced to 300 m for tunnels of the HR
class.
 67

(3) If the conditions listed in Subsection (2) are not met, then crosswise heat- and smoke
venting systems must be utilised in the tunnel.

(4) The heat and smoke venting system must be operational for at least 120 minutes, and this
must be ensured with a test done according to the fire curve in Standard MSZ 1363-1 of the of the
Hungarian Standards Institute.

(5) The heat and smoke venting system must be designed so as to ensure the safe escape and
rescue of those inside.

(6) If heat and smoke are conducted via natural venting, the tunnel's free-flow cross-section
cannot be smaller than 1 % of the tunnel's total area.

(7) If mechanical heat and smoke venting is employed, the heat and smoke venting equipment
must be suitable for conducting the 300 MW released heat output.

(8) Both automatic and manual start-up options must be provided for the heat and smoke
venting system. Manual start-up interfaces must be provided at the fire service intervention centre
and at the ends of the tunnel.

Article 113

(1) Wireless communication systems must be provided in public road tunnels for fire brigades
for disseminating information in case of fire or other emergencies, so communication can be
established between the operation centres of emergency response brigades and fire brigades and the
technical staff operating the tunnel.

(2) Safety lighting must be installed in public road tunnels, as well as escape signs, placed high
and low, lit from the outside or from the inside. Safety lighting and lit escape signs must be
designed so that in the case of one fault the devices along a stretch of no more than 50 m would
become inoperative.

(3) Signage indicating the distance to, and the direction of, the two closest emergency exits
should be placed on both side walls of the tunnel every 50 m. The signage must be recognisable
from at least 25 m away, and cannot be placed higher than at 2 m.

(4) Communication via two-way transmitters, placed at every 200 m, must be established in the
tubes of tunnels longer than 300 m and along planned escape routes.

(5) In temporary protected spaces established for tunnels longer than 1 000 m, communication
via two-way transmitters, placed at every 200 m, must be established between the protected space
and the fire service intervention centre.

(6) In public road tunnels longer than 3 000 m, except for the measures listed in (4), devices for
providing information and directions to tunnel users should be installed in temporary protected
spaces and along planned escape routes.

(7) Closed ducts built for technological piping and electrical cables and utilities tunnels should
be built so as to be easily accessible, at all points, to fire control materials in case of a fire.
 68

(8) Only halogen free cables and fixture installation systems should be used in public road
tunnels. Cables should be segmented to prevent the spread of fire at every 200 m.

Article 114

(1) In tunnels of the MR and HR classes, Doubly-secured power supply should be provided to
ensure secure power supply power consumption units in case of a fire. Automatic switch-overs to
backup power must be ensured in case of the occurrence of power outages.

(2) Power and control cables must be secured by mechanical means.

(3) Only dry transformers may be used in underground transformer substations.

65. Pedestrian underpasses

Article 115

(1) A pedestrian underpass used solely for pedestrian traffic is classified as LR; however, if
shops or other premises with public traffic are located in the underpass, it must be classified as MR.

(2) Permanently open, unimpeded segments of descending and ascending access to pedestrian
underpasses in the LR risk class, as well as to pedestrian underpasses in the MR class no longer
than 40 m, must suffice for the purposes of venting heat and smoke.

(3) Heat and smoke should be vented directly to the outside from shops located in pedestrian
underpasses with a total area larger than 50 m2.

(4) If a pedestrian underpass of the MR class is simultaneously a planned escape route for a
building suitable for mass occupancy, or for an underground railway line, venting heat and smoke
from the underpass must also be provided for.

(5) The effective venting area for venting heat and smoke from premises with a total area
exceeding 50 m2 and from pedestrian underpasses of the MR class must be at least 1 % of their total
area. The effective venting surface of air replacement must be identical to, or greater than, their
effective venting surfaces for venting heat and smoke. A mechanical air suction system may be used
in lieu of heat and smoke venting, while an air blowing system may be used in lieu of air
replacement surfaces, but this must be done so that for each effective square m of venting surface,
the heat and smoke venting and air replacement equipment provides 2 m3/s of air transport capacity.

(6) Should the pedestrian underpass be joined to another building, the underpass must comprise
a separate fire compartment from said other building.

Article 116

(1) If an underpass of the MR class it utilised as a structure for mass occupancy or as an escape
route for an underground railway line, the portal structures of the shops therein should have a fire
resistance performance rating of at least A2 EI 30, while its closures should have a fire resistance
performance rating of at least A2 EI2 30.
 69

(2) If a fire alarm device and an extinguisher are installed on premises of the shop, the above
requirement for the fire resistance performance rating of portal structures specified in (1) must not
apply.

(3) No requirement specifying maximum dimensions for fire compartments applies to

pedestrian underpasses; however, each shop in the underpass must be separated from the next one
by structures of a fire resistance performance rating of least an A2 EI 60. The seals around cables,
ventilation and other engineering pipes and conduits passing through such a trespassing of a wall
must satisfy fire resistance performance requirements for the wall structure in question.

(4) Adjoining premises serving the underpass should be separated from each other and from the
shops by structures with a fire resistance performance rating of at least A2 EI 60, while they must
be separated from the underpass by structures with a fire resistance performance rating of at least
A2 EI 30.

(5) Should the aggregate total areas of the shops exceed 500 m2 with a central ventilating
system installed, a fire damper valve must be installed in the structures bordering the shops.

(6) Emergency disconnection of the underpass in the case of a fire, and the operation of heat
and smoke venting wherever needed therein, together with a manual start-up of heat and smoke
venting must all be provided for on the premises controlling the functional operation of the
underpass, with the door of such premises bearing clearly visible, relevant signage. In shops with
heat and smoke venting installed, a manual start-up device must be provided at the entrance of the
shop, within its premises.

(7) Underpasses of the MR class must have materials of A1 or A2 fire protection class for heat
insulation or safety covering, as well as for closures (doors or windows).

(8) In the case of an underpass of the MR class, the necessity for, and the manner of installing,
a wall fire hydrant must be approved by the statutory fire protection service authority.

66. Underground railway lines

Article 117

(1) The underground stations of underground railway lines belong to the HR risk class, along
with railway tunnels. Surface stations and structures qualify as MR.

(2) At each station of an underground railway line, a staging area for fire control, capable of
accommodating the work of minimum eight firetrucks, must be provided on the surface. The
establishment of such an operational area must be approved by the statutory fire protection service
authority regarding its location, access, load-bearing capacity and size.

(3) At least four aboveground fire hydrants must be built at the operational area in such a way
that their simultaneous draft could let through at least 3 600 L per minute for the duration of
120 minutes. If the critical fire compartment of the station requires more water for firefighting, the
remaining amount of water for firefighting must be obtained from fire hydrants located within
100 m.

(4) A system of dry fire hoses, with connection points at each level, must be set up in the
staging area of deep underground stations to facilitate intervention by fire brigades. The feed point
 70

of the dry fire hoses must be mounted on the surface, maximum 20 m from the firefighters’ staging
area.

(5) A network of wall fire hydrants must be installed at the stations of underground railway
lines, as well as in railway tunnels. Operational connections of the equipment of fire brigades to
wall fire hydrants must be ensured.

(6) Wall fire hydrant cabinets, hoses or discharge nozzles are not required to be placed in
railway tunnels, but in such cases, access to the hoses belonging to such wall fire hydrants must be
provided in the passenger area of the station, with a minimum of two discharge nozzles.

(7) The maximum distance of wall fire hydrants from each other in railway tunnels may not
exceed 50 m.

Article 118

(1) No requirement specifying maximum dimensions for fire compartments applies to

underground railway lines.

(2) In order to minimise the spreading of fire,

a) the operational areas of underground railway stations must be designed to be separate fire
compartments from areas of passenger traffic;
b) the cross-section profile of the railway tunnel must be protected by a built-in fire
extinguisher at the station’s connection point; and
c) with the exception of the station platforms, parallel-tube railway tunnels must be separated
from each other by fire protection structures.

(3) Load-bearing and fire compartment structures must have the following fire resistance
performance ratings in the following cases:
a) Stations in the MR risk class: at least REI 60;
b) Stations in the HR risk class, except for tunnels: at least REI 90;
c) Underground tunnels: at least REI 120 according to the hydrocarbon fire curve in Standard
MSZ EN 1363-2 of the Hungarian Standards Institute, or according to the railway fire curve in the
RABT ZTV Standard;
d) Railway tunnels also used for freight trains: at least REI 120 according to the railway fire
curve in the RABT ZTV Standard; and
e) Escape routes of tunnels and protected spaces must minimally qualify for a REI 90 fire
resistance performance rating according to the hydrocarbon fire curve in Standard MSZ EN 1363-2
of the Hungarian Standards Institute, or according to the railway fire curve in the RABT ZTV
Standard.

(4) Emergency exit doors in tunnels must minimally qualify for a fire resistance performance
rating of EI1 90-C according to the fire curve in Standard MSZ EN 1363-1 and according to the
tests specified in Standard MSZ EN 1634-1 of the Hungarian Standards Institute. Doors must
minimally fall into the A2 fire protection class.

(5) If the station is joined to another building, it must comprise a separate fire compartment
from the adjoining building.

(6) Heat and smoke must be vented out of basement level premises of stations, with
replacement air provided – with the exception of premises smaller than 50 m2.
 71

(7) Heat and smoke venting must be provided for railway tunnels, with replacement air
provided in such a way that safe escape from the tunnels can be ensured for people.

(8) Heat and smoke venting system for stations must be constructed in such a way that
platforms and other areas of passenger traffic have only minimal smoke, not preventing escape, for
a minimum of 30 minutes.

(9) The ventilators used in the equipment for heat and smoke venting, as well as the electric
motors powering them, must be designed to stay operational for a minimum of 60 minutes,
withstanding flue gas temperatures of at least 400 °C. The air pipes of the heat and smoke venting
system must minimally qualify as Class A1 EI 60 (i↔o) S, while the system of pipes providing
replacement air must minimally have a fire protection class and fire resistance performance rating
of A1 EI 60 (o→i), based on tests done according to the fire curves in Standard MSZ EN 1363-1 of
the Hungarian Standards Institute.

Article 119

(1) When designing the heat and smoke venting system, the speed of heat release of the fixtures
must also be taken into consideration.

(2) Escalators and elevators built in smoke-free passenger traffic areas or platforms,
constructed per the requirements of Article 118(8), may also be taken into consideration in terms of
in rescuing people present at the station.

(3) The time period required to evacuate stations, operated at the transport company’s capacity
limits, must not exceed 10 minutes.

(4) Minimum one smoke-free pressurised staircase (with air blown in) must be built in the area
of deep underground stations in such a way that all levels remain accessible via the staircase.

Article 120

(1) When establishing electronic ticket control or passenger check-in systems, escape options
must be provided for cases of emergency. Installed fire alarm must enable escape and rescue by
releasing all impeding structures automatically, while the employee on duty must manually do so
from his/her station.

(2) One connecting tunnel must be built for every 300 m of parallel-tube railway tunnels,
equipped with fireproof closures, or evacuation and rescue routes directly leading outside must be
provided every 300 m.

(3) In the case of a single railway tunnel, escape and rescue routes, established every 300 m,
must provide access either to a temporary protected area, enclosed by fireproof structures, or lead
directly outside. Direct routes leading outside must be provided from such temporary protected
areas.

Article 121

(1) To escape from train carriages via the side doors or, if necessary, via the end doors,
pavements or walkways minimum 80 cm wide must be built in all railway tunnels.
 72

(2) For the escape and rescue of passengers from tunnels, and to provide them with access to
the platforms from the level of rails, fixed stairs or ladders of at least the A2 fire protection class
must be installed at both ends of platforms.

(3) Wireless communication systems must be provided in the tunnels and station areas for
emergency response brigades for disseminating information in case of fire or other emergencies, so
communication can be established between the operation centres of emergency response brigades
and fire brigades and the technical staff of the transport company.

(4) Intelligent, analogue built-in fire alarm systems which can be labelled must be installed,
covering the entire station area.

(5) Automatic fire extinguishers must be installed at the following sites at stations:
a) in the spaces under the escalators;
b) in the cable space under the platforms;
c) in shops already in operation, at the time of their refurbishment; and
d) at the rails near the platforms, to control possible fire in the space under the floor plates of
carriages.

Article 122

(1) Closed ducts built for technological piping and electrical cables and utilities tunnels should
be built so as to be easily accessible, at all points, to fire control materials in case of a fire.

(2) Wall fire hydrants installed in the station areas, and the doors of the cabinets for the
placement of fire extinguishers must be equipped with electronic locks. The fire alarm must
automatically release these locks in case of fire, while the station employee on duty must do the
same manually from his/her station.

(3) Doubly-secured power supply should be provided to ensure secure power supply to power
consumption units in case of a fire. Automatic switch-overs to backup power must be ensured in
case of the occurrence of power outages.

(4) Only halogen free cables and fixture installation systems should be used at stations and in
railway tunnels. Cables should be segmented to prevent the spread of fire at every 200 m.

(5) Only dry transformers may be used in underground transformer substations.

(6) A three-phase 0.4 kV cable connection capable of transmitting minimum 20 kVA must be
installed for the use of the fire brigades, connecting the surface and the station platform, made of a
system of fireproof cables branching out at each level, with power supplied by the rescue brigade’s
own power generator.

(7) Safety lighting must be installed in the railway tunnels and at the stations, as well as escape
signs, placed high and low, lit from the outside or from the inside. A network of signals showing
escape routes must be installed in the platform flooring.

Article 123

(1) Only materials of fire classification A1 or A2-s1, d0 may be utilised as covers or

ornamental surfaces, or as closures for underground spaces.
 73

(2) With the exception of ticket booths, no shops or other sales booths may be set up in the area
of stations.

67. Lookout towers

Article 124

(1) The risk classification of lookout towers must be defined according to Table 1 of Annex 1.

(2) No requirements of fire protection classification or fire resistance limits are applicable to
stand-alone structures of lookout towers of the VLR or LR class.

(3) The structure of stand-alone lookout towers must be the following in the following cases:
a) Fire protection class C at the minimum in the case of an MR structure;
b) Fire protection class A2 at the minimum in the case of an HR structure, with certification
to withstand fire from an external fire source as specified in tests done according to the fire curves
in Standard MSZ EN 1363-2 of the Hungarian Standards Institute, for 30 minutes.

(4) No requirement specifying maximum dimensions for fire compartments applies to stand-
alone lookout towers.

(5) The requirements for structures of lookout towers designed to be on or in a building depend
on the building’s own risk class.

(6) Stairs leading to a lookout tower within a building are not required to qualify in terms of
fire resistance performance rating if the staircase is separated from the rest of the building by
fireproof structures, has a direct outside opening on the ground floor and the structure of the stairs is
made of A1- or A2 fire protection materials.

(7) No requirements of fire protection class or fire resistance performance rating are applicable
to stairs leading to a lookout tower within a building classified as maximum MR, provided that the
lookout tower and the staircase leading to it are built as a separate fire compartment from the rest of
the building, and provided that the stairs have an opening outside on the ground floor, and that the
area of the lookout tower fire compartment is protected by automatic fire alarm.

(8) Staircases within buildings, except for buildings classified as VLR, must have a system for
venting heat and smoke. The construction of such systems must be approved by the statutory fire
protection service authority.

Article 125

(1) The statutory fire protection service authority must determine the necessity of an escape
elevator in the case of lookout towers belonging to the HR class.

(2) A system of wall fire hydrants must be built in lookout towers in the risk classes of MR or
HR, except for stand-alone lookout towers.

(3) An escape signal or escape signals lit from the inside or outside must be mounted signalling
the escape routes for lookout towers built on or in buildings, and for stand-alone lookout towers that
are also used after nightfall and that belong to the MR or HR class.
 74

68. Canopy structures

Article 126

(1) The risk class of canopy structures must be determined in accordance with Tables 1–2 of
Annex 1.

(2) The provisions of this chapter must apply to those canopy structures of community use with
an area larger than 500 m2 at the base or that are designed for mass occupancy.

(3) Spaces for human occupancy in canopy structures must be established only on the ground
floor.

(4) No requirements of fire resistance performance rating are applicable to canopy structures.
The frame supporting the canopy structures must be made of materials of fire protection class D in
the case of the VLR class, of materials of fire protection class B in the case of the LR class, or of
materials of fire protection classes A1 or A2 in the case of structures in the MR or HR classes.

(5) The canopy covering of a canvas structure must minimally be of the B-s2, d0 fire protection
class if the structure is designed to have occupancy of over 2 000 people. If the occupancy of the
building is designed for occupancy of more than 300 but exceeding 2 000, the covering must fulfil
at least the requirements of the C-s2, d0 class.

(6) The maximum allowed base area of canopy structures must be as follows in the following
cases:
a) 6 000 m2 if the covering material is minimally B-s2, d0;
b) 4 000 m2 if the covering material is minimally C-s2, d0; or
c) 1 000 m2 in all other cases of canopy structures.

(7) If the building with a canopy structure is organically joined to another building, the base
area covered by the canopy structure must also be included in the total area of that other building.
Of the fire compartment requirements for the canopy structure and the other building, respectively,
the lesser requirement must be observed.

Article 127

(1) The fire protection class of the heat and sound insulation applied in buildings must
minimally be identical to that of the canopy covering material, while the material of the floor
covering must minimally be a Class Cfl-s2.

(2) The number of exits of canopy structures and the width of such exits must be designed in
such a way that the structures could be vacated in the following maximum time periods in the
following cases:
a) 4 minutes in the case of a covering satisfying a B-s2, d0 requirement;
b) 2 minutes in the case of a covering satisfying a C-s2, d0 requirement;
c) 1 minute in the case of all other canopy structure covering types.

(3) The door leading towards the escape route must be taken into consideration for evacuation,
together with openings permanently provided during operation.
 75

(4) Exits must have no thresholds or level differences or any other structure impeding safe
transit.

Article 128

(1) The fire clearance of canopy structures from other buildings must be the following in the
following cases:
a) 10 m at the minimum in the case of a canopy covering satisfying requirement B-s2, d0;
b) 12 m at the minimum in the case of a canopy covering satisfying requirement C-s2, d0;
c) 14 m in all other cases of canopy covering.

(2) If the total aggregate area of two or more canopy structures erected alongside one another
does not exceed the maximum defined in Article 126(6), they can be considered as a single
structure, and the above-cited obligatory clearances do not have to be provided between them, since
they are considered as a single fire compartment.

(3) Only electricity may be used to light a canopy structure. All electrical appliances or fixtures
operating within a canopy structure must be installed in such a way that they can be powered off
both centrally and in separate segments.

(4) Emergency lighting must be placed in canopy structures, and escape signals lit from the
inside or from the outside must also be provided.

69. Scaffold-type structures

Article 129

(1) The risk class of scaffold-type structures must be determined according to Tables 1–4 of
Annex 1.

(2) No requirements of fire resistance performance rating are applicable to scaffold-type

structures.

(3) The vertical and horizontal support frames of scaffold-type structures, together with the
structure of their stairs must satisfy the following criteria in the following cases:
a) Class D at the minimum in the case of structures with an occupancy higher than 10, but not
exceeding 50;
b) Class C at the minimum in the case of structures with an occupancy over 50 but not
exceeding 300;
c) Class B at the minimum in the case of structures with an occupancy over 300 but not
exceeding 500;
d) Fire protection class A2 at the minimum in the case of structures with occupancy over 500.

(4) The vertical and horizontal support frames of structures for industrial use, together with the
support structure for their stairs must be of the A1 or A2 fire classification. The presence of
explosive or flammable materials must be considered when determining the fire resistance
performance rating, as they may endanger the stability of the frame structure.

(5) No requirement specifying maximum dimensions for fire compartments applies to scaffold-
type structures.
 76

(6) The evacuation routes of scaffold-type structures, the number of exits and their sizes must
result in the following evacuation times in the following cases:
a) 1 minute in the case of a class D fire protection support frame structure;
b) 2 minutes in the case of a class C fire protection support frame structure;
c) 6 minutes for maximum evacuation time in the case of a class A1 or A2 fire protection
support frame structure.

Article 130

(1) A system for signalling escape routes must be set up for scaffold-type structures with an
occupancy of over 50.

(2) Safety lights must be set up on every scaffold-type structure designed for mass occupancy
and for use after nightfall.

70. Shed structures

Article 131

(1) The hazard classification of shed structures must be determined based on the criteria found
in Tables 1–4 in Annex 1.

(2) No requirements of fire resistance performance rating are applicable to shed structures.

(3) Support frames of shed structures must minimally have the following fire protection class
ratings in the following cases:
a) Class D, in the case of a structure with an occupancy capacity for no more than 50 people;
b) Class C, in the case of a structure with an occupancy capacity for more than 50 people, but
no more than 300 people;
c) Class B, in the case of a structure with an occupancy capacity for more than 300 people, but
no more than 2 000 people; and
d) Class A2, in the case of a structure with an occupancy capacity for more than 2,000 people.

(4) The roof and other partition structures must minimally have the following fire protection
class ratings:
a) Class B, in the case of a structure with an occupancy capacity for more than 300 people, but
no more than 2 000 people; and
b) Class A2, in the case of a structure with an occupancy capacity for more than 2 000 people.

(5) The support frame, as well as the roof and other partition structures for, shed structures with
an industrial function must minimally have a fire protection class rating of A2.

(6) The evacuation route, number and dimensions of exits of shed structures must be designed
so that the shed may be evacuated in the following number of minutes in the following cases:
a) 0.5 minutes, in the case of a structure with a support frame, roof and other partition structure
that falls under a D fire protection class;
b) 1 minute, in the case of a structure with a support frame, roof and other partition structure
that falls under a C fire protection class;
c) 2 minutes, in the case of a structure with a support frame, roof and other partition structure
that falls under a B fire protection class; and
 77

d) 4 minutes, in the case of a structure with a support frame, roof and other partition structure
that falls under an A1 or an A2 fire protection class.

(7) In the event that a partition structure is utilised with a fire protection class that is lower than
the fire protection class of the support frame, the fire protection class of the partition structure
should be taken into consideration when establishing the evacuation time.

(8) Evacuation calculations should be made based on the space extending to the horizontal
projection of the baseline of the shed roof structure.

Article 132

(1) In case of shed storage, guidelines for outdoor storage must be followed in terms of fire
compartment and clearance requirements.

(2) The permissible floor area dimensions of the shed structures according to their respective
fire protection classes are as follows:
a) no more than 1 000 m2, in the case of a structure with a support frame, roof and other
partition structure that has at least a D fire protection class;
b) no more than 2 000 m2, in the case of a building with a support frame, roof and other
partition structure that has at least a C fire protection class;
c) no more than 4 000 m2, in the case of a building with a support frame, roof and other
partition structure that has at least a B fire protection class; and
d) no more than 8 000 m2, in the case of a building with a support frame, roof and other
partition structure that has at least an A2 fire protection class.

(3) In the event that a partition structure is utilised with a fire protection class that is lower than
the fire protection class of the support frame, the fire protection class of the partition structure
should be taken into consideration when establishing the permissible floor area.

(4) In the event that the storage shed is organically integrated into another building, the floor
area of the shed is included in the total floor area of said building.

Article 133

(1) The required fire clearance between shed structures and other structures according to their
respective fire protection classes must minimally be as follows:
a) at least 14 m, in the case of a structure with a support frame, roof or other partition structure
that has a D fire protection class;
b) at least 12 m, in the case of a structure with a support frame, roof or other partition structure
that has a C fire protection class;
c) at least 10 m, in the case of a structure with a support frame, roof or other partition structure
that has a B fire protection class; and
d) at least 8 m, in the case of a structure with a support frame, roof or other partition structure
that has an A1 or an A2 fire protection class.

(2) In the event that a partition structure is utilised with a fire protection class that is lower than
the fire protection class of the support frame, the fire protection class of the partition structure
should be taken into consideration when establishing the fire clearance.
 78

(3) In the event that the floor area of two or more adjacent shed structures does not exceed the
dimensions specified in Article 132(2), the floor areas of the shed structures in question together are
to be considered as one fire compartment.

Article 134

(1) Shed structures with an occupancy capacity of over 50 people must have escape route signs
installed.

(2) Safety lights and signage indicating escape routes, illuminated either from the outside or
from the inside, must be set up on structures designed for mass occupancy if they are used after
nightfall.

XIII.
ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION EQUIPMENT

71. Fire protection requirements for low-voltage power equipment

Article 135

(1) All of the electrical equipment supplied by normal central and backup power sources, as
well as the central uninterruptible power supply, must be designed so that the entire structure’s
power may be switched off from a single location. The statutory fire protection service authority
must be consulted regarding the necessity and configuration of shutting off individual structure
sections.

(2) Shutdowns in case of a fire must be designed so that groups of power consumption units
can be shut down separately, their functioning ensured in the event of shutting down other circuits.

(3) If the wiring crosses more than one fire compartment, it must be configured in such a way
that in case of a fire the firefighter must not be in danger of an electric shock in the fire
compartment affected by the shutdown.

(4) The function and the on/off status of grouped electrical switches, circuit breakers and surge
protection devices must be clearly labelled.

Article 136

In the event that the power to buildings of the MR and HR classes is supplied by a medium-
voltage system, with medium-voltage wiring spanning several storeys of the building, the following
requirements are applicable:
a) The entire medium-voltage system of the building must be possible to shut down from a
switching room located on the building’s ground floor or in its basement area;
b) Except for transformers installed in the basement area (Level -1) and on the ground floor,
only dry transformers may be used;
c) It should be possible to shut off power consumption units connected to individual
transformers as a group assigned to a particular fire compartment, using a low-voltage circuit
breaker assembly; and
 79

d) The low-voltage circuit breaker assembly connected to the lowest-level transformer must
have separate fire control power consumption groups and branches that can be shut off separately.

72. The operability of fire control power consumption units

Article 137

(1) In the course of configuring, installing and designing fire control power consumption units,
maintenance of their operability must be ensured in case of a fire for the lesser time period of that
specified in Table 1 in Annex 11 and that specified by the fire resistance requirements for the load-
bearing wall, respectively.

(2) Operability is maintained, if in case of a fire

a) the following requirements are met until the end of the rated operability time period:
aa) the electrical power output required for the fire control power consumption unit in case of a
fire is available;
ab) fire protection of the power transfer between the power source and the fire control power
consumption unit, and of the wiring sections providing operation and control within the building
and outside the main power distributor, or their configuration according to the specifications set
forth in paragraph 138, are ensured;
ac) the operation and control of the power consumption unit is ensured;
ad) the fixation of the power consumption unit and the stability of the support frame holding it
in place is ensured;
b) in the case of simultaneous use of normal and of backup power supply, the switch-over from
the normal power supply in case of an outage to the backup power supply occurs within the
specified time period and is automatic; and
c) the design of the power consumption unit meets the requirements of applicable, or equivalent,
technical specifications.

(3) A backup power source must be used for the following:

a) the provision for fire control power consumption units for structures or individual sections of
structures in a risk class falling under the HR standard;
b) vital system components;
c) an institution which serves as an inpatient treatment facility; and
d) residences or educational institutions where individuals can be rescued without special
preparations.

(4) The specified time span for switching between the normal and the backup power supply is
as follows:
a) 1 second in the case of safety lighting and evacuation signals; and
b) 90 seconds in the case of a different fire control power consumption unit.

(5) Public utility power grids may be used as a backup power supply option if the power output
locations creating individual power supply sources for consumption have a common node in the
medium-voltage grid section with 120 kV or higher voltage.

(6) Gas motors may not be used as a power supply for fire control power consumption units.

Article 138
 80

Fire protection of the power transfer between the power source and the fire control power
consumption unit, and of the wiring sections providing operation and control within the building
and outside the main power distributor do not have to be ensured under the following circumstances:
a) if the backup power supply was installed within the fire control power consumption unit; or
b) if the power loss of a fire control power consumption unit within a fire compartment is
limited in accordance with Table 2 in Annex 11 and the wiring ensuring power transfer, operation
and control can be found in the same fire compartment as the power consumption unit affected by
the power loss.

73. Lightning protection

Article 139

(1) The provisions of this chapter regarding lightning protection are pertinent to both temporary
and permanent structures, with the exception of vehicles.

(2) Lightning strike protection for structures must be ensured pursuant to applicable regulations
in order to prevent the risk of loss of human life, loss of public services and loss of cultural heritage.

Article 140

(1) During the repurposing of a new structure or an existing structure, or the expansion of an
existing structure by more than 40 %, lightning strike protection in accordance with lightning
protection standards (marked as LPS) must be ensured.

(2) Except for the circumstances outlined in Subsection (1), lightning strike protection may also
be ensured with existing, non-lightning-protection-standard-compliant methods.

(3) Upon expansion, existing non-standard-compliant lightning protection equipment must

comply with the standards existing at the time of installation, or with the technical specifications in
effect during the last inspection.

(4) In the event that an originally non-compliant lightning protection system is converted to a
compliant lightning protection system in an existing structure, thereafter the specifications of non-
compliant lightning protection are no longer applicable.

Article 141

Lightning strike protection is adequate under the following conditions:

a) If the determined lightning protection risk assessment projects a one-year risk factor for loss
of human life as smaller than 10-5 and the risk factor for loss of public service and loss of cultural
heritage as smaller than 10-4;
b) If the structures detailed in Annex 12 have adequate lightning protection as specified in the
Annex; and
c) If the measures taken for lightning protection for temporary buildings meets the
specifications outlined in paragraph 143.

Article 142

(1) Lightning protection must be established in the case of indicated structures listed in the
table in Annex 12 and the level of protection must comply with the requirements as described;
 81

furthermore, lightning protection must be established against lightning strikes in structures listed
therein for which lighting protection can only be established this way.

(2) In the event that the applicable technical specifications require a stricter protection level for
a building listed in Annex 12, the stricter protection level must be met.

Article 143

(1) Lightning protection must be configured in those temporary structures, staging areas and
construction areas that remain erected during or on any day of between 1 April and 31 October.

(2) In the case of temporary structures, lightning protection with a projected one-year risk
factor for loss of human life smaller than 10-4 and risk factor for loss of public service smaller than
10-2 is also acceptable.

(3) An operational, user or work manual must be created to ensure lightning protection for
temporary structures.

Article 144

Establishing lightning protection is not mandatory in the event that the following do not have a
ridge height higher than 10 m:
a) A residential building that contains a single housing unit or only has housing units adjacent
to one another;
b) A residential building that has housing units placed above one another that have a floor area
of no more than 400 m2, in the event that the roof material has a fire classification of A1-A2; or
c) A public building not listed in Annex 12 that has a floor area of no more than 200 m2.

74. Protection against electrostatic charge and discharge

Article 145

(1) The provisions of this Section do not extend to encompassing protection against
electrostatic charges and discharges of technological equipment.

(2) Areas, outdoor areas and explosive danger zones where materials in an explosive danger
class are produced, processed, used, excluding the alteration of exclusively physical characteristics,
stored or issued and electrostatic charges may cause a fire or an explosion, protection against
electrostatic charges must be ensured. Documented protection measures must be implemented in
order to protect against electrostatic ignition during planning and implementation and the
electrostatic risk must be determined.

(3) During the electrical planning and implementation, electrostatic grounding of adequate
safety and quality must be ensured for antistatic coatings and the electrostatic equipotential bonding
in all places where electrostatic discharge is unacceptable.

(4) Protection against electrostatic charges is sufficient if the planning, implementation,

operation and maintenance are in accordance with the relevant technical specifications or are at an
equivalent level of safety and the protection against electrostatic charges is deemed acceptable by
an inspector following an inspection.
 82

75. Safety lighting, alarm signals and escape route signs

Article 146

(1) Safety lighting must be installed in the following places:

a) Along escape routes in buildings in a MR and HR class;
b) Along escape routes in kindergartens, schools, institutions serving as child welfare centres,
childcare buildings and emergency shelters;
c) In spaces that are temporarily under protection and along routes used by fire brigades to
approach the premises;
d) In the foreground of an emergency elevator,
e) In fire service intervention centres and along routes used by fire brigades to approach the
premises;
f) On the premises with a master switch in case of fire and along routes used by fire brigades
to approach the premises;
g) On the premises of the alarm receiving centre and along routes used by fire brigades to
approach the premises;
h) On the premises with built-in fire extinguisher cabinets and along routes used fire brigades
to approach the premises;
i) On premises used for mass occupancy;
j) Wherever this Decree prescribes; and
k) Wherever the statutory fire protection service authority prescribes in order to ensure escape.

(2) Escape signs illuminated either internally or externally must be placed at a high position, or
if not possible, at a medium position, in the following premises:
a) Along the escape route of buildings in a LR, MR and HR class; or
b) On premises with a capacity for 100 or more people.

(3) Escape signs must be placed at a low position — except in smokeproof stairwells — to
supplement escape signs placed at a high position in the following premises:
a) Along escape routes of premises with a capacity for 1 000 or more people; or
b) Wherever this Decree prescribes.

(4) The illumination of signs prescribed in (2) must operate perpetually in the building sections
where individuals escaping have no knowledge of local conditions.

(5) Illumination to avert panic must be instituted in the following premises:

a) Premises used for mass occupancy; and
b) Premises used to situate people who cannot be rescued or people who can be rescued with
preparation.

(6) Sign systems to indicate escape routes must be established on the following premises:
a) Along the escape routes of premises with a capacity for 3 000 or more people; and
b) Where the statutory fire protection authority prescribes based on smoke build-up
characteristics in order to ensure escape.

Article 147

Safety signs may be illuminated internally, externally or be a photoluminescent sign, which

must illuminate the sign minimally for the time span and to the degree as prescribed by the relevant
technical specifications.
 83

Article 148

(1) The following must be marked with fire protection signs in accordance with sign
specifications detailed in paragraph 147:
a) Firefighting equipment;
b) Wall fire hydrants, fire extinguisher storage cabinets and dry fire hose feed points and water
outlet points;
c) Manual signal transmitters to signal a fire not visible from any point;
d) Handling mechanism for a manual start of a firefighting technical product; and
e) The entrance to the access point to a built-in fire extinguisher cabinet.

(2) Premises must have the following prohibitive signs as specified in paragraph 147 at the
entrance to, inside of or in the affected outdoor area of the premises:
a) Prohibition against use of an ignition source and against taking it into the premises;
b) Prohibition against smoking; and
c) Prohibition against using water as an extinguishing agent.

(3) Warning signs in accordance with the specifications detailed in paragraph 147 must be
placed to warn against the following:
a) The presence of more than 20 L/kg of an explosive material;
b) The presence of a radioactive material; and
c) The presence of solar panels outside and adjacent to the building’s main entrance.

(4) The location of a main breaker for a public utility must be indicated at the entrance to the
building.

(5) It is unnecessary to place explosion hazard signs or warning and prohibitive signs as
detailed in (2) in areas that are smaller than 20 m2, only at their entrance.

Article 149

Safety signs indicating the locations of fire protection equipment must be placed at least 1.8 m
higher than the equipment or the accessories, but no higher than 2.5 m, and in such a way that the
signs are recognisable as shown in Figure 1 of Annex 13.

Article 150

In the case of buildings with more than two storeys or with more than one storey in the case of
buildings with a basement, each storey must have a sign in place indicating the storey number at
every stairway or at each stairway junction, with the exception of residential buildings in a VLR
class. In buildings in a MR and HR class, each stairway or the exit door of each stairway must have
a sign indicating which storey of the building is accessible from the given stairway.

Article 151

(1) Each smokeproof doorway must have a permanent sign or signal with good visibly and with
legible-sized lettering with the following inscription: “Smoke containment boundary! The automatic
closure of the door must be ensured.”
 84

(2) Each fireproof doorway located at the fire containment boundary must have a permanent
sign or signal with good visibly and with legible-sized lettering with the following inscription: “Fire
containment boundary! The automatic closure of the door must be ensured.”

Article 152

(1) The exit and emergency exit doors must be marked with signs mounted above thereof in the
cases defined in Article 146(2), in accordance with Figures 2-3 of Annex 13, or, if there are no other
possibilities, signs must be mounted beside them. No escape signs are permitted to be mounted on
the doors themselves. Doors provided with a panic bar must bear a marking for its opening
mechanism by a safety sign referring to its handling.

(2) At all levels, signs must be placed near the traditional elevator in buildings saying “It is
FORBIDDEN to use this elevator in the case of fire!” while appropriate signs must be mounted near
the safety elevators, as specified in the respective technical specifications. If foreign people may be
present in a community building, safety signs must be also displayed in English and German, and in
the mother tongue of foreign persons likely to appear in large numbers; alternatively, pictograms
replacing these must be displayed.

Article 153

(1) The recognition distance of signs mounted at great heights must be defined according to the
relevant technical specifications. Safety signs displayed in such heights to mark escape routes must
be mounted above the exit doors and at every point where the escape direction changes. At least one
sign must always be visible from any point in the escape route in all cases.

(2) Escape signs mounted at medium height must be placed as required by the source of danger.
Signs installed at medium heights must primarily be installed on traffic routes and in premises
where no or insignificant smoke build-up can be expected in case of fire, also considering the
objects stored, built-in or placed therein, together with the fixtures and equipment. At least one sign
must always be visible from any point of the escape route in all cases.

(3) Escape signs mounted at low heights must continuously point out the direction of the route,
while safety signs must be recognisable from a distance of 5.0 m.

(4) When installing escape signals, the internal height of the premises must always be taken
into account, together with the smoke-generating capacity of the materials found therein.

XIV.
COMMON RULES OF INSTALLED FIRE ALARM AND
FIRE EXTINGUISHER

76. Obligation to install

Article 154

(1) An installed fire alarm and installed fire extinguisher must be established
a) in the cases listed in the table of Annex 14 or
 85

b) where the fire protection authority specifies with regard to the existing emergency situation,
the nature of the building’s national economy, conservation, or data protection, the safety of the
people residing in the building, the firefighter access distance, and protection of system component.

(2) The conversion, expansion of existing equipment does not have to be approved, if based on
agreement the fire protection authority makes a statement about it in writing; however, the changes
must be carried over in the implementation plan by the designer and the installation process must be
carried out,
a) if the number of automatic sensors, manual call points (MCP) does not decrease or if they
increase by at most a total of 10 pieces in a calendar year and the sensor zone limit does not change,
b) if the number of nozzle heads of the closed nozzle head water extinguisher equipment does
not decrease or if it increases by at most a total of 10 pieces in a calendar year, or
c) if the location or mode of the constant surveillance of the fire alarm or extinguisher control
panel changes.

Article 155

The manufacturer of the equipment, the authorised representative of the manufacturer, importer,
or distributor is required to provide the information required for the use, inspection, review, and
maintenance of the equipment, performance statements and documents for the customer or its
representative.

77. Fire and error transmission signal

Article 156

(1) In addition to ensuring constant surveillance, the fire indication must be forwarded
automatically to the location specified by the first-degree fire protection authority, a location under
surveillance by the Disaster Management Body in case of
a) top-level use building over 30 m,
b) an institution for inpatient care,
c) underground railway tunnel and station.

(2) If the constant surveillance of the installed fire alarm, installed extinguisher equipment
transmitted by automatic of the fire alarm or extinguisher control centre signals to a constant
surveillance location is outside of the facility, it is carried out by remote surveillance; the remote
surveillance is required to forward the fire alarm transmission signal electronically to a location,
specified by the first-degree fire protection authority, and under surveillance by the Disaster
Management Body.

(3) In cases specified in paragraphs (1)–(2), the fire alarm transmission signal must be
implemented through an automatic and managed connection.

78. Compliance, qualification, authorisation

Article 157

The person carrying out the operation — surveillance, management, operator control — must
be trained regarding the information necessary to carry out the activity at the time the equipment is
installed and upon any changes of the fire alarm, and the fact of the training must be recorded in the
operation log of the equipment, or a statement of record must be taken of it.
 86

79. Installation, use

Article 158

(1) During start-up, the engineer starting up the equipment must make certain that the
installation was satisfactorily carried out, that the used processes, materials, and components
comply with the regulations and relevant technical requirements, the requirements set forth in the
authorised or approved protocol documentation, and furthermore that the text and image elements
of the implementation protocol, and operating instructions can be applied to the installed system.

(2) The engineer starting up the equipment must inspect and verify, visually and through
operational tests, that the installed system is functioning correctly.

(3) Only the engineer carrying out the start-up is authorised to start-up the equipment, and issue
a start-up report on the fact of the start-up, its circumstances, and observations.

(4) For the fire alarm, the operational test must include
a) with regard to the fire alarm centre and connecting remote management, remote display units,
printers
aa) that the fire alarm centre regulations are placed in an appropriate location,
ab) whether the fire alarm centre’s operators have Hungarian notations to ensure the correct
identification of the management and fire and error signalling,
ac) the operation of each signal (installed audible warning device, installed light-signalling
device, LCD display) of the fire alarm centre — if needed: remote signalling unit, and
ad) the correctness of the information provided by the fire alarm centre — if needed: remote
display unit — and whether the information meets the requirements,
b) with respect to utility and backup power
ba) the correctness of the operating and emergency power source, and
bb) whether switching to the backup power source takes place automatically, without delay,
after network disconnection,
c) with respect to sensors, manual call points (MCP)
ca) the correctness of the placement of all sensors and manual call point (MCP) device,
cb) all sensors and manual call points (MCP) in such a way that it must undergo an operational
test with the manufacturer-recommended device, equipment, and material,
cc) in case of all loop alarm zones, frequent implementation of error limit,
cd) the existence of identification marks on sensors, manual call points (MCP), correct content
and visibility,
d) with respect to audible warning devices and light-signalling devices
da) the correct placement of all audible warning devices and light-signalling devices,
db) the function inspection of all audible warning devices and light-signalling devices during
operational tests, and
dc) the existence of identification marks on all audible warning devices and light-signalling
devices, correct content and visibility,
e) with respect to automatic fire and error transmission signalling equipment, subsequently
confirming the results with the receiving station
ea) that at least one fire and one error signal is transmitted to the receiving location as planned,
the messages are correct and clear, or
eb) in case of isolated fire signals broken down to several areas, all fire and error signals are
transmitted to the receiving location as planned, the messages are correct and clear, or
 87

f) with respect to controls, connecting devices, operating with unjustified high cost implications
or operating with a loss, by dispensing with starting the extinguisher system or not releasing the
heat and smoke cartridges
fa) transmission of the control signal of the fire alarm centre or control,
fb) normal operation of the controlled structures and equipment, and
fc) in case of delayed controls, the correctness of the reserve power appropriately
corresponding to the delay,
g) with respect to other tools, wires
ga) whether the placement, labelling of the previously not mentioned devices is correct, their
operation guaranteed,
gb) that the track of the wires, the applied cable types comply with the requirements, and
gc) whether the density of the cable transmission at the wall and ceiling opening is correct.

(5) Prior to start-up, the strength and density of the extinguisher equipment’s parts exposed to
pressure must be verified jointly or in segments, with a pressure test.

(6) During operational tests

a) the automatic start-up must be tested by operating the sensors, artificially operating the
control units, and by creating a condition appropriate for the operational status, and
b) the following must be verified separately in each start-up mode
ba) the operation of the alarm in a protected room,
bb) indication of the fact and location of operation, and
bc) operation of controls, if they are not operating by extinguisher or active ingredient pressure.

(7) When analysing permanently installed extinguisher equipment with pump

a) individual start-up tests of the pressure maintaining and pressure booster pump,
b) flowrate measurement on a test wire, endpoint measurements, and
c) in case of a dry system, inspection of the compressor.

Article 159

(1) At the time of use, the equipment must be in a condition ready for operation and inspected,
and must have available
a) the implementation plan of the equipment,
b) the service and maintenance instructions of the equipment,
c) the performance statements, quality certificates, and inspection records of pressure,
mechanical, and electrical tests – and in case of installed extinguishers operating by total flooding
of the room, the extinguisher concentration maintenance time log,
d) the operation log with the names of the controllers and the equipment data, and
e) the statement of the technical director responsible for implementation that the equipment
complies with the plans and based on the operational tests performed is in operable condition.

(2) The contractor must have an implementation plan at the time of use regarding the finished
equipment, and must verify it to the satisfaction of the competent authorities
a) in case of an installed fire alarm
aa) the correctness of the installed elements and materials, the correctness of the materials and
wires, and their performance,
ab) the correctness of the wire network, loop resistance measurement, and the fact that
insulation resistance has occurred.
ac) the occurrence of the equipment’s protection grade overview,
ad) the occurrence of the start-up, performed operational tests, and
ae) training of the operators,
 88

b) in case of installed extinguisher equipment

ba) correctness and performance of installed structural components and materials,
bb) cleaning of the ducts of the equipment, irrigation,
bc) the occurrence of the start-up, performed operational tests,
bd) training of the operators,
be) the occurrence of the local pressure test of the extinguisher equipment, and
bf) the occurrence of the equipment’s protection grade overview.

(3) A copy of the documents listed in paragraph (2) must be given to the fire protection
authority during the authorisation procedure for use.

Article 160

(1) The start-up engineer’s statement contains

a) the statement of the engineer doing the start-up concerning whether the equipment meets
the relevant technical requirements or provides safety of at least equivalent degree, and furthermore,
that it was carried out according to the requirements laid down during the agreement related to its
establishment, and according to the approved authorised protocol documentation that reflects this,
b) determination of the equipment’s suitability for use as intended, and
c) the recommendation for acceptance and use.

(2) The start-up documentation contains

a) the subject of the inspection, including the type of installed equipment and the location of
installation,
b) facts learned during the review of the equipment’s operation,
c) names of people participating in the review and the role they fulfilled during the
installation process,
d) the date and location of the review and preparation of the documentation, and
e) signature of participants taking part in the review.

XV.
RULES REGARDING PERMANENTLY INSTALLED FIRE ALARM

80. General rules of implementation

Article 161

(1) The placement and labelling of components must be carried out according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.

(2) The installed fire alarm must be designed in such a way as to limit the effect of single or
dual failure of the wires and connections.

(3) The trail of the wiring system must be developed in such a way as to make it possible to
limit the effects of physical injury, electromagnetic disturbance, and fire on operation.

(4) In order to identify the fire signals of the installed fire alarm at the constant surveillance
site, a written zone statement must be prepared containing the locations of the sensors, manual call
points (MCP), which must be placed at the constant surveillance site, with the exception of the
remote surveillance centre.
 89

(5) The installed fire alarm components that signal the alarm (audible warning device, light-
signalling device, voice response) must be positioned in a well identifiable location for the people
residing in the room, in the fire compartment, in the building or structure, so that they can signal the
fire alarm in a way that is distinguishable from other signals.

(6) In addition to that which is set forth in paragraph (4), the identification of the location must
be provided with graphic imaging in cases where
a) the floor area of the building supplied with fire alarm exceeds 10 000 m2, or
b) the total number of automatic sensors and manual call points (MCP) established in the
building is more than 1 000.

Article 162

(1) When determining the trail of the wiring, it must be taken into consideration that the heat
created during the fire should not influence the equipment’s basic operation in terms of detection,
fire alarm, control, fire and error signal transmission.

(2) The wires, such as

a) the wires between the fire alarm centre and audible warning devices, light-signalling devices,
and public address system for the evacuation alarm,
b) the wires between the fire alarm centre and any separate power supply,
c) the wires between the fire alarm centre and any remote indication, remote control and
display unit,
d) the wires connecting the separate sections of the fire alarm centre,
e) the wires of the fire alarm controls, except in the event that damage to the control cable
triggers the necessary control,
f) the wires connecting the fire alarm centre and the fire and error transmission signalling
equipment,
g) in cable sections where both directions of the feedback loop may become damaged as a
result of a single random event (fire),
must be fire resistant for at least 30 minutes or protection for such duration must be ensured.

(3) The wires of the controls, with the exception of the controls for the audible warning device,
and the fire and error transmission signal, may be made of cables without fire resistance or
protection, if
a) all controls start the controlled device without delay, and
b) the control wires pass through areas with smoke detectors.

(4) When designing current loop circuits, care should be taken that the two branches of the loop
do not become damaged as a result of a single random event. If this danger is present, either
mechanical protection or sufficient separation of the branches must be implemented.

81. Nature and level of protection

Article 163

(1) The installed fire alarm must be designed according to the nature of the protection related
to its designation, furthermore, it must be designed according to the protection level set forth in this
Decree.
 90

(2) In case of Safety of Life (SoL) and combined protection, if the comprehensive protection
is not provided by regulation or the fire protection authority, at least the protection of the escape
route must be ensured.

(3) Comprehensive protection must be ensured

a) in new buildings, in case of community designation,
b) in an existing community building,
c) where the fire protection authority specifies
ca) in order to protect the people residing in the structure,
cb) with consideration of the firefighter access distance, or
cc) for the protection of vital systems and facilities.

82. Addressability

Article 164

Addressable detectors must be used

a) in risk units of community designation
aa) in case of Very Low Risk category for accommodation of over 20 people,
ab) in case of Low Risk, Medium Risk, High Risk categories, every time,
b) in risk units with industrial, agricultural, and storage designations,
ba) in case of Low Risk category, over 1 000 m2,
bb) in case of Medium Risk, High Risk categories, every time,
c) in cases not mentioned in Point a), if a zone provides protection for 5 or more rooms, and
light-signalling devices (secondary displays) are not used,
d) in case of equipment established due to the increase of the evacuation duration or fire
compartment dimension, or limited nature of the access area,
e) where the fire protection authority specifies, in the interest of quick identification of the
existing emergency situation, with consideration of the safety of the people residing in the structure,
and the intervention ability of the firefighters, and in the interest of quick identification of the
location of the fire.

XVI.
RULES REGARDING INSTALLED FIRE EXTINGUISHER

Article 165

(1) If the applicability of the installed fire extinguisher is not regulated by harmonised technical
instructions, national technical assessment or technical requirements, its applicability must be
verified by a fire test.

(2) In case of a closed nozzle water extinguisher equipment, it is not necessary to establish an
installed fire extinguisher at building levels below the protected space, if the protected level’s inter-
floor slab is designed with fire resistance.

83. Labels, information, safety standards

Article 166

(1) In a space protected by an installed fire extinguisher or in the vicinity of it, with the
exception of equipment using sprinkler and water mist, the following must be displayed:
 91

a) manual starting and blocking options, if these were developed,

b) name and physiological effect of extinguisher substance,
c) the delay time, if there is a delay,
d) requirements and method of leaving the building, if needed,
e) actions to be taken during and after the extinguishing in connection with the extinguisher
equipment, and
f) the normal condition (open or closed) of the main shut-off fittings.

(2) In case a fire extinguisher that uses concentrations of extinguisher or fuel substances that
reach or exceed known adverse health effects, designed to flood the entire airspace, is installed in a
space or area that is accessed by people,
a) an alarm system must be established that sounds a warning alarm prior to the triggering of
the extinguisher equipment, also taking into consideration the evacuation period specified by law,
except if entry is only possible when the extinguisher equipment is turned off, and
b) a suitable blocking structure or switch must be installed to prevent the outflow of the
extinguisher substance.

(3) The safety solutions set forth in paragraph (2) must be used also if the permitted limit
concentration of the adverse health effect is not determined.

XVII.
REQUIREMENTS FOR THE STORAGE AND DOSAGE OF
FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS AND GASES

84. General requirements

Article 167

(1) Fire hazard classification of flammable liquids and melts must be determined according to
the relevant technical requirements.

(2) Containers and fittings that store flammable liquids and melts at atmospheric pressure must
comply with the relevant operating and environmental conditions, and must be resistant to the
effects of the stored substances.

(3) The containers must be designed in such a way that the internal pressure changes resulting
from the ambient temperature fluctuations do not endanger the stability of the container.

(4) If this section contains instructions that differ from the instructions for liquids with fire
hazard classes I-II, and III-IV, and if, as a result of environmental effects or heating, the
temperature of the liquid belonging to the milder fire hazard class may reach its flash point, then the
technical requirements corresponding to the more dangerous fire hazard class must be applied.

(5) If liquids with different fire hazard classes are stored together, and the fumes of the more
hazardous substance may enter the storage area of the milder hazard class liquid, then the safety
fittings must be designed according to the more dangerous substance.

(6) If the container used for storing the flammable liquids and melts, and its fittings must be
insulated, the insulation must be fire classification A1 or A2.
 92

85. Placement and clearance distances

Article 168

(1) In case of containers used for the storage of flammable liquids and melts, the measurement
of placement distances should take place from the horizontal projection of the container. If the
distance is to be determined based on the container’s diameter, in case of different diameter
containers, the larger container’s diameter should be applied.

(2) The clearance distances of the storage site used for the storage of flammable liquids and
melts, measured from other facilities, structures not belonging to the storage site, are listed in
Table 1 of Annex 15.

86. Refuelling station

Article 169

(1) The minimum allowed clearance distances of the refuelling station’s structures and adjacent
structures, which do not belong to the refuelling station, are listed in Table 2 of Annex 15, and the
minimum allowed placement distances are listed in Table 3 of Annex 15.

(2) The distances determined in Table 3 of Annex 15 may be reduced according to the
following:
a) the distances listed in columns B and C in the 2nd row of the Table may be reduced by up
to 1 m, if a protective wall with A1 fire classification is established between the structure and the
equipment, exceeding the dimensions of the equipment in all directions by at least 0.5 m,
b) the distances listed in columns B and C in the 3rd row of the Table may be reduced by up
to 1 m, if a protective wall with fire classification A1 and fire resistance performance of EI 90 is
established between the structure and the equipment dispensing the liquid of fire hazard class III-IV,
exceeding the dimensions of the equipment in all directions by at least 0.5 m,
c) the distances listed in columns B and C in the 3rd row of the Table may be reduced by up
to 1 m, if a protective wall with A1 fire classification is established between the structure and the
equipment dispensing the liquid of fire hazard class I-II, exceeding the dimensions of the equipment
in all directions by at least 0.5 m.

(3) When installing a tank dispenser, the setting controls required for dispensing can also be
placed outside of the tank room.

Article 170

(1) Refuelling stations can be established under buildings with the exception of buildings used
for containing crowds or buildings in High Risk category. The refuelling station can only be
established at the ground connection level.

(2) Self-service refuelling station cannot be established under a building.

(3) A fireproof slab must be constructed under the buildings, under and above the refuelling
station area established at the ground connection level. If a suspended ceiling is being constructed,
the material of the suspended ceiling must be fire classification A1.

Article 171
 93

(1) Flammable liquids with fire hazard classes I-II can be stored at the refuelling station in the
following way:
a) in underground or earth-covered steel or plastic double-walled, single or multiple
compartmented, horizontal cylindrical tanks, or
b) in aboveground tank dispensers, up to a quantity of 10 000 L.

(2) Flammable liquids up to fire hazard class III can be stored at the refuelling station in the
following ways:
a) in underground or earth-covered steel or plastic double-walled, single or multiple
compartmented, horizontal cylindrical tanks, or
b) in aboveground tank dispensers, up to a quantity of 30 000 L.

(3) At plant refuelling stations, the fuel can also be stored in aboveground double-walled tanks,
in the amounts relevant to tank dispensers.

Article 172

(1) Liquids of fire hazard classes I-II can also be stored together with liquids of fire hazard
class III, in compartmentalised double-walled, underground, earth-covered tanks or containers,
which are also supplied with puncture warning and electronic level indicator equipment, in such a
way that the total quantity of the stored liquid
a) cannot exceed 60 000 L in case of underground, earth-covered containers, of which liquids
with fire hazard class I-II cannot exceed 30 000 L,
b) cannot exceed 30 000 L in case of tank dispensers, of which liquids with fire hazard class I-
II cannot exceed 10 000 L.

(2) Refuelling equipment with up to three separate tank dispensers or aboveground tanks can be
placed next to each other.

(3) At plant refuelling stations — if environmental protection regulations do not allow

establishing equipment with an underground tank, or if the technology warrants — in case of liquids
with fire hazard class III, a single aboveground horizontal cylindrical tank with up to 100 m3
capacity, used exclusively for the storage of fuel, can be placed, which is double-walled, and
supplied with puncture warning and electronic level indicator equipment.

(4) The distance between the storage tank mentioned in paragraph (3) and the refuelling
equipment cannot be less than 15 m. A dispenser cannot be directly attached to the storage tank;
fuel cannot be directly dispensed from the tank. The storage tank and the connections to the
refuelling station must be designed in such a way that it is protected in case of a motor vehicle
collision or other external damage.

(5) The potentially spilled flammable liquid must be able to be removed from the roadway in
front of the filling location, and must be introduced in the oil traps.

(6) In case of fuel belonging to fire hazard class I-II, only refuelling equipment certified
according to the relevant provisions, and deemed appropriate by the explosion safety inspection,
can be used.

(7) The container of the tank dispenser, used to dispense liquids of fire hazard class I-II, are
designed with a double wall.
 94

(8) The tank dispenser, used to dispense liquids of fire hazard class I-II, is considered a
flammable and explosive device, machine, or equipment.

Article 173

(1) The fire water supply of refuelling stations is established based on the standard fire
compartment.

(2) The floor area of the standard fire compartment consists of the largest fire compartment of
the closed buildings at the refuelling station, and the combined floor area of the spaces taken up by
stored substances in the open-air, cabinets, or containers and the area used for the refuelling of
motor vehicles. The area of filling columns and underground tanks do not need to be considered as
standard fire compartment, or when calculating the extinguisher water intensity.

Article 174

(1) Only category “1” LPG gas exchange site can be installed on the area of the refuelling
station.

(2) The storage site must be open and well ventilated from at least three sides. Its platform and
floor are level, protruding at least 0.1 m from the level of the refuelling station’s pavement, which
must not cause electrostatic charge, or transmit a spark, and must be made of a material of fire
classification A1-A2.

(3) The clearance distances of the storage site are listed in Table 2 of Annex 15, and the
placement distances are listed in Table 3 of Annex 15.

87. Fire protection requirements of LPG gas exchange sites

Article 175

(1) Based on the quantity of storable LPG, the following exchange sites can be established:
a) Category “1”: at most 1 150 kg, and at refuelling station at most 1 800 kg LPG,
b) Category “2”: 1 151–3 000 kg LPG,
c) Category “3”: 3 001–8 000 kg LPG,
d) Category “4”: 8 001–50 000 kg LPG, or
e) “over category”: over 50 000 kg of LPG.

(2) The installation distances of the exchange site are listed in Table 4 of Annex 15.

(3) Category “1” exchange site can also be installed next to the wall of a building — with the
exception of a building of High Risk and Medium Risk categories — if more than 50 people do not
normally reside in it simultaneously, and the building wall is a firewall, or there are no closing
devices on the building wall horizontally within 5 m of the storage unit, or vertically up to the entire
height of the building. The horizontal distance specified may be reduced to 2 m if there is a
deflector wall of rated at least A2 REI 90 constructed between the storage unit and the closing
device. The deflector wall is equal in dimensions to the height and width of the storage unit. If the
building has only one exit or if there is a closing device on the fire wall, the 5 m distance must be
maintained.

(4) If the exchange site is located in a building,

 95

a) the building structures bordering the exchange site cannot have chimneys, smoke and
sewage systems, their openings, or gas pipeline installed,
b) the closing devices of the exchange site facility can be constructed only from materials of
A1-A2 fire class,
c) the door of the exchange site facility must open outward and must be at least 0.8 m wide, and
d) at least 1, minimum 0.15 m2 sized opening, providing ventilation, must be established at the
floor line for each started 20 m2 floor area in the exchange site facility.

(5) The building used for the location of the exchange site is classified as High Risk.

(6) The material of the tank storage cage is of A1 or A2 fire classification.

(7) The gas cylinders in the tank storage cage can be stored, at the most, on two levels.

(8) A clearance distance of at least 3 m must be maintained around exchange sites of categories
“1” and “2” and at least 5 m for higher categories. No activity or storage that is not directly related
to the technology can be carried out within the clearance distance. The clearance distance may be
reduced if a protective wall of fire classification A1 and fire resistance performance of EI 90 is
constructed, exceeding the dimensions of the storage unit by 0.5 m in all directions.

XVIII.
RULES OF USE

Article 176

This chapter establishes the fire protection regulations concerning the use of installations,
structures, machines, equipment, devices, materials, with the exception of explosive and blasting
materials, and the application of technologies.

88. General fire protection rules regarding use

Article 177

(1) The Fire Protection Technical Compliance Manual must be kept within the area of the
facility or building by the operator, or in case of a building complex, by the joint representation.

(2) The structure, partial structure, building of mixed designation, and outdoor area can only be
used according to the fire protection requirements for the designation determined in the usage,
operating and site licence.

(3) Production, use, storage, distribution, and other activities (hereinafter “activities”) can only
be carried out in an outdoor area, facility, fire compartment, unit of designation, and structure in
compliance with the fire protection requirements.

(4) Only materials and devices necessary for the activity carried out at the location can be
stored at the facility, structure and outdoor area.

(5) Storage activity cannot be carried out within fire safety distance. This area must be kept free
of waste and dry undergrowth.
 96

(6) Materials created during the activity and classified as flammable and explosive must be
removed from the facility, outdoor area, machine, equipment, apparatus, or device continually, or at
least at every shift, and after the activity is concluded.

(7) Waste contaminated by liquids or grease, classified as fire hazard class I-II, must be
collected in a non-flammable container of non-flammable material, and afterwards stored in an area
designated for this purpose.

Article 178

(1) The dripping and draining of liquids of fire hazard class I-II, and the leakage of gas, must be
prevented at the piping systems and containers carrying liquids of fire hazard class I-II, explosive
and flammable, oxidising gases, as well as at every machine, equipment and device. Any spilled or
leaked out substances must be soaked up immediately, the space must be ventilated, and the
absorbed substances must be stored in an area designated for this purpose.

(2) Incidental dripping of liquids of fire hazard class I-II must be caught into pans made of non-
flammable materials. The drip pan must be emptied as needed, but at least at the end of each shift,
and must be stored in an area designated for this purpose.

(3) Liquids of fire hazard class I-II can be occasionally used outdoors or in effectively
ventilated spaces, where there is no simultaneous ignition source.

Article 179

(1) Oily, greasy work clothes or protective clothes can only be stored in metal cabinets, except
for changing room type systems.

(2) At the workplace, the person performing the work must verify, during and after completion
of the activity, that the fire protection rules are followed, and irregularities must be eliminated.

(3) The safety symbol containing the warnings and prohibitions regarding fire and explosion
hazards and related standards must be displayed at the entrance of the facility, or if necessary at the
entrance of the building or establishment, in a well visible location.

(4) The opening and closing device of the public utility, and its open and closed condition must
be clearly indicated.

(5) If a material that is classified as explosive is present in the facility in an explosive condition,
clothing, footwear, or equipment, which may pose an ignition threat, cannot be used.

(6) Extinguisher water sources must be labelled with signs according to the relevant technical
requirement.

(7) An unobstructed approach to the fire water sources and wall fire hydrants must be ensured.

(8) The ability to access the façade escape locations, established according to Article 67(1),
must be ensured for those residing at each level and fire compartment.

(9) The location of the closing devices used for rescue must be labelled in a well visible and
permanent way on the façade, with the exception of residential buildings, and inside the building at
the entrance of the room or groups of rooms used for rescue, which contains the closing device.
 97

Article 180

(1) In places where the law requires the use of an automatic closing device, the door must be
kept closed. If this is not possible due to operating reasons, or if the material classified as explosive
is present in an explosive state, then continuous supervision must be provided at the location during
business hours, or it must be ensured that the door closes when the fire alarm signals.

(2) The doors of workplaces and community buildings under operation, which are expected to
be used for the evacuation of people residing in the rooms, must not be closed. If the nature of the
work requires that the doors remain closed, the ability to open the doors from the outside in case of
danger must be ensured in the manner specified by the fire protection authority. The ability to open
the door from inside can only be disregarded if the regulations exclude it.

89. Rules of use of special structures

Article 181

(1) Materials classified as potentially explosive must not be stored in the area of underground
railways, except those that are necessary for continuous maintenance and operation, but at the most
30 kg or 30 L may be stored in a single station, in a storage unit offering appropriate protection.

(2) Exits constructed during the establishment of existing underground railways must be kept
open during operation.

(3) Businesses and stores at the stations of aboveground railways can only place their products,
advertising media, equipment and furniture related to their services inside their premises.

(4) The sale, storage, use, and distribution of potentially explosive materials is prohibited in
businesses and stores located at existing stations of aboveground railways.

(5) Opening of the wall fire hydrant doors in the area of the platform, passenger compartment
of the aboveground railway can only be done after the circuit providing power to the train is de-
energised.

Article 182

(1) Canopy structures cannot be used for

a) storage, distribution, sale of potentially explosive materials,
b) for prolonged accommodation of people limited in escape, and
c) in cases where the law prohibits.

(2) The operator of the canopy structure and the organiser of the event is required to comply
and enforce the specifications regarding maximum number of people residing in the structure.
People supervising entry must have information of the number of people residing in the structure at
the entry of the structure. The supervising person can be replaced with an entry system used for this
purpose, if it automatically ensures escape in case of an emergency.

(3) No structures, equipment, nor materials hindering evacuation may be placed in front of the
exit of the canopy structure, in the outdoor area, corresponding in dimensions to the width of the
exit, but in a section of at least 3 m, and at a minimum of 10 m distance from the exit.
 98

(4) In canopy structures with rows of seats, the number of seats that can be accessed from a
single direction may not exceed 20, and the number of sears that can be accessed from two
directions cannot exceed 40. In rows with more than 10 chairs, the chairs must be attached to one
another through the entire length of the row. In rows with more than 20 chairs, the chairs must be
attached to one another and to the floor, ground. The rows of seats must be placed at least 1 m away
from one another. The width of the routes intended for evacuation cannot be less than 1.6 m.

(5) The provisions in paragraphs (2)–(4) apply to canopy structures with floor area greater than
500 m2 with community designation or canopy structures used for containment of crowds.

(6) Mechanical equipment can only be installed in canopy structures, and heating equipment
can only be used if it does not pose a fire hazard to the immediate environment.

Article 183

Establishing storage areas, dwelling places under scaffold-like structures is prohibited.

90. Flammable activity

Article 184

(1) Flammable activities are prohibited in places where it may cause a fire or an explosion.

(2) Flammable activities of a permanent nature can only be carried out in locations suitable for
this purpose, in compliance with fire protection requirements.

(3) Occasional flammable activities, with the exception of those listed under paragraph (5), can
be carried out based on the criteria determined in advance in writing, with the knowledge of the
characteristics of the site. Determination of the criteria is the responsibility of the person directly
giving instructions to perform the work, and directly supervising the activity of the persons
performing the work; if there is no such person, it is the responsibility of the person performing the
work.

(4) The person directly managing the work is responsible for verifying that the persons
performing the work possess a fire safety certificate, and that it is valid, if it is required for
performing the activity. In case this is missing, the instruction to perform the work cannot be given.

(5) If the private person performing the occasional flammable activity performs it at his/her
own establishment, building, or outdoor area, the determination of the criteria in writing is not
necessary.

(6) The criteria for flammable activities performed by an outside organisation or person, must
be confirmed with the manager or representative of the establishment where the activity will take
place, who will supplement this as needed with fire protection regulations appropriate for the
characteristics of the location.

(7) The criteria for the occasional flammable activity must include the date, location,
description of the activity, the name of the person doing the work, and the certificate number in case
of a position requiring a fire safety certificate, as well as the relevant fire protection rules and
regulations.
 99

Article 185

(1) Potentially flammable activities requiring an exam specified by law can only be carried out
by a person with a valid fire safety certificate; other potentially flammable activities can be carried
out with persons trained in fire safety rules and regulations.

(2) Potentially flammable activities performed in a flammable environment must be monitored,

from the beginning of the work until its completion, by the person directly giving instructions to
perform the work, and directly supervising the activity of the persons performing the work; if there
is no such person, monitoring must be ensured by the person doing the work, if needed, with the use
of instrumental monitoring.

(3) The person directly giving instructions to perform the work, and directly supervising the
activity of the persons performing the work, or if there is no such person, the person performing the
work, or a private person performing the activity according to Article 184(5), is responsible to
provide appropriate firefighter outfits, fire extinguisher for extinguishing the fire during the
potentially flammable activity.

(4) After the completion of the potentially flammable activity, the persons performing the work
must inspect the site and its surrounding area in terms of fire safety aspects, and eliminate all
circumstances that may cause fire. The person directly giving instructions to perform the work and
directly supervising the activity of the persons performing the work, or if there is no such person,
the person performing the work must present the worksite to the manager or representative of the
establishment where the activity takes place. The presentation/receiving date must be displayed on
the licence and verified by signature.

Article 186

A flying structure operating on the basis of an open flame driving warm air up, with the
exception of a hot air balloon and thermal airship, cannot be operated.

91. Smoking

Article 187

(1) Burning tobacco products, matches, and other ignition sources are prohibited from being
placed or discarded in locations where they may cause fire or explosion.

(2) Smoking is not permitted in facilities or outdoor areas where materials classified as
potentially explosive are being produced, stored, or processed. Smoking prohibition must be
indicated with a safety symbol.

(3) An ignition device or ignition source can only be taken into a facility or outdoor area used
for the production, processing, or storage of materials classified as potentially explosive based on
the criteria determined in writing, qualifying for the potentially flammable activity.

92. Transport and towing

Article 188
 100

(1) The regulations of this chapter are only applicable in case of transporting products if the fire
safety regulations of international conventions on the transport of hazardous products do not
provide otherwise.

(2) In places where the material classified as potentially explosive occurs in an explosive state,
only vehicles qualified for potentially explosive areas can be used, where fire or explosion cannot
occur if the safety regulations are followed and used as intended.

(3) Locomotives may not come within less than 50 m of an outdoor storage area containing
materials classified as potentially explosive, and technological equipment processing materials
classified as potentially explosive, as specified in the relevant technical requirements, in cases not
regulated therein. The approach limit must be marked prominently.

(4) Smoking or the use of an open flame is prohibited on vehicles transporting materials
classified as potentially explosive, and on the loading platform of vehicles transporting materials
classified as potentially explosive.

(5) Cargo classified as potentially explosive and flammable must be protected from dangerous
levels of warming, and other dangers that may cause fire or explosion.

Article 189

(1) Liquids of fire hazard class I-II, gases classified as potentially explosive and flammable,
and combustion gases can only be transported in tightly closable or closed vessels in perfect
condition, in compliance with international or other fire safety regulations, or in containers, tanks,
and the type of tankers authorised for this purpose.

(2) Closed vessels containing liquids of fire hazard class I-II must be placed and attached onto
the vehicle with its opening facing upwards in such a way as to not move or be damaged during
transport.

(3) The tanker and truck transporting liquids of fire hazard class I-II, gases classified as
potentially explosive and flammable, and combustion gases must display a sign or safety symbol
indicating hazard, on both sides and on the rear. In case of an international agreement concerning
the transport of hazardous goods, or in case of vehicles, trailers transporting materials subject to
technical requirements, this sign or safety symbol can be dispensed with.

(4) Closed vessels containing liquids classified as potentially explosive and flammable, with
nominal capacity of not more than 25 L, are permitted to be transported placed on vehicles up to the
height of the platform side wall with adequate row separation, in multiple rows above one another,
or in closed containers. Closed vessels containing liquids of fire hazard class I-II, of nominal
capacity of over 25 L can only be placed in a single row.

(5) No other person but the driver and the co-driver of the vehicle can stay on vehicles
transporting substances classified as potentially explosive and flammable.

93. Rules of storage

Article 190

(1) Substances classified as potentially explosive or flammable can only be stored in facilities,
structures, and outdoor areas if they are necessary for the continuous activity conducted there. The
 101

quantity of the substance, product stored in the structure may not exceed the substance quantity
calculated as the basis at the time of the design.

(2) All types of storage are prohibited in a fireproof foyer, smokeless stairway and foyer.

(3) Substances classified as potentially explosive can only be stored in sealed packaging
according to the relevant requirements for flammable materials, if they were not placed on the
market in a pressure container.

(4) Substances liable to spontaneous combustion or substances that may develop heat, fire or an
explosion when interacting with one another cannot be stored in a single unit with other potentially
explosive and flammable substances. The temperature of substances liable to spontaneous
combustion must be continually monitored, if the properties of the substance necessitate, and
dangerous heating must be prevented.

(5) The storage area must be kept free of flammable waste and dry vegetation.

(6) In case of warehousing or storage in an industrial, agricultural, or storage facility

a) at least 1 m distance must be provided between the slab or roof structure of an over 200 m2
storage area and the stored material,
b) the storage height of the material stored in the facility cannot exceed the lower plane of the
smoke barrier, unless a different storage was authorised at establishment or if a different storage can
be verified by calculations,
c) a distance of 1 m must be maintained between the stored material and the vertical plane of
the smoke barrier.

94. Storage specifications of materials classified as potentially explosive

Article 191

(1) Materials classified as potentially explosive, of fire hazard class I-II, can only be packaged
according to the specifications of the regulation, or in the absence of this, at outdoor areas or in
places where there is no ignition source and effective ventilation is provided.

(2) Materials classified as potentially explosive, and liquids of fire hazard class I-III can only
be stored, transported, and marketed in closed packaging, in a vessel.

(3) Materials classified as potentially explosive, and liquids of fire hazard class I-III, must
display the susceptibility of the material to explosion or violent burning with text or pictogram on
the individual or multipack packaging, except in cases where the law specifies otherwise. The
labelling must be completed by the manufacturer or packer, the packager or distributor, and in case
of a material received for use directly from abroad, in case of liquids of fire hazard class I-II, the
user organisation.

(4) Materials classified as potentially explosive cannot be stored in attic or basement level
facilities, or in other facilities not designed for storage, in case of over a quantity of 300 L or 300 kg.

(5) Materials classified as potentially explosive and liquid and gas of fire hazard class I-III
cannot be stored in attic spaces. Other solid materials may only be stored, in the manner and in the
quality, in a way so as to not prohibit access to the roof structure and the chimney, and must be able
to be removed, if needed, from the combustible material elements of the roof structure, and must be
positioned at least 1 m away from the chimney.
 102

(6) Gas tanks are prohibited from being stored in facilities used for prolonged stay and in
vehicle storage locations.

(7) In a multi-storey residential building, more than one propane-butane gas tank cannot be
used or stored, with the exception of residential buildings consisting of a single unit.

(8) Use and storage of a gas tank is prohibited in a structure higher than a single storey, where a
potential gas explosion may lead to the collapse of the supporting structure.

Article 192

Propane-butane gas tanks can be distributed in a maximum quantity of 20 kg in the

performance area of buildings with commercial designation and separate units of designation,
located aboveground level.

95. Firefighting road, area, and other roads

Article 193

(1) In facility rooms and warehouses, with the exception of bulk storage, road of at least the
following width must be provided:
a) in areas wider than 40 m, a transverse road of 3 m wide, coursing in the middle or
bilaterally, and in areas wider than 80 m every 40 m, coursing longitudinally in a straight line, and
in both cases 1.8 m wide every 30 m,
b) in areas not wider than 40 m, but wider than 15 m, a transverse road of 2.40 m wide
longitudinally, and 1.8 m wide every 30 m,
c) in areas 10–15 m wide, a 1.2 m wide longitudinal road, and in areas not wider than 10 m, a
1 m wide longitudinal road,
d) when warehousing/storing combustible materials in an enclosed space, up to a storage
height of 5 m, a 1.8 m wide road, and in case of a higher storage height, a 3 m wide longitudinal
road, and 1 m wide road transversely every 25 m,
e) in refrigerated spaces of cold stores, and in case of scaffolding or pallet warehousing, if the
width specified in Points a)–d) cannot be provided, a road width according to the technology,
confirmed by the fire protection authority.

(2) The facility’s transportation, fire access routes, areas, and roads used to access water source
must be kept continually free and in a condition that is suitable for the traffic and operation of
firefighting vehicles.

(3) Access in the facility, room, or outdoor area to the electrical equipment switch, the public
utility opening and closing device, the fire alarm’s manual call point, the booster pump, and the
control device and openings of the heat and smoke extraction equipment, furthermore, access to the
fire protection equipment and device must be continually ensured; these are prohibited from being
blocked even temporarily.

(4) Perimeters of roads of 2.4 m and wider must be prominently marked in facilities and storage
locations, with the exception of a location of a floor area of less than 400 m2 and in case of scaffold
storage. Roads bordered by a wall, installed production lines, and equipment are not required to be
marked.
 103

(5) Closing devices intended for evacuation and escape must not be closed while there are
occupants in a building, with the exception of spaces for the containment of up to 50 people and
qualified closing devices.

Article 194

(1) Materials classified as potentially explosive and flammable cannot be stored in the corridors
and stairways of buildings intended for escape. Exceptions to this are safety symbols, as well as
installations, decorations, carpets, tapestries, and other objects not used for storage, which cover at
most 15 % of the wall or floor surface where they are placed.

(2) Materials classified as potentially explosive cannot be placed in a stairway.

(3) Installations, decorations, and materials placed in corridors, non-smokeless stairways and
basement level locations intended for escape may not worsen the effectiveness of heat and smoke
extraction.

(4) In locations used for containing crowds or holding musical, or dance events according to
relevant laws, decoration materials effectively treated with flame retardant agents, or curtains
consistent with class 1 according to relevant technical requirements, confirmed by an accredited
laboratory, may be used.

(5) The escape routes of buildings cannot be restricted.

96. Combustion appliances, heating appliances

Article 195

(1) In the facility, location only heating systems that do not cause fire or explosion during
normal operation can be established and used.

(2) In locations where materials classified as potentially explosive are stored, produced, used,
or distributed, a unit operating with an open flame, glow, or dangerous warming, cannot be placed,
with the exception of the technological equipment required for the activity. In case of establishing a
technological combustion appliance, the possibility of fire or explosion must be prevented with the
appropriate safety device.

(3) During the operation of a combustion appliance or heating appliance operated with gas
classified as potentially flammable, or liquid of fire hazard class I-II, monitoring according to the
specified management class must be ensured.

(4) At the worksite, after completion of the work, firing should cease in gas and oil fuel
equipment where the fire is not supplied continually, and the fire must be put out in iron stoves and
the ash must be removed. Firing must be ceased 2 hours prior to the completion of work in case of
tile stoves, and the stove door must be closed upon leaving the premises. Before leaving the
worksite, the harmlessness of the heating appliance must be made certain.

(5) Slag and ash can only be poured out in fully cooled down condition, into a vessel used for
this purpose, into a designated slag storage or other designated location.

(6) A distance of such degree must be maintained between the combustion appliance, heating
appliance and the flue outlet and between the flammable material in its vicinity, or insulation of
 104

such kind must be used, that the temperature measured at the surface of the flammable material
does not constitute an ignition hazard to the flammable material, even with maximum heat load
operation.

97. Ventilation

Article 196

(1) Any activity during which potential for explosion may develop can only be performed with
effective ventilation.

(2) Ventilation units must be cleaned according to the frequency established by the
manufacturer during the presence of material classified as potentially explosive, or where deposit of
the potentially explosive or flammable material is likely.

(3) Blocking the openings of the ventilation system is prohibited.

(4) The heat and smoke extraction system may be used for general-purpose ventilation, if the
appearance, deposit, or precipitation of flammable material in the heat and smoke extraction system
is not expected.

(5) The central ventilation unit of a residential building with maximum use level of over 14 m,
and restaurant kitchen ventilation system (exhaust fan) must be cleaned according to the frequency
specified by the manufacturer, or in its absence, every 3 years in a residential building, and every
six months in case of restaurant designation, and the completion of the work must be verified in
writing.

98. Heat and smoke extraction

Article 197

(1) Free movement of closing devices of natural and mechanical smoke extraction, air supply,
or smoke removal openings must be continually ensured, and blocking of these openings is
prohibited. A well visible, legible-sized warning sign must be placed on the closing device or next
to the opening.

(2) Installations, decorations, materials must not reduce the surface of the opening required for
air supply, and must not limit the movement and operation of the heat and smoke protection
equipment.

(3) The signs listed in paragraph (1), as well as the signs for the controls used for the operation
of the heat and smoke extraction system, smoke removal devices, must be placed in a foreign
language as well, in addition to the Hungarian, if warranted by the language proficiency of the users
of the structure, or partial structure.

99. Sewage system

Article 198

(1) Gases, steam classified as explosive and flammable, or liquids classified as fire hazard class
I-II, and waste water containing such materials in dissolved state, as well as substances, which in
 105

contact with water, emit flammable gases, must not be drained to a public sewer or introduced into
a desiccator.

(2) In facilities where the wastewater and stormwater may contain liquids of fire hazard class I-
II, the sewer system must be broken into segments by deluge, to protect against implosion, while
ensuring uninterrupted operation.

100. Mechanical equipment

Article 199

(1) Only engines and machinery not constituting an ignition hazard in case of normal operation
can be installed and used.

(2) In an explosion danger zone only explosion-proof engines and machinery can be installed
and used.

(3) In basement level locations, spaces, where potentially explosive or flammable gas or steam
of over 0.8 relative density may be present, only machinery and equipment that does not constitute a
fire and explosion hazard to the environment may be installed.

(4) Machines where the increase of heat or pressure may trigger fire or an explosion, in
addition to the technology controlling equipment, such a limiting device must be used, which
terminates the operation of the machine and further rise of temperature or pressure when the safety
threshold specified in the technological instructions is reached.

(5) If a foreign substance entering the machine may cause fire or an explosion, prevention of
the entry of the foreign substance must be ensured.

(6) In case of rotary, frictional machine parts and axes, fire risk to the equipment due to
warming must be prevented.

(7) In case of potentially flammable machines, the manufacturer, and in case of a foreign
product, the distributor must supply technological and handling instructions with the machines.

101. Electrical equipment

Article 200

(1) Only electrical equipment, which does not constitute an ignition hazard to its environment
in case of normal use, can be used.

(2) Electrical equipment, apparatus and other devices must be powered off after the job is
completed. This rule does not apply to equipment designed to function continually due to its
designation. In terms of this sub-heading, a state of readiness of electronic, IT, and similar
equipment is considered to be a powered off condition.

(3) In case of decommissioning electrical equipment, apparatus and other devices, they must be
disconnected from the electrical power system.
 106

(4) In case of conversion, renovation, reconstruction of the building, and temporary or

permanent cessation of use of the exiting roadways, false alarm signals must be discontinued. If the
safety sign carries information even in powered off condition, it should not be visible.

102. Installed fire alarm and installed extinguisher system, fire extinguisher, firefighter outfit

Article 201

(1) The owner of the building must maintain the installed fire alarm, fire extinguisher, spread of
fire prevention device, firefighter key safe, in a continually operating condition.

(2) The owner of the building must ensure, in terms of the radio communications system used
in the structures during damage control by the collaborating organisations, that indoor handheld
radio coverage is provided, i.e. that the required conditions for the continual operation of the
handheld radio equipment is provided.

Article 202

(1) The fire department phone number or single emergency number must be displayed in a well
visible way next to the public telephone handsets, and at the telephone subcentres — in the absence
of this, next to the main line telephone sets in each facility.

(2) The operator shall continually ensure the constant surveillance of the installed fire alarm
and installed fire extinguishing equipment
a) through the presence of a trained person in the room where the signal display device of the
fire alarm or extinguisher control centre is located,
b) through automatic transmission of the signals of the fire alarm or extinguisher control centre
to a constant surveillance location established within the facility, or
c) through automatic transmission of the signals of the fire alarm or extinguisher centre to a
constant surveillance location established outside the facility (remote surveillance).

(3) Surveillance of the equipment shall be carried out by at least two people simultaneously if,
in addition to the surveillance of the signal display device, they must manage other duties that
require them to leave the room. One of the two people must remain continually in the room where
the signal display device is located.

(4) During the operation of the equipment, the following must be ensured:
a) operable condition of the equipment,
b) continual surveillance, reception of signals (fire, error)
c) completion of the operator audit,
d) performance of surveillance and maintenance,
e) repair, cleaning, replacement to restore or maintain operability, and
f) documentation required for operation.

(5) Scheduled, partial or full shutdown of the equipment, including the fire and error
transmission signal, must be indicated in writing at least 5 days before the shutdown, and failure
that cannot be avoided must be indicated within 24 hours by telephone at a location specified by the
first-degree fire protection authority.

(6) The operator must ensure that the safety conditions are maintained according to local
hazards during the scheduled shutdown or failure of the equipment.
 107

(7) In case of failure of the transmission signal that triggers the local surveillance, surveillance
of the equipment must be provided without delay.

(8) In order to avoid false alarms due to an effect that is similar to the characteristics of fire,
bypassing the sensor, zone or zones for the duration of the effect is possible if
a) the bypassed sensor or zone limits only the operation of the automatic sensors in the room
with the effect causing the false alarm,
b) the bypassed sensor, zone does not limit the operation of the manual call points in the room
with the effect causing the false alarm,
c) the circumstances of bypassing the zone have been confirmed by the specialist that knows
the technical design of the equipment, in a way that it does not violate the rights and requirements
related to the establishment, maintenance, and surveillance, and
d) the circumstances of bypassing and reinstituting the sensor and zone, its area of
responsibility, and compensatory measures are recorded in the Fire Safety Regulations.

Article 203

(1) The fire and error transmission receiving centre must be continually maintained in running
order, and trained personnel must be provided for its control.

(2) In the fire and error transmission receiving centre, the following must be kept in an
accessible location:
a) certificate or copy of performance statement verifying that the fire and error signal
transmission system is compliant,
b) intervention instructions and plans in the event of a failure of the fire and error alarm,
c) list of names of people trained to operate the fire and error transmission receiving centre.

(3) The fire and error transmission receiving centre must maintain a record of
a) the address, name, and designation of the facility signalling the fire alarm,
b) the number of levels — aboveground and underground — of the building housing the
facility that is signalling the fire alarm,
c) circumstances that make extinguishing the fire difficult, in particular, gas tanks, combustible
liquid, isotope,
d) the locations of public utility shut-off valves — particularly gas, water, power, district
heating,
e) the locations of external fire extinguisher water sources (fire hydrant, tank, pool),
f) circumstances that aid the firefighting, such as starting and stopping heat and smoke
extraction, installed extinguisher equipment, central location of the fire department intervention,
and
g) name and telephone number of contact person.

(4) The service contract between the owner, operator, manager or user of the facility, and the
operator of the remote surveillance centre shall contain the number of acceptable events occurring
due to false alarm — such as evacuation, or call-back from an evacuation — and the costs resulting
from events over this number, as well as the responsibility and method of reimbursement.

(5) If the remote surveillance or first-degree fire protection authority changes the location of the
fire alarm transmission centre, the automatic fire transmission signal must be transferred to the new
location within 90 days — while ensuring the constant surveillance of the equipment.
 108

(6) If the indication of fire alarm from the constant surveillance is carried out by telephone or
verbally, it must take place through the national emergency number, and the receiver of the alarm
signal must be notified of the data maintained in the documents listed in paragraph (3).

Article 204

(1) In the case of fire extinguishers, the extinguisher unit quantities corresponding to the
extinguisher’s performance are listed in Table 1 of Annex 16.

(2) In the event that class A and B fires also may occur in a separate unit of designation, and
the fire extinguisher that is ready is suitable for the extinguishing of the type of class A and B fire
that corresponds to different extinguisher material units, the smaller of the units must be used.

(3) A fire extinguisher must be kept in running order

a) in the separate units of designation, at least by levels,
b) where this Decree provides
c) in cases where the law provides
according to Table 2 of Annex 16.

(4) If the law does not provide otherwise, a fire extinguisher does not need to be placed in
residences or buildings used as non-commercial resort lodging, fire compartments, and their related
outdoor areas, except for facilities of other designations established in residential buildings, to
which the contents of paragraph (1) apply per entity or unit of designation.

(5) The fire protection authority may also specify the location of additional extinguisher
equipment, resources, devices, and materials, in addition to those listed in paragraph (1).

(6) The extinguisher chemical product must be located in a well visible area, with easy
accessibility, in such a way as to allow the fire extinguisher to be used in the shortest time possible
to extinguish a fire that started at the most unfavourable location, and it must be maintained in
continuous running order.

(7) In case of water-based extinguisher equipment of at least 2 kg filling mass, a fire

extinguisher of at least 2 L fill volume must be maintained in running order.

103. Residential buildings and lodgings

Article 205

(1) Flammable materials of the amount and in the manner that differs from normal use, or may
cause fire or explosion, may not be stored in the building, and activities that differ from normal use
or may cause fire or an explosion, with the exception of activities occasionally related to the
designation, may not be conducted in the building.

(2) Flammable materials and objects that restrict the escape route, with the exception of those
listed in paragraph (3), may not be placed in the corridors and stairways of buildings or building
sections with residential designation, intended for escape.

(3) Plants can be placed in the corridors and resting areas of stairways in buildings and building
sections with residential designation, intended for escape.

104. Community facilities, exhibition, market

 109

Article 206

(1) In case of occasional events in cultural, sports, and educational institutions, facilities that
are not according to the purpose originally intended, and for occasional cultural and sports events
held in non-cultural and non-sports facilities with capacity of over 500 people, the responsible
organiser of the event is obligated to specify the fire safety regulations and safety measures in
writing, and send it to the fire protection authority 15 days before the date of the event.

(2) The safety measures prepared by the responsible organiser of the event, pertaining to the
events specified in paragraph (1), shall contain
a) the evacuation calculation,
b) the planned position and number of participants at the event location, the evacuation routes,
exits, firefighting access routes and areas, public utility opening and closing device locations and
the extinguisher water sources, planned location and number of persons with limited capacity for
escape, scale site plan,
c) the tasks of the security personnel supervising the evacuation,
d) actions necessary in case of fire, and
e) method of signalling and extinguishing fire.

(3) The responsible organiser of the event must keep the documents containing the fire
protection instructions of the event and their attachments for at least one year following the event.

(4) In an industrial, commercial, or agricultural market area, the required roadway for the
access of firefighting vehicles must be ensured. Evacuation routes and exits for the facilities must
be calculated by taking into consideration the highest possible expected number of visitors. The
responsible organiser of the event must prepare a scale site plan containing the planned sites of the
facility and outdoor area, the expected location and number of persons participating, evacuation
routes, exits, firefighting access roads and areas, public utility opening and closing device locations,
and must send it 15 days before the date of the event, for information, to the fire protection
authority.

105. Open-air events

Article 207

(1) In the interest of a quick and safe escape or rescue from a danger zone of an open-air event,
the possibility of escape must be provided.

(2) The route of escape in an open-air event area must be indicated — in case of an event that
can be visited after sunset as well — with emergency safety signs. The visibility of the signals must
be provided in such a way that at least one signal is clearly seen and recognised from any location
of the open-air event area, during the entire duration of the event.

(3) The smallest size of the signals, safety signs described in paragraph (2) is 1 200 x 600 mm.

(4) The lighting of the transportation routes along the area of the event that can be visited after
sunset must be provided.

(5) In open-air event areas where the transportation and escape routes are lit by street lighting,
there is no need for additional lighting and a backup power source does not have to be provided for
lighting.
 110

(6) Evacuation from all parts of the area of the open-air event must be provided, taking into
account the greatest number of possible participants, in such a way as to be able to fully evacuate all
occupants of a 40 m perimeter of a location within 4 minutes.

(7) The ability to evacuate open-air events located adjacent to each other must be determined
by assessing the events together, with consideration of their effect on one another, in such a way as
to ensure that the requirement set forth in paragraph (6) is met.

(8) A slope or incline of over 25 %, or an area where passenger traffic options are limited,
cannot be considered as escape routes.

Article 208

(1) The possibility of escape at the event must be provided for people with limited capacity for
escape.

(2) The open width of the route considered for escape at the open-air event must be at least
2.5 m.

(3) Lighting with an open flame must not be used on routes considered for escape at open-air
events.

Article 209

(1) During the open-air event, a sufficient number of security personnel must be provided,
corresponding to the characteristics of the event and location, the capacity of the participants for
escape, and the capacity of the site, but at least one person must be provided for every 200 persons,
which is the responsibility of the organiser of the event to ensure.

(2) If the persons attending the event are expected to be persons with limited capacity to escape,
at least one security personnel must be provided for every 100 persons.

Article 210

(1) If a projector of at least a 2 m diagonal screen is installed on the area of the open-air event,
the routes of escape and safety information points of the event must be demonstrated at least before
the event or concert is started, during the intermission, and at the end.

(2) If a projector of at least 2 m diagonal screen is not installed in the area of the event, through
voluntary agreements, then a sound amplification system, equipment, or sound amplification device
independent from an electrical network must be used to provide the information listed in
paragraph (1), supplemented with information provided about the necessary measures to take in
case of a fire event or in case of damage.

(3) If there is no sound amplification system installed, at least one sound amplification device,
independent from the electrical network, must be made available, considering the area and
properties of the open-air event, for every 3 000 m2 area.

(4) If a sound amplification system is installed, but the backup energy supply is not provided
for at least 30 minutes, then it must be supplemented by sound amplification devices independent
from the electrical network, in the amount specified in paragraph (3), which must be kept ready.
 111

(5) The sound amplification system and the sound amplification devices must be used without
delay in order to prevent a panic situation from developing, and to inform and direct those escaping.

(6) The amplification of an open-air event must be designed in such a way that it can be heard
from any part of the planned area of the event, designed for the participants.

Article 211

(1) An access route to the open-air event and its area must be provided, which is suitable for the
transportation of firefighting vehicles, and is approved by the fire protection authority.

(2) The first-degree fire protection authority may order a suitable number of firefighting
vehicles and related personnel to oversee the event, with the knowledge of the location and planned
number of participants, the cost of which is to be borne by the organiser of the event.

Article 212

(1) At open-air events

a) one 34A performance fire extinguisher must be provided for the protection of every 50 m2 of
the stage,
b) one 34A performance fire extinguisher must be provided for the protection of every 50 m2 of
the dressing rooms and storage areas,
c) one 34A, 183B C performance fire extinguisher must be provided for the protection of every
100 m2 of the hospitality and commercial units.

(2) The area under the stage cannot be used for storage or warehousing; only the most
necessary tools and equipment to perform the function can be kept there, which must be placed in
such a way as to make an intervention with the fire extinguisher possible without delay.

Article 213

(1) The open-air event’s seated auditorium must be established with seats that are attached to
the floor, the ground, or within each row, to one another, with the exception of benches. The seats
must be arranged in such a way and the escape routes planned in such a way that the length of the
routes do not exceed
a) 15 m when moving through the rows of seats,
b) 15 m when moving up through stairs or stands with stairs,
c) 30 m when moving down through stairs or stands with stairs,
d) 45 m when moving through rising or sloping planes, or when moving horizontally.

(2) The minimum open width of stairs and corridors used at resorts is 1.1 m, and in case of
stairs and corridors separating sectors is 2.10 m. If the event is designed with tables and surrounding
seats, the requirements set forth in paragraph (1)(d) must be followed.

Article 214

In case of procession or competition type open-air events, the fire safety regulations applicable
to open-air events should be applied only in case of assembly points.

Article 215
 112

(1) The fire protection regulations and safety measures for open-air events — with the
exception of musical, dance events according to the Government Decree on making musical and
dance event functions safer — must be determined in writing by the organiser of the event and must
be sent to the competent first-degree fire protection authority 10 days before the start date of the
event.

(2) In case of an open-air event held at a given location several times weekly, or with weekly or
monthly regularity, the fire protection regulations, safety measures set forth in paragraph (1) only
need to be developed on the first occasion. Any subsequent changes concerning fire protection
aspects must be reported as specified in paragraph (1).

(3) The organiser of the event provides, prior to the start of the event, provides fire protection
information to persons who will be performing duties during the event, and documents it, which
must be retained on site during the entire duration of the event.

(4) The documentation containing the fire protection regulations and safety measures must be
retained by the organiser of the event for at least one year after the announcement of the open-air
event or its termination.

106. Key open-air events with music and dance

Article 216

(1) The rules for open-air events apply to key open-air events with music and dance, with the
following differences.

(2) The publishable abstract of the documentation containing the fire protection regulations and
safety measures pertaining to evacuation and rescue, is made public for the purpose of information,
in an electronically downloadable format by the organiser of the event on the website used to
display the event.

(3) The backup energy supply for electrical equipment used to provide rescue on site, and
installed due to the event, must be provided for the period necessary to evacuate the area of the
open-air event, but at least for 30 minutes.

(4) In the entertainment locations of the open-air event, projectors with at least 2 m diagonal
screens must be installed in suitable locations, primarily for providing safety information to the
participants of the event.

(5) In the interest of the safety of the participants, plans to scale must be placed in the event
area near the escape routes and in locations where concentration of the participants is expected. The
plans must show drawings that assist in escape and orientation, and the escape route to be taken.

Article 217

(1) The organiser of the event must create a management point where at least the organiser of
the event, the event safety director, the event fire protection officer, and in case of any damage, the
police, ambulance, and authorised representatives of the disaster control service carry out
management tasks.

(2) The organiser of the event provides an opportunity for communication and mass
communication through the management point.
 113

(3) Two 55A, 233B, C performance fire extinguishers must be kept ready at the management
point, which are not required to be marked with a safety symbol, according to the provisions of this
Decree.

(4) A copy of the documentation containing the fire protection regulations and safety measures
must be placed at the management point.

Article 218

During the event, the required extinguisher water and its accessibility to the most hazardous
location must be ensured by the organiser of the event, which may occur by individual or by ad hoc
technical solutions. The required amount of extinguisher water, its location and requirements
pertaining to the event is determined in each case, with consultation, by the first-degree fire
protection authority.

107. Vehicles

Article 219

(1) The fire extinguisher device located on the vehicle according to the relevant regulation must
be continually accessible and in case of towing, must be usable for the fire protection of both the
tractor and the cargo.

(2) In case of tanks transporting flammable liquid or gas — directly after each loading and
unloading — the operator or his/her representative must check and ensure that the tanks are not
dripping or leaking.

(3) Only tools or materials not causing fires or explosions can be used to prewarm the vehicle.
An open flame must not be used for this purpose.

(4) Fuel must not be filled into the fuel tank of a vehicle while the engine is on.

(5) Fuel must not be filled into a tank placed in the passenger compartment or trunk.

Article 220

(1) A motor vehicle transporting flammable liquid and gas may only be parked in a vehicle
storage place or lot designed for this purpose, isolated from other vehicles, in a way as to allow any
of the other vehicles to leave without moving the rest of the vehicles. The electrical equipment of
vehicles parked in a vehicle storage location must be powered off.

(2) A motor vehicle may not be parked at the gateway of a building — except for family
dwellings.

(3) It is forbidden to unload fuel, flammable liquid, gas, or to load fuel to a motor vehicle,
conduct activities involving a risk of fire, or perform repairs on the fuel gas supply system in a
motor vehicle storage location or lot.

(4) A mono-fuel vehicle, flex-fuel vehicle, and bi-fuel vehicle may not be parked in,
a) with the exception of vehicles with approval mark and with approval mark equipment [sic]
in the case of LPG (probane-butane) fuel,
 114

aa) basement level spaces suitable for the storage of a motor vehicle,
ab) in vehicle storage places where there is deflector without shaft and water seal, cellar, from
which a basement level room or location opens, the full air supply of which is not ensured,
ac) places where unobstructed cross-ventilation is not continually ensured,
b) in case of compressed natural gas
ba) in enclosed, not cross-ventilated spaces connected directly to high traffic areas containing
crowds,
bb) where unobstructed cross-ventilation is not continually provided.

(5) At the entrances of areas listed in paragraph (4)(a), a well visible sign must be placed with
the text “LPG-fuelled vehicles without a safety valve may not enter”.

108. Harvest

Article 221

(1) The harvesting of cereal crops must take place first along a public road and railroad.

(2) The harvested cereal crops or hay must be removed within 100 m of the railroad, and at
least a 3 m wide protective ploughing must be used.

(3) Smoking on a wheat field is prohibited, even in the compartments of vehicles, engines, or
machinery.

(4) For the duration of harvest, a vegetation-free smoking area may be designated at least 15 m
from flammable materials. A vessel containing sufficient amount of water to collect and put out
tobacco products must be placed in the smoking area.

109. Threshing floor, fibre crop storage, stack

Article 222

(1) When determining placement of the field-assembled stack, threshing floor, and fibre crop
storage, the fire safety distance from the end storage unit and surroundings
a) structures used for the production, processing, use, storage, or distribution of potentially
explosive materials must be at least 200 m,
b) at least 100 m from other structures,
c) at least 100 m from railway tracks, with the exception of the industrial track of the fibre
crop,
d) at least 25 m from public roads, forests, standing crops, and
e) in case of high-voltage aboveground electrical wires, at three times the distance between
the highest electrical wire and the ground, but at least 20 m.

(2) At livestock farms, the litter and roughage requirement up to one year is considered
operating storage.

(3) The stacks must be placed in a such a way that the stack in the second row falls between
two stacks in the first row.

(4) A height of three times the larger stack, but at least 20 m of height must be ensured between
stacks and between rows.
 115

(5) The stacks of roughage, straw, and fibre crops gathered on the field must be surrounded by
at least a 3 m wide protective ploughing.

Article 223

When there is no wind, smoking is permitted at a distance of at least 30 m away from the stack.

Article 224

(1) In case of fibre classification, up to four stacks or storage units can be opened at the same
time.

(2) Fibre crops can only be tented outside of the storage area and at over 10 m from the end
stack. In the tenting area, 10 m of fire safety distance must be ensured after every 10 000 m2 floor
area.

110. Rules of starting open-air fires and preventing fires

Article 225

(1) Open-air burning of standing vegetation, stubble, or waste created in connection with crop
production and use of urban real estate, is prohibited, except where the law provides otherwise.

(2) The disaster control service stock is exempt from the prohibition of burning or setting a fire,
if the purpose of its activity is to reduce damage, prevent the spread of fire, or to control the fire.

(3) The owner or user of the real estate property is required to keep the area free of flammable
waste and dry vegetation not used further.

(4) The viewing platforms or facilities at high points may be utilised by persons commissioned
by the municipality or local disaster control service director, for the purpose of early detection of
open-air fires.

Article 226

(1) The real estate property owner or user may perform a controlled burn of up to 10 ha
contiguous area with the permission of the fire protection authority.

(2) The request to perform a controlled burn must include

a) the name and address of the Applicant,
b) the exact location of the burn, indicating the geographical coordinates or topographical
number,
c) the start date and time of the burn and the planned completion of it (year, month, day, hour,
minutes),
d) the reason for the controlled burn,
e) the size of the area involved in the burn,
f) exact description of the burn process,
g) name and address of persons performing the burn,
h) name, address, and mobile phone number of the person monitoring the burn,
i) planned interventions to prevent further spread of the fire, and
j) the list of resources provided and kept ready on site to prevent further spread of the fire.
 116

(3) The request must be submitted to the authorising fire protection authority, no less than 10
days before the scheduled date of the burn.

(4) The fire protection authority will make a decision within five business days of the receipt of
the request.

(5) During the controlled burn, the fire cannot be left unsupervised, and in case of danger, or if
the controlled burn is finished, must be extinguished immediately.

(6) The controlled burn can only be performed in such a way as to not cause a fire or explosion
hazard to the environment.

(7) After the controlled burn is finished, the site must be carefully inspected and any
smouldering or glowing embers must be eliminated with the use of water, earth covering, or hand
tools.

Article 227

(1) During the controlled burn, stubble burning can only be performed according to the
following:
a) simultaneous ignition of the stubble from all sides is prohibited; only stubble remnants can
be used for the burn; destroying hay by burning or burning the stubble next to a standing wheat field
is prohibited,
b) the stubble or involved sections must be ploughed around at a width of 3 m prior to starting
the burning of the stubble, and in order to avoid injury to small wildlife in the area, a wildlife
warning must be sounded; protection of lines of trees, groups of trees must be ensured with
ploughing a protective strip around them, appropriate for the properties of the locality, but at least
6 m wide,
c) stubble burning in an area greater than 10 ha can be performed in segments, and only after
burning of one segment is finished can the burning of the second segment be started,
d) during the stubble burning, the presence of a sufficient number of trained personnel with
hand tools suitable for extinguishing fire must be ensured, and at least one tractor with a plough
must be kept ready.

(2) The rules set forth in paragraph (1) must be applied during the controlled burn of standing
vegetation, dead leaves and other vegetation wastes.

Article 228

(1) In order to prevent open-air fires, the operator of the railway and public road is required to
create a protective clearance of at least 4.0 m wide calculated from the outside railway track centre,
and at least 3 m wide from the edge of the public road.

(2) The protective clearance must be kept free of flammable undergrowth and branches.

(3) The owner, operator or leaseholder of the area adjacent to the protective clearance is
responsible for continually keeping the area in a clean condition, free of flammable materials.

111. Agricultural engines and machinery

Article 229
 117

(1) At least one engine and machinery, supplied with suitable fire extinguisher for
extinguishing at least 21A and 113B test unit fires, may be used during the harvesting of cereal
crops, gathering of the straw, and straw baling, as well as other vehicles, for which the fire
protection inspection was performed before harvesting the crop. The compliance of the vehicle must
be ensured by inspection. In case of a technical inspection of more than five agricultural vehicles to
be used during harvesting work, the fire protection authority must be notified in writing 10 days
prior of the scheduled inspection date. The technical inspection must be recorded and one copy
must be placed on the vehicle.

(2) The operator of the operated engine and machinery is required to inspect the condition of
the exhaust pipe and spark breaker, directly before starting the work and immediately after its
completion, as well as during work breaks, and if needed clean it from all flammable materials that
has accumulated thereon.

(3) The backup fuel and lubricants must be placed at a distance of at least 20 m from the engine,
machinery, stack and wheat field, in an area free of flammable wastes and vegetation.

(4) Any maintenance, or repair on the engine and machinery that requires the use of an open
flame or may involve fuel run-off, is prohibited at wheat fields, threshing floors, and in a fibre crop
storage area.

(5) The harvesting machine, engine and other machinery must be placed at a distance of at least
15 m away from the standing cereal crop, stubble, or stack, in an area free of flammable wastes and
vegetation during work breaks. If this distance away from the stubble cannot be secured, the
harvesting machine, engine or other machinery must be placed outsides of a 3 m wide protective
ploughing.

(6) The harvesting machine must be supplied with a flexible grounding conductor, and its
battery must be supplied with a protective sheath with a non-conductive material that is at least not
readily flammable.

(7) The operator of the engine and machinery, harvesting machinery cannot leave it during
operation and perform other work.

Article 230

(1) The engine performing the gathering of the hay and baling can only access the gathered hay
and bale at a distance where the exhaust fumes of the engine or its exhaust does not constitute an
ignition risk.

(2) The engine involved in the gathering of hay and baling must be regularly cleaned of all
fallen straw and hay.

(3) The floor area of the gathered hay cannot exceed 1 000 m2.

112. Rules of crop drying

Article 231

In case of drying with crop drying equipment, the operator and operating personnel is
responsible to comply with fire protection regulations and for continual supervision during
 118

operation. The manufacturer’s operating instructions must be followed during the operation of the
crop drying equipment.

XIX.
CONDITIONS OF USING FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS AND GASES

113. Storage and transport of flammable liquids

Article 232

(1) Aerosols classified as explosive and liquids classified in fire hazard classes II-II cannot be
stored at basement level, in the attic, or in an escape route.

(2) Flammable liquids can only be stored in well sealable, fluid resistant containers, which is
not an ignition hazard to fluids.

(3) The packagings or protective coverings of fragile containers must protect against damage
(breakage, rupture).

(4) The containers can only be stored and transported with their openings upright, in sealed
condition. Storage and transport of emptied, but not cleaned containers are to follow the regulations
that apply to containers that are filled. The amount of material stored is equivalent to the aggregate
value of the capacity of the storage containers.

(5) Except for residential buildings, liquids of fire hazard classes I-III and explosive class
aerosols must be stored on shelves with non-combustible materials or cabinets according to
Article 235(2).

(6) Liquids of fire hazard classes I-II can be stored in storage containers up to a maximum of
20 L of capacity.

(7) In case of storing liquids of fire hazard classes I-II on the premises, in excess of 20 L, at
least one spraying equipment,
a) in case of using a container with capacity of up to 1 L, at least 0.02 m3 quantity of absorbents,
and
b) in case of using a container exceeding 1 L of capacity, at least 0.05 m3 quantity of absorbents
must be kept up to 15 m from the site of storage.

(8) in a parking facility with more than four parking spaces, at least one piece of spraying
equipment and at least 0.05 m3 of absorbents must be kept.

(9) A passenger elevator can be used for transporting up to 20 L of flammable liquid,

accompanied by no more than one person.

114. Storage in residences and garages

Article 233

(1) In multi-unit buildings, up to 10 L of liquid of fire hazard classes I-II and explosive class
aerosol and up to 30 L of liquid of fire hazard classes III can be stored.
 119

(2) In separate single-unit residential buildings, up to 20 L of liquid of fire hazard classes I-II
and explosive class aerosol and up to 60 L of liquid of fire hazard class III can be stored.

(3) In motor vehicle storage locations connected to residential buildings, or building sections of
residential designation, except for the gas tank built into motor vehicles, up to 5 L of flammable
liquid may be stored
a) per each parking space, and
b) per each storage location
for the operation of the motor vehicle or other machines with combustion engines, or for use in
other household applications.

(4) Flammable liquids or combustible gases may not be stored in locations or storage areas that
differ from those listed in paragraph (3), except for the gas tank built into the motor vehicle.

115. Storage and distribution in case of commercial designation

Article 234

(1) In the territory of a commercial unit, sealed liquids of fire hazard classes I-II, and
potentially explosive aerosol, in the quantities listed in Table 1 of Annex 17, can be stored or
distributed.

(2) The allowed maximum quantity of liquids of fire hazard classes I-II and explosive aerosol
in a commercial unit distributing iron, craft, paint, and building materials, household products is
three times the quantity listed in paragraph (1), if the commercial unit is separated from adjacent
buildings by fireproof building structures.

(3) Liquids of fire hazard classes I-II and explosive class aerosols may not be stored or
distributed in a basement level location of commercial designation.

116. Storage in case of other community designation

Article 235

(1) In case of a community designation not considered commercial, only the quantity of liquids
of fire hazard classes I-III and explosive class aerosols specified in Table 2 of Annex 17 may be
stored, and only that which is required for the activity corresponding to the designation.

(2) Maximum storage quantity of materials listed in paragraph (1)

a) is 20 L in a metal cabinet,
b) is 50 L in a fireproof cabinet, and
c) is 60 L in a fireproof cabinet suitable for the storage of liquids.

(3) Outside of the cabinets listed in paragraph (2), up to a quantity of 5 L of material may be
stored per unit.

Article 236

(1) Vessels containing flammable liquids may not be transported on vehicles of mass
transportation, except for food products containing components of flammable liquids, household
products, polishes, paint material, and their solvents, in a quantity of 5 L per person.
 120

(2) During transport, the vessels containing the flammable liquid must be positioned in such a
way as to prevent tipping or being damaged.

(3) Glass vessels containing flammable liquids and wrapping material containing them must not
be transported placed on top of one another.

(4) A maximum of 20 L of flammable liquids may be transported by hand.

117. Storage of flammable liquids and melts in horizontal cylindrical steel tanks

Article 237

(1) When using multi-compartment tanks, the compartments must not contain liquids that may
come into dangerous reactions with each other.

(2) A portable fire extinguisher must be kept near the tanks. Determination of the quantity of
fire extinguishers must be done according to the standard fire surface. The fire extinguisher must be
suitable for extinguishing at least 34A and 144 B test unit fires in case of underground tanks, and
extinguishing at least 55A and 233B test unit fires in case of aboveground tanks.

(3) Any potentially escaped run-off liquid must be blotted up immediately. For this purpose,
0.1 m3 dry sand or 0.05 m3 dry, non-flammable absorbent material per tank groups must be kept at
the storage area.

118. Storage of potentially flammable liquids in a storage room

Article 238

(1) Suitable tools and absorbent materials, or 0.5 m3 dry sand and one shovel must be kept
ready in the storage room for blotting up dripped out liquids.
(2) If liquids of fire hazard classes I-II are being measured in the storage room, 1 fire blanket of
at least 2 m2 in size must be placed in the storage room.

(3) Near the entrance to the storage room, outside of the room, 2 fire extinguishers must be
placed, suitable for the extinguishing at least 55A and 233B test unit fires, and in case of adjacent
storage one for each additional room.

(4) At the external surface of the storage door room, 1 warning pictogram must be placed in a
permanent way, warning of fire or explosion hazard.

119. Refuelling station regulations

Article 239

(1) Lubricants and other flammable liquids may only be stored outside of the building used in,
in cabinets, show cases, or sealed vessels stored in containers, of fire classification A1-A2 with the
capacity of up to 500 L, in combination packaging. These may also store explosive and flammable
class materials together. The cabinets and containers must be sealable.

(2) At most 2 storage cabinets or containers may be placed per dispenser pump, but the quantity
of sold materials at the refuelling station may be up to 5 m3. There must be no heating equipment in
the containers.
 121

120. Storage and transport of flammable liquids within the management building
of refuelling stations

Article 240

(1) The storage vessels must be stored with their openings facing upward, in an airtight sealed
condition.

(2) Emptied, but uncleaned vessels should be stored according to the same regulations as those
that are filled.

(3) Explosive and flammable class materials may be stored together in a single location.

(4) The multi-packaging or protective cover of fragile storage vessels must protect against
damage, such as breaking and ripping.

(5) Up to 500 L of liquids of fire hazard classes I-II may be stored in waterproof tightly
sealable bottles or flasks, and up to 500 L of liquids of fire hazard class III may be stored. The
capacity of the bottle or flask may not exceed 2 L.

(6) In tightly sealable fuel cans, other boxes or cans, up to 100 L of liquids of fire hazard
classes I-II, and up to 3 000 L of liquids of fire hazard class III may be stored. The capacity of the
box or can may not exceed 20 L.

(7) Metal drums may be used to store liquids of fire hazard classes I-II, and plastic drums may
be used only for liquids of fire hazard class III.

Article 241

(1) Vessels containing flammable liquids within the refuelling station must be transported only
with the appropriate transporting equipment or by manual power.

(2) Glass vessels containing flammable liquids and wrapping material containing them must not
be transported placed on top of one another.

121. Fire extinguishers placed at refuelling stations

Article 242

(1) At the refuelling station, 2 fire extinguishers, suitable for extinguishing at least 34A and
144B test unit fires, must be placed for up to three dispensers, and at least one for every 3 additional
dispensers near the dispensers, and at least one extinguisher must be placed within 30 m of the
filling tank.

(2) At self-service refuelling stations, each dispenser shall have one fire extinguisher, suitable
for extinguishing at least 34A and 1441B test unit fires, near the dispenser.

(3) 1 fire extinguisher having at least 34A, 144B and C extinguisher performance must be
placed near the LPG gas exchange site at the refuelling station, in a well visible way with easy
access. The extinguisher may be stored together with the equipment at the dispensers or
 122

management building, but the distance may not be more than 30 m between the equipment and the
exchange site.

(4) 1 fire extinguisher, suitable for extinguishing at least 55A and 233B test unit fires, must be
placed at every aboveground tank storing liquids of fire hazard classes I-II, and 2 must be placed at
every aboveground tank storing liquids of fire hazard class III.

(5) At least two fire extinguishers, suitable for extinguishing at least 55A and 233B test unit
fires, must be kept ready at container dispensers of up to 10 000 L and three at container dispensers
of over 10 000 L.

(6) A material suitable for absorbing at least 100 L of liquid hydrocarbon must be kept ready
after every 3 dispensers at refuelling stations and at the filling tank or 0.05 m3 of non-flammable dry
absorbent material (silica zeolite containing grist or other absorbent material) with a long handled
shove for each.

(7) 1 fire blanket of 2 m2 in size must be placed at the management building, in an easily
accessible location, for the purpose of rescue.

122. Filling with flammable liquids at refuelling stations

Article 243

(1) Fuel may only be filled into the tanks of immobile vehicles with turned off engines or in
appropriate antistatic vessels or metal cans, drums.

(2) When dispensing, filling fuel at refuelling stations, antistatic clothing is not required.

(3) Fuel may be filled without restriction into steel, tightly sealable vessels not having a tank
level controller, up to 97 % of the capacity of the vessels.

(4) Gasoline can only be dispensed into vessels of over 5 L capacity if the safety of the vessel is
appropriate, and protected against electrostatic charge.

123. Operation instructions of LPG exchange site

Article 244

(1) The management of the exchange site, receiving and releasing of gas cylinders, may not be
transferred to a person without an appropriate fire safety certificate.

(2) With the exception of category “1”-“2” exchange sites, the receiving and releasing of gas
cylinders may only take place in close-fitting protective clothes obtained by the operator, with a
covered head, wearing anti-spark, antistatic footwear. Clothing made of synthetic fibres may not be
worn on the lower or upper part of the body.

Article 245

(1) There may be no vegetation within a 5 m parameter of category “1” exchange sites — with
the exception of kitchen gardens, decorative plants, grapes, grass, and live trees. In exchange sites
of other categories, there may be no vegetation, with the exception of live trees and grass.
 123

(2) Exchange sites of categories “2”-“4” must be supplied with at least one explosion-proof
portable lamp for emergency lighting, and at “over category” sites at least two of these must be
supplied.

(3) At exchange sites where steel gas cylinders are stored and distributed, only tools that do not
generate sparks can be used for work in the explosion-proof zones, and the use of steel tools is
prohibited.

(4) Electrical repair activities at the exchange site may only be performed by trained personnel.
Work may only be performed in the danger zone after the power supply has been turned off. The
work must be recorded in a work log. The electrician may only start the electrical repair work if he
has previously acknowledged the risk of explosion in writing. After the work is performed,
verification must be made that explosion-proof repair has been correctly performed, and this must
be documented.

(5) LPG may only be transloaded from a gas cylinder into a tourist-use cylinder of 5 kg
capacity, with the authorisation of the competent authority of jurisdiction. In other cases, LPG may
not be transloaded from other gas cylinders.

(6) Only LPG tanks, which were filled and inspected at an LPG gas cylinder filling plant,
according to the special provisions, with the exception of tourist-use cylinders, and which are
received from a licensed gas distributor, may be stored and sold at LPG exchange sites.

(7) Filling of gas cylinders may not take place at LPG exchange sites. All activities during
which LPG is filled into the gas cylinder through the LPG valve, with the exception of transloading
into a tourist-use cylinder of up to 5 kg of capacity, is considered filling of the cylinder.

Article 246

(1) The gas cylinder may not be exposed to mechanical use, particularly not to being struck or
thrown. A gas cylinder that is frozen to the floor may be loosened with up to 40 °C water, and
afterwards the water from the floor must be removed.

(2) At exchange sites higher than category “1”, no other substances, except for LPG gas
cylinders and the equipment required for its distribution, may be stored.

(3) The exchange sites must be provided with fire extinguishers as set forth in Table 3 of
Annex 17.

(4) The fire extinguishers must be placed near the exchange sites, outside of the storage area or
tank storage cage, in a well visible, easily accessible location. In case of a category 1 exchange site,
the fire extinguisher may also be located in the area or room, which the exchange site operators
continually occupy.

(5) The fire department telephone number must be placed in a well visible location, in a durable
format.

(6) The operator prepares written measures for the extinguishing of fire at the exchange sites,
for the protection of gas cylinders positioned near the fire — if he is required to prepare a fire
protection regulations, including it as an attachment — and if needed carries out the measures
therein.
 124

(7) The gas cylinder is considered damaged and unable to be further used if
a) it has fallen to hard ground from at least 1 m height,
b) burn marks are seen on it,
c) it has a sharp notch injury or denting,
d) the transporting vehicle has been in a traffic accident, or
e) signs of conversion are detected thereon.

(8) Any injury that occurs during operation must be reported to the competent refuelling
company or exchange site.

124. Regulations of LPG exchange site located at the refuelling station

Article 247

(1) The operation of the LPG exchange site at the refuelling station may take place according to
the contents of Articles 244–246

(2) The filled and emptied LPG tanks may be stored together at an LPG tank storage area, with
the labelling of the emptied LPG tanks.

XX.
INSPECTION, MAINTENANCE, REVIEW

125. General regulations

Article 248

(1) The operator is required to ensure that the operator inspection, periodical review, and
maintenance of the relevant technical solution, in the manner and with the frequency set forth in the
table of Annex 18, and is required to provide repair services as needed.

(2) The operator shall verify any circumstances that negatively affect operability and shall
acknowledge this by signing and dating the document determining operation failure.

(3) The operator is required to complete an extraordinary review of the relevant technical
solution and correction of failures, immediately after becoming aware of the circumstance or
omission giving cause to perform the repair, and in other cases, within 10 business days, if
a) the technical solution did not fulfil its fire protection designation during a fire event, fire
alarm exercise, or other event, or
b) the technical solution is not appropriate for the intended operation of fire protection.

(4) The operator inspection, periodical review, maintenance, and repair must be performed and
the results must be documented in writing.

(5) The relevant regulations of the manufacturers for the technical solutions involved must be
followed during the operator inspection, periodical review, extraordinary review, maintenance, and
repair.

Article 249

(1) The person performing the operator inspection shall

 125

a) determine the need for the periodical review and maintenance,

b) visually inspects that relevant technical solution is operable, and if this Decree specifies,
also verifies it by performing a practical test, and checks that which is set forth in paragraph (2),
c) documents, in writing, the performance of the inspection and its results, during the
inspection and at its location, and
d) reports the circumstance negatively affecting its operability, and indicates the
determination of failure to the operator in writing immediately after completing the inspection.

(2) The operator inspection includes the visual determination that the relevant technical
solution
a) has been established at the designated installation location,
b) it is in undamaged condition,
c) it is visible and accessible,
d) its operating equipment, symbols, labels are visible and correct,
e) the condition of the technical solution based on the vital indicators with regard to operability,
and status signals, and
f) due to the presence of contamination or environmental circumstances, operability is
negatively affected.

(3) The operator inspection may be generated through an automatic inspection, if the automatic
inspection system
a) performs the task of the person that performs the operator inspection, with the prescribed
frequency, and
b) documents the performance of the investigation and its results, in a format that can be
demonstrated during an audit by the authorities.

Article 250

(1) The authorised person shall ensure that during the periodical review
a) it reviews the prescribed operator inspection, maintenance, documentation, and its necessity,
b) it establishes operability and effectiveness, visually, by practical test, by breaking down as
needed, disassembly and reassembly, measurements and evaluation of measurement results,
c) it documents in writing the performance of the review and its results, and
d) it reports the circumstance negatively affecting its operability, and indicates the
determination of failure or lack of effectiveness to the operator in writing immediately after
completing the inspection.

(2) The authorised person shall perform the periodical review during the course of the
extraordinary review, during which he/she also assesses the causes and circumstances for the failure
or poor operation of the technical solution. He/she documents in writing that the extraordinary
review has occurred and gives one copy to the operator after completion, at the location, or sends it
to him within five business days.

(3) The authorised person shall perform the maintenance

a) verifying that the prescribed operator inspection, periodical review, documentation have
occurred, and the need for these,
b) performing the maintenance tasks prescribed by the manufacturer,
c) documenting that maintenance and its results in writing,
d) reporting the circumstances negatively affecting operability, and indicating the
determination of failure or lack of effectiveness to the operator in writing at the location, during the
inspection, and
 126

e) in justified cases, making a recommendation to the operator on increasing the frequency of

maintenance.

Article 251

(1) The operator is required to correct the failures determined during the operator inspection,
maintenance, periodical and extraordinary review, within a time period determined by the severity
of the failure. The severity of the failure is determined by the authorised person, or the operator or
person commissioned by the operator, following the contents set forth in paragraph (2).

(2) The following are considered serious failures, to be corrected at once

a) a failure causing a risk of fire or explosion, or
b) a failure that prevents compliance with the fire protection designation of the relevant
technical solution.

Article 252

(1) The operator must compensate for the reduced level of protection during the review,
maintenance, and repair, with appropriate solutions. As part of the compensatory measures, the
operator shall
a) apply a solution included in the relevant technical requirement,
b) suspend operation, use, activity until the level of protection is restored,
c) set in place backup technical solutions with similar levels of protection, or
d) apply another solution, approved in advance by the fire protection authority.

(2) The responsibilities of the operator may be fully or partially assumed by another person or
organisation in a written agreement. The responsibilities of the other person are equivalent to that of
the operator.

(3) The person performing the operator inspection must have the necessary knowledge to
perform the inspection correctly, as well as a written authorisation issued by the operator for this
purpose.

126. Maintenance and review of installed fire alarms and installed fire extinguishers

Article 253

(1) The operator, by following the manufacturer’s operating instructions, and the applied
technical requirements, ensures that the installed fire alarm and installed fire extinguisher are
operated safely and effectively.

(2) The installed fire alarm and installed fire extinguisher may only be operated by a person
trained in its operation.

(3) Failures arising during operation, review, and maintenance must be corrected without delay.

(4) During review and maintenance, all tests and experiments prescribed by the manufacturer
must be performed.
Article 254

(1) A log must be kept of the operation and maintenance of the installed fire alarm and installed
fire extinguisher, which must include
 127

a) main data of the equipment,

b) names of the operators,
c) date and observations of the operator inspections,
d) based on what specification the maintenance was performed,
e) detected and corrected errors,
f) start-up of the installed fire alarm and installed fire extinguisher, reason for it, and the date
(minute, hour) of the failure,
g) switching off and on dates (day, hour, minute), and
h) name, signature, and contact information of the organisation or person doing the inspection,
maintenance.

(2) The log must be retained for at least five years from the entry of the last record.

(3) The log may only be managed by persons trained to operate the installed fire alarm and
installed fire extinguisher.

(4) The operating instructions of the installed fire alarm and installed fire extinguisher must be
retained and presented to the authorities at the time of an audit.

Article 255

(1) The person or service provider commissioned by the operator to provide surveillance and to
operate the installed fire alarm centre (remote alarm, remote-operated unit), as part of the daily
inspection of operability, also checks that
a) if the system is not in neutral status, was the displayed error recorded in the operation log,
and if the error requires expert training — not temporary delay of the network — was the
maintenance person notified,
b) was there adequate intervention in response to the previous day’s recorded error, and
c) are all status indicators of the fire alarm centre in working condition.

(2) If constant surveillance is implemented through the remote surveillance, instead of the
instructions in paragraph (1)(c) it is sufficient to verify the connection with the centre and the
system status.

(3) The purpose of the inspection is to determine that the internal audible warning device,
central light-signalling device and information displays are working correctly.

(4) The inspection shall take place according to the recommendations of the manufacturer.

(5) The person commissioned by the operator to review that the installed fire alarm is operating
correctly, and to review the personnel, environmental and technical conditions, shall review
monthly
a) that the contents of paragraphs (1)–(4) are followed,
b) that a running operating log is kept,
c) whether the persons doing the review have had sufficient training,
d) whether the required resources, materials (paper ink, ribbon) are available for the printers.

(6) The person commissioned by the operator to review that the installed fire alarm is operating
correctly, and to review the personnel, environmental and technical conditions, shall review every
three months
a) the contents of paragraph (4) have been followed,
 128

b) whether any changes took place in the building’s use, technology, or design, which influence
the operation of the fire alarm, particularly the capabilities of the automatic sensors, the
accessibility of the manual call point, the audibility of the audible alarm system, and
c) whether the displays related to the identification of the signals, or drawings are available,
and whether the graphic display is in working order.

(7) Regular and extraordinary reviews take place between the inspections and maintenance.
The purpose of the regular reviews is to review that the fire alarm system is working correctly under
normal circumstances. Extraordinary review must be carried out
a) after a fire event,
b) in case of a false alarm,
c) in case of failure of the system,
d) if the system is altered,
e) after a long shutdown,
f) after a contract with a new maintenance service provider.

Article 256

(1) In case of installed fire extinguishers, the operator’s trained staff

a) performs visual inspection of the quantity of fire water, the values from signalling devices
related to operability, and if there is absence of more than the allowed fire water, acts according to
the operating instructions,
b) performs visual inspection of the nozzles, pipeline, and the condition of the extinguisher
centre, and verifies that the employees who come into contact with the extinguisher are trained,
c) keeps the extinguisher’s hoses and its fittings clean, removes any accumulated dirt, and
d) keeps free the appropriate distance between the fire water outflow opening and the
protected material in order to introduce the fire water.

(2) Automatically operating water-based equipment operators

a) perform weekly reviews, which extend to
aa) a visual inspection of the water and extinguisher substance,
ab) the inspection of the pressure value and water level,
ac) identifying obvious gaps,
ad) inspection of the effectiveness of frost-removing heating, emptying of water condensation
collectors,
ae) inspection of test alarms by opening valve, or valves,
af) automated and manual starting and restarting of pumps, pump test run, in case of electric
propulsion at least 15 minutes, in case of internal combustion engines at least 20 minutes, including
foam mixing pump, and
ag) testing the water flow and pressure from utility mains water supply,
b) monthly inspection extends to
ba) inspection of the hose connections of internal combustion engines being leak free, and
bb) inspection of the backup power source.

(3) Inspection in facilities without staff is not required, if the remote surveillance is able to
control the parameters specified in paragraphs (1) and (2).

Article 257

(1) For fire alarms, the operator shall ensure during the course of regular six-month review and
maintenance that the person trained to perform review and maintenance
 129

a) inspects the personnel criteria of operating the fire alarm (remote controller, remote display
unit),
b) inspects the records of the operation log and performs the required interventions in the
interest of correct operation of the equipment,
c) evaluates the results of the operator’s inspection, and if necessary, makes recommendations
to restore the equipment to normal operation,
d) operates one sensor or one manual call point, and verify whether the fire alarm centre detects
and displays the events correctly, sounds the alarm devices (sound-light indicators) and operates the
control functions, appropriate procedures must be used in order to avoid injury, risk to life or
damage (outflow of the extinguisher substance)
e) inspects the functioning of the primary and secondary power supply,
f) inspects the operation of the error signalling functions of the fire alarm centre (remote control,
remote display),
g) in case of fire and error transmission signal equipment, inspects the connection to the
receiving stations (combined duty, firefighters, remote surveillance station), and
h) performs all additional inspections and tests that the installer, distributor or manufacturer
prescribes.

(2) During regular annual review and maintenance, the operator must ensure, at least annually,
that the person trained to perform review and maintenance
a) performs the tasks set forth in paragraph (1),
b) inspects the correct functioning of all sensors according to the manufacturer’s
recommendations, taking into consideration the number of automatic sensors and manual call points;
the inspection of all of the sensors can be broken down and split up between the six-month (in case
of an agreement), and quarterly reviews for maintenance, if these sensors in 50–50 % (or 25–25 %)
is checked,
c) visually inspects that all of the wiring fittings and equipment are securely fixed, undamaged,
and appropriately protected,
d) during visual inspection and with the consideration of the data supplied by the operator,
verifies whether any changes have occurred in the designation, use, technology, building structures,
and building elements of the building or premises, that would influence the correct operation of the
fire alarm — particularly the correct placement of the automatic sensors, manual call points, audible
warning systems, and light-signalling devices.

(3) During the extraordinary review and maintenance, the operator shall ensure that the person
trained to perform review and maintenance, has carried out the specifications set forth in
paragraphs (4)–(5), and in Article 258(1)–(4).

(4) After a fire event

a) – regardless of whether or not the fire alarm device signalled it, a comprehensive visual
inspection of the fire location and its surrounding area should be made to see whether any damage
or error occurred that would affect the operation of the device,
b) it must be reviewed whether the fire alarm device detected the fire, and whether it displayed
it in appropriate format and with appropriate detail,
c) it must be reviewed whether the fire alarm device performed the necessary operations –
control, audible warning, transmission of alarm, and
d) if, during the inspection, damage to the equipment, error, or changes requiring intervention
were detected, the required repair or replacement must be performed while complying with the
conditions set forth in the law.

(5) In case of a false alarm

a) it must be examined what objective and subjective circumstances have led to the false alarm,
 130

b) if the circumstance for the false alarm can be determined, recommendation must be made to
eliminate it,
c) in order to prevent the development of a circumstance that causes a false alarm, the required
conversion, repair, or replacement must be performed, while complying with the conditions set
forth in the law.

Article 258

(1) In case of failure of the fire alarm

a) it must be examined what circumstances, causes have led to the failure,
b) it must be examined what consequences the failure had on the operation of the fire alarm
device, and
c) conversion, repair, replacement must be performed to eliminate the error, while complying
with the conditions set forth in the law.

(2) In case the fire alarm device changes, a regular annual review must be performed, related to
the changed sections and areas.

(3) After a complete shutdown of over 30 days (hereinafter referred to as: long shutdown), the
regular annual review must be performed.

(4) After a contract with a new maintenance service provider

a) the existence of the necessary documents must be verified
b) the regular annual review must be performed.

(5) The results of the inspection, review learned must be recorded in the operation log with the
documentation. If those involved – surveillance person at the fire alarm centre, person entrusted
with the investigation, person doing the maintenance – would like additional interventions
regarding the observations or recommendations noted about the operation or operability of the
equipment, they can request this in writing to the competent person authorised for the intervention.

(6) The daily inspection may also be recorded electronically, if it is eligible for following up on
the responsibility.

Article 259

(1) The operator designates a person (hereinafter “responsible person”) to verify that the fire
alarm is operated correctly, and the personnel, environmental, and technical conditions are met, and
ensures compliance to the prescribed inspections, as well as eliminates the deficiencies discovered
during the inspections.

(2) The operator ensures that the regular and extraordinary review and maintenance are
performed, as well as eliminates the deficiencies discovered.

(3) The responsible person performs the inspections at determined intervals, and taking into
consideration the results of the inspection, and reports the deficiencies in writing, in a verified
manner, to the manager who is authorised to take interventionary measures.

(4) The person performing the inspection and maintenance performs the inspection and
maintenance according to the contract for the services, at determined intervals, and taking into
consideration the results of the inspection, reports the deficiencies in writing, in a verified manner,
 131

to the manager who is authorised to take interventionary measures, and in the event of a
commission from the operator, performs the repairs and replacements.

(5) In the event of derogation from the contract for the services of review and maintenance, or
in case of ignoring or violating the contents of it, the fire alarm device shall not be considered as
having undergone a review and maintenance.

(6) The maintenance and, if needed, repair of the installed fire alarm device should be
performed according to the instructions of the law, and the manufacturer.

Article 260

(1) During the review of the fire alarm device, the person performing the review
a) inspects the voice and light signals of the centre,
b) inspects the functioning of the control buttons of the fire alarm centre,
c) after the primary power supply is cut off, inspects whether the fire alarm centre is indicating
the error correctly,
d) after the primary power supply is reconnected, removes the battery (batteries) and inspects
whether the centre signals the error correctly,
e) during the test defined in c) and d) verifies the operability of the fire alarm centre,
f) simulates failure conditions (electrical short circuit, interruption, ground fault) on all of the
circuits monitored by the fire alarm centre, and checks whether the centre adequately signals the
errors on each signalling circuit, on the sound and light-signalling control outputs, and other outputs
(remote surveillance, extinguisher surveillance), and
g) inspects the condition of the fuses according to the compliance (type/value) specified by the
manufacturer.

(2) When inspecting energy supply, the person performing the inspection
a) visually inspects whether the batteries have swollen, whether there electrolyte leakage,
whether the connections have loosened, or whether connections are secure, and whether there is no
overheated cell, which would indicate failure of the batteries,
b) inspects the charge through measurements, during which
ba) it verifies that in the past 24 hours the centre has only worked with resting load,
bb) measures the voltage at the terminals (batteries) attached, where the measured value must
be between 13.5–13.8V, and in case of two batteries installed in the row, it must be 27–27.6V,
c) inspects the AC adapter, during which a full alarm load must be simulated after
discontinuing the battery (batteries), then verifies that the fire alarm centre correctly, and
d) checks the age of the battery; a battery older than 4 years must be replaced.

(3) In case of inspecting automatic sensors, the person performing the inspection
a) examines whether it is mechanically damaged or contaminated (not painted, partially or fully
obstructed, covered) and
b) evaluating the environmental changes, determines whether the sensor’s correct operation is
ensured, whether its type meets the environment’s fire hazards, protection properties, and potential
fire properties. When inspecting the operability of the sensor, it is examined whether the device
connects to the fire alarm system adequately, and whether it is able to signal alarm, whether the
materials and substances used during the inspections fit in with the recommendations of the
manufacturer of the sensor, and whether they are such that do not harm either the sensor or to the
environment.

(4) When inspecting the functionality of manual call points, the person performing the
inspection
 132

a) visually verifies whether the manual call point is damaged, whether it is installed in the
correct position, whether it is well visible and easily accessible,
b) with impression of is plastic tile (adjustable type), with the exception of the breaking glass
(glass breaking type) or operated by the test key used for inspection, the manual call point verifies
that the fire alarm centre is able to receive its signals, and
c) in case of outdoors application, it verifies in an explosive environment, that the closure did
not become injured at the cable entry or cover.

(5) Entry tools (monitor, traditional loop positioner), or during testing of the functionality of
modules, the person performing the inspection
a) inspects the contacts connecting to the module, individually signalling, whether the centre is
able to sense the signal, and
b) if multiple contacts, tools are connecting to the module, inspects whether the conditions for
limiting the effect of errors are fulfilled.

(6) When inspecting controls and their operability, the person performing the inspection
a) examines whether output devices are activated at the correct location, time and for the
correct duration, as a result of the effect of input events in the fire alarm centre’s configuration,
b) in case of supervised output, in addition to the functionality of the output, also inspects
whether the centre is able to adequately signal output error or cable error (wiring short
circuit/interruption, or absent operating power supply),
c) verifies outputs that cannot be activated during inspections, in writing with the operator or
user of the building, facility; depending on the given function, these outputs may be disabled for the
duration of the inspection or may be inspected using an artificial load, however, their operability
must be inspected once a year, in some manner.

Article 261

(1) When inspecting sound and light-signalling devices, the person performing the inspection
a) inspects whether the sound and light-signalling devices are mechanically injured and
contaminated, whether they are in correct position according to the protocol, and whether any of the
modifications of the building, such as new walls, partitions, or shelves have reduced their
effectiveness,
b) prior to the practical test of the sound and light-signalling devices, confirms with the person
responsible for the facility, the operator or user of the building that the inspections will not disturb
the occupants,
c) inspects whether the centre is able to signal error in the device-controlling output in the event
of a supervised output,
d) inspects during the course of the inspections whether all sound signals are working and
whether they sound similar audio samples,
e) inspects whether all of the light-signalling devices is functioning, whether their lenses are
clear, and not covered.

(2) When inspecting alarm and error signalling devices or conduit actuator outputs, the person
performing the inspections
a) notifies the remote surveillance, prior to starting the inspection, of the start of the inspection,
and its expected duration, and stops signal transmission during the inspections,
b) authorises transmission again after finishing the inspection of other partial elements of the
fire alarm device, of which the remote surveillance supplier must be notified, and afterwards
verifies — with the confirmation of the remote surveillance — that the alarm and error transmitting
device or conduit correctly transmits the fire alarm signals or error signals of the system, and that
the remote surveillance is able to receive the signals,
 133

c) if the remote surveillance is not only receiving combined alarm and error transmissions, in
that case all transmissions must be inspected,
d) after the inspections have occurred, the remote surveillance shall consider all signals
incoming from the relevant location to be live signals.

(3) When inspecting remote control, remote signalling units, printers, the person performing the
inspection verifies that
a) the remote controller and all of the functions of the remote signal controls can be sufficiently
performed, the displays are well visible and adequately legible,
b) the printer prints out each character correctly and legibly (printer internal test mode), and
c) that when the signals occur the printer functions correctly.

(4) The inspection of the auxiliary power supplies corresponds with the inspection of the power
supply and batteries of the fire alarm centre.

(5) False alarms may be caused by

a) an environmental circumstance or activity, which provokes the same effect (alarm status)
and is similar to the fire characteristics, and
b) contamination of the automatic sensor,
c) failure, destruction of the device as a result of physical, electrical, or electromagnetic effect,
which provokes the same effect as the alarm status,
d) well-intentioned operation of the manual call point,
e) intentionally misleading, malicious or accidental operation of the manual call point, or
f) other reasons that cannot be classified under Points a)–e).

Article 262

(1) The operator is required to review the entire installed fire extinguisher system at least once
annually, and to perform maintenance tasks.

(2) During the course of the review, and with consideration of the manufacturer’s instructions,
the following must be inspected:
a) the general condition of the installed fire extinguisher system,
b) the environment of the installed fire extinguisher in relation to its operation,
c) the extinguisher substance quantity with monitoring of its volume, mass or pressure
parameters,
d) the operation of the starting, signalling and supplemental equipment,
e) the quantity of the backup extinguisher substance and other backup materials,
f) the due date of repeated inspections related to the installed fire extinguisher, but not under
maintenance tasks,
g) performance of the operator maintenance tasks,
h) the operation log,
i) the operability of the installed fire extinguisher with operation tests,
j) signal transmissions, and
k) if foam-forming substances or foam solution is being used, its quality according to the
relevant technical requirement.

(3) During the course of the maintenance, the replacement of the unsealed pipes, couplings
must be performed, and if the maintenance person detects the inoperability of the installed fire
alarm system, which he/she is unable to repair, he/she must notify the operator of this in writing.

127. Inspection and maintenance of fire extinguishers

 134

Article 263

(1) The maintenance of fire extinguishers may only be performed by a maintenance

organisation complying with the requirements of law and registered with the authorities, or a
reviewer in contractual relationship with such a maintenance organisation.

(2) The maintenance of the fire extinguisher may be performed by a maintenance person
having a relevant valid fire safety certificate.

Article 264

(1) The maintenance person or its representative shall inspect the fire extinguisher regularly,
but at least every quarter, in terms of
a) whether it is located at the prescribed standby location,
b) whether it is safely attached,
c) whether it is visible,
d) whether is Hungarian instructions for use are legible opposite of the fire extinguisher,
e) whether its use is unobstructed,
f) whether all of its pressure meter and signalling instruments are found in the operating
zone,
g) whether it is supplied with complete fittings,
h) whether its metal or plastic seal, label verifying maintenance, and the NDDM
identification label of the maintenance organisation is undamaged,
i) whether its maintenance is due,
j) whether the safety symbol indicating its standby location is visible and recognisable, and
k) whether its condition is perfect, in normal working condition.

(2) The inspection may also be performed by a maintenance organisation complying with the
requirements of law and registered with the authorities, or a reviewer in contractual relationship
with such a maintenance organisation.

(3) If the maintenance persons discovers a deficiency during the inspection, he/she ensures
that it is eliminated.

(4) The intervals specified in paragraph (1) must be reduced to 1 month if it is justified by an
environmental circumstance or other hazard.

(5) The maintenance person provides maintenance of the standby fire extinguishers, within
the intervals determined in the table of Annex 18, and the refilling of the partially or fully emptied
fire extinguishers.

(6) The cycle times are calculated, in the event of basic maintenance, from the last
maintenance, in the event of first maintenance from the manufacture date or final inspection date,
and in the event of interim and full maintenance from the manufacture date displayed on the fire
extinguisher. If the manufacture date only displays the year, the manufacture date is considered 31
January of the given year, if the year and quarter of the manufacture date is displayed, the
manufacture date is considered the last day of the first month of the given quarter.

(7) The maintenance person keeps an operation log of the fire extinguishers and inspections
performed, as well as a fire protection operation log of the maintenance tasks of the fire
extinguisher, which contains
 135

a) the name and address of the facility,

b) the fire extinguisher signal type,
c) the clear identification of the fire extinguishers by indicating its standby location or fire
extinguisher serial number,
d) inspection or maintenance level of the fire extinguishers (inspection, basic maintenance,
interim maintenance, full maintenance) and date,
e) the name and signature of the person performing the inspection or maintenance.

Article 265

(1) The lifespan of the fire extinguishers and parts may not exceed 20 years, with the
exception of fire extinguishers using carbon dioxide or gas cylinders.

(2) A fire extinguisher of 25 kg and larger filling volume may be kept on standby for more
than 20 years after its manufacture with the specialised statement issued by an expert registered as
a fire safety expert in the area of fire extinguishers. The lifespan can be extended by five years
twice, after the 20th year of operation.

(3) The disposal of the fire extinguisher is the responsibility of the owner.

128. Monitoring of fire extinguisher water sources

Article 266

The organisation in charge of operating the fire water network is responsible for the
operability of the fire extinguisher water sources, their accessibility, frost protection, regular
inspections, maintenance, repairs and pressure tests (in the scope of this sub-heading, hereinafter
referred to as: review).

Article 267

(1) The review may be performed by a person with a valid fire safety certificate for the review
of fire extinguisher water resources, with the exception of the regular inspection of wall fire
hydrant cabinets.

(2) The organisation responsible for maintaining the fire water network in working condition
ensures that the deficiencies discovered during the review are eliminated, taking immediate
measures to repair, or if needed, replace the faulty fire water resources and its fittings.

(3) The organisation responsible for maintaining the fire water network in working condition
maintains a record of the fire extinguisher water resources. Maintaining the record is the
responsibility of the person performing the inspection.

(4) The record maintained about the fire extinguisher water resources contains
a) a clear identification of the fire extinguisher resource,
b) the date of the inspection,
c) the name of the person performing the inspection and its certificate number, and
d) the description and results of the review.

Article 268
 136

During the review of the fire extinguisher resources, the person performing the review shall,
in each case,
a) verify
aa) the existence of the fire extinguisher water resource signs, correctness and soundness,
ab) the existence of the required labels, signals, and their legibility,
ac) the accessibility of the (open-air) fire extinguisher resources all year round with a fire
engine vehicle, the accessibility of the fittings, and the intended usability of the fittings and
accessories,
ad) the soundness of the anti-corrosion protection,
b) perform
ba) the flushing of the network in case of fire extinguisher water resources operating from a
water network, until the appearance of water free from mechanical contaminants, and
bb) written notification of the organisation responsible for maintaining it in good working
order, in case of corrosion damage.

Article 269

(1) For wall fire hydrants and cabinets designed with dry rising hose (hereinafter “dry fire
water mains system”), inspection is required at least every six months and pressure test is required
every five years.

(2) During the review of the six-month inspection of the dry fire water mains system, the
person performing the review shall inspect, in addition to the general tasks set forth in Article 268,
a) the unobstructed accessibility of the entry point by the fire engine vehicle,
b) the presence of 2 “B” port terminals at the entry point of the dry fire water hose,
c) the unobstructed accessibility of the cabinets,
d) the appropriate and correct operation of the doors,
e) the soundness of the fittings, and their operability,
f) the presence of the fire hydrant and attached “C” port terminal in the cabinet, and the
presence of the closing terminal cap,
g) in case of a cabinet-free design, its unobstructed accessibility, the presence of closing
devices, port terminals, and terminal caps, and
h) the inability to remove air from the pipe.

(3) The person performing the review shall notify the organisation responsible for
maintaining the fire water resource in working condition, in writing, of any discovered
deficiencies, or shall eliminate these.

(4) The person performing the review shall remove all objects that do not belong there, from
the fire hydrant cabinet.

(5) The pressure test of the entire dry fire water mains system will take place every 5 years
with water, the value of the pressure test, measured at the entry port, is 1.5 Mpa, minimal leakage
is allowed at the closing devices is allowed.

(6) During the six-month review of dry fire water mains system designed for the protection of
basement level and difficult to reach locations, in addition to general tasks, the person performing
the review shall also inspect the presence and compliance of connection options prescribed by the
fire protection authority.

Article 270
 137

(1) In case of underground and aboveground fire hydrants, the presence of the prescribed
quantity of fire water must be verified during the entry into service procedure of buildings and
structures, with a flow measurement report, taken of the water output of hydrants, at least six
months before the submission of the application, performed at the least favourable period of
consumption. The measurement must be performed with simultaneous operation of the fire
hydrants within a 100 m perimeter of the building or structure. If the required amount of fire water
was supplied from both a water reservoir and a water network, the flow measurement applies only
to the water quantity taken from the water network.

(2) Underground and aboveground fire hydrants must be reviewed at least every six months
according to the specifications of the manufacturer, and based on the general tasks determined in
Article 268, and a full review must be performed annually.

(3) During the annual full review of aboveground hydrants, in addition to the tasks of the six-
month review, the person performing the review must inspect the following:
a) the condition and attachment of the port terminals,
b) the soundness and condition of the seals,
c) the condition of terminal caps, and their repairability,
d) the soundness and condition of the seal, in case of terminal caps with seals,
e) the existence of insurance for the event of loss,
f) the condition of the safe house, houses, their ability to be opened/closed,
g) the operability of the fire hydrant with the operation of the fire hydrant valve after the
terminal caps are removed,
h) the static pressure measured in the fire hydrant,
i) the flow pressure of the fire hydrant at the 200 mm2 outflow cross-section or the water
output of the fire hydrant, and
j) the operation of the water-removing system.

(4) During the six-month review of the underground fire hydrants, in addition to the general
tasks set forth in Article 268, the person performing the review shall also perform
a) the cleaning of the fire hydrant surroundings,
b) the verification that the fire hydrant cabinet can be opened,
c) the cleaning of the fire hydrant cabinet,
d) the inspection of the condition of the head assembly protection cover or protective cap, and
its ability to be open it with an underground fire hydrant key,
e) the inspection of the house and valve for leakage,
f) the inspection of the water-removing system, and
g) the greasing of the connecting thread.

(5) In case of underground fire hydrant cabinets, the open cover may not prevent the fire
hydrant from being able to be operated.

(6) During the full annual review of the underground fire hydrants, the in addition to the tasks
of the six-month review, the person performing the review shall also inspect
a) the condition of the coupling ball, the soundness of the thread with a fitting test, and the
condition of the sealing surface,
b) the functioning of the fire hydrant,
c) static pressure measured in the fire hydrant,
d) the outflow pressure of the fire hydrant at the 200 mm2 outflow cross-section or the water
output of the fire hydrant, and
e) the operation of the water-removing system.
 138

(7) The review of the wall fire hydrant cabinets must meet the relevant technical requirements
or must provide a level of safety that is at least equal.

Article 271

(1) The six-month review and annual full review of the cabinet assembly and its fittings is the
responsibility of the organisation responsible for maintaining them in working order.

(2) The frequency of the review shall be determined with consideration of the environmental
conditions of the given cabinet, and the fire hazards and risks. The review, performed at least
every six months, shall extend, in addition to the general tasks set forth in Article 268, to the
following:
a) whether the cabinet assembly satisfies the related technical requirements,
b) whether the location of the cabinet assembly is labelled in a well-visible manner,
c) in case of a wall suspension, whether the suspension is rigid, and sufficient for the
purpose,
d) whether the cabinet assembly is free of damage, and its door able to be easily opened,
e) whether the prescribed fittings and accessories are present,
f) whether the fittings and accessories are attached, and
g) whether there is an observable deficiency, caused by corrosion or other damage on the
cabinet assembly, or on the fittings, accessories therein.

(3) The person performing the review shall verify that the stored assemblies, accessories, and
cabinet assembly are free of damage, that the watertight door, positioned as an accessory, folds
over the flat hoses, and during the folding over, visually inspects the condition of the hose, and
notifies the organisation responsible for maintaining working order of any corroded or damaged
fittings and accessories.

(4) During the annual full review, in addition to the general tasks set forth in Article 268 and
the six-month tasks set forth in paragraphs (2)–(3), the person performing the review shall
a) inspect
aa) the condition of the fittings and accessories placed in the cabinet assembly,
ab) that the underground or aboveground fire hydrant key or universal terminal key is
suitable, and safely usable by performing a practical test; abnormal deformation or crack is not
allowed on the keys,
ac) that the standpipe is operable, and the condition of the referrals terminal,
ad) safe and easy operability of the nozzle,
b) perform the prescribed maintenance on the cabinet assembly and fittings, accessories, and
c) notify the organisation responsible for maintaining working order, in writing, of any
fittings or accessories deemed unacceptable.

Article 272

The standpipe, pressure hose assembly, and referrals terminal must undergo a pressure test
every 5 years.

Article 273

The standpipe, positioned with the underground fire hydrant, must be inspected with a
fitting test for the soundness of the connecting thread, during the pressure test performed every
five years, and a leakage test must be performed on the standpipe assembled vertically on a nozzle
similar to the discharge nozzle of the underground fire hydrant, with closed and open condition of
 139

the fittings, with 1.0 MPa pressurised water, in open case with closed terminal cap on the nozzles.
The test is successful if there is no leakage detected during a 2-minute test on the outlet branches
and other parts of the standpipe.

Article 274

(1) The six-month review of basins, containers (hereinafter jointly “water reservoirs”) and
other water resources, and five-year full review is the responsibility of the responsible
organisation. Furthermore, the organisation shall also perform the pressure test of the accessories
that are exposed to pressure during use.

(2) During the six-month review, in addition to the general tasks set forth in Article 268, the
person performing the review, shall also inspect the quantity of fire water, the condition of the
fittings used for refilling, the condition of the inlet conduit, the operability of the foot valves, and
in case of heated reservoirs, the functioning of the heating system.

(3) If needed, the person performing the review shall notify the organisation responsible for
maintaining working order, in writing, of the growth of algae or mud in the fire water, and of
detection of large-scale leakage.

(4) If needed, the person performing the review shall notify the organisation responsible for
maintaining working order, in writing, of the need for corrosion protection in case of metal
containers.

Article 275

(1) In case of reservoirs, in addition to the general and six-month tasks, the person
performing the review, during the course of performing the five-year full review, shall perform
a) cleaning of the reservoir,
b) repair of the structure and insulation of the reservoir, as needed,
c) the pressure test of the inlet conduit,
d) painting of the metal structures, and
e) refilling of the reservoir, and testing of the fittings.

(2) The pressure test of the inlet conduit shall be performed with water on the closed inlet
conduit without strainer, the test pressure value is 1.5 Mpa, its duration is 5 minutes. During the
pressure test, leakage at the fittings is not allowed.

(3) In case of other reservoirs, the six-month review of the presence of the inlet pipe, its
maintenance, the presence of required water backup for the extinguishing of fire, and accessibility
of the outflow nozzle for removing water, is the responsibility of the maintenance organisation.

(4) During review of natural water resources, as fire water resources, the regulations must be
applied depending on the design.

129. Periodical fire protection review of low-voltage, high-current electrical equipment

Article 276

(1) Periodical fire protection review extends to residential buildings — with the exception of
overcurrent protection circuits not rated more than 32 A per phase — community, industrial,
 140

agricultural, and warehouse facilities, and furthermore, campers, exhibits, markets, and other
temporary or transferable structures, as well as the following electrical equipment of harbours:
a) circuits not exceeding voltage rated 1 000 V in case of alternating current, and not
exceeding 1 500 V in case of continuous current,
b) all circuits that originate from a current of at least 1 000 V from an electrical equipment,
but operate at a current higher than 1 000 V, except for the internal circuit of the equipment, in
particular discharge lamp lighting, electrostatic filter unit circuit, telecommunication, warning
system, energy supply network, with fixed transmission power control, and
c) all consumer equipment placed outdoors.

(2) The provisions of the sub-heading does not apply

a) to required inspections prior to or following the start-up of new equipment,
b) (electrical power supply distribution networks, track centre lines, vehicle electrical
equipment, and subsurface electrical equipment of mines, furthermore portable equipment in which
the power source is part of the equipment.)

(3) This sub-heading does not apply to pharmaceutical equipment that use electrical power for
pharmaceutical treatment, and furthermore, it does not apply to electric traction devices, including
electrical structures of railway vehicles and warning devices, electrical structures of automobiles,
including electric cars, electrical structures of ships, mobile and fixed off-shore installations,
electrical structures of airplanes, and street lighting electrical equipment, which are part of the
public network.

Article 277

(1) If the law does not provide otherwise, after the use of the electrical equipment, the
operator of the equipment shall order the fire protection review of the electrical equipment,
a) at least every 3 years, in case of locations or outdoor spaces used for the production,
processing, storage, and use of explosive materials of over 300 kg or 300 L quantities,
b) at least every 6 years in other cases
and shall eliminate any discovered deficiencies by the deadline specified by the reviewer in
the qualification document, demonstrating this fact with credible evidence.

(2) The fire protection review should be considered based on the calendar date.

(3) During the course of conversion or change in designation for a facility or operating licence
or submission, the operator of the equipment shall order a fire protection review of the electrical
equipment placed in the building, if the law requires more frequent reviews for the new designation.

(4) The fire protection review of the electrical equipment, and qualification of the equipment
shall take place according to the technical requirements relevant at the time of erection.

(5) Evaluation of the electrical equipment’s environment and clarification that the location is
classified as an explosive zone, is part of the review.

(6) The review also extends to portable equipment, which are regularly used, due to the
technology, according to the statement of the operator.

130. Periodical fire protection review of protection against electrostatic charge and discharge

Article 278
 141

(1) The protection against electrostatic charge is sufficient if the design, establishment,
operation and maintenance is performed according to relevant technical requirements, and if the
reviewer, after performing the review, considers the protection against electrostatic charge to be
appropriate.

(2) Performing the review is mandatory

a) prior to start-up,
b) after conversion or expansion,
c) after a fire event,
d) after a change in the technology,
e) at least every 3 years in the case of the electrostatic protection of an existing structure, or
outdoor area if a shorter period is not specified by the manufacturer or installer in the technical
description, documentation or installation technology documentation.

(3) During the review, the person performing the review shall examine the protection against
electrostatic charge in terms of
a) solutions, resources, interventions,
b) electrostatic grounding, and
c) appropriate coverings.

(4) The person performing the review prepares a qualification document about the review,
which includes
a) the date of the review and previous inspection,
b) description of the examined facility with clear determination of the object of the inspection,
c) the utilised standards, certifications, provisions, technical guidelines,
d) the circumstances of measurement, and the meter data,
e) the measured results,
f) evaluation of measured results and electrostatic risk evaluation,
g) qualifying opinion, with justification, of the appropriateness of the object of the inspection
a list of deficiencies, necessary interventions for correcting these, and
h) the name, headquarters, signature, qualifications, professional certification number, of the
person performing the review, in case of an organisation, also the headquarters of the organisation
and the company signature, in addition to the above.

(5) Periodical fire protection review against electrostatic charge and discharge should be
considered based on the calendar date.

131. Review of lightning protection

Article 279

In case of buildings and outdoor areas not subject to the standard norm lightning protection,
the lightning protection review shall take place
a) after establishment, before transfer,
b) according to the time intervals specified in this Decree, or
c) after lightning protection, or the conversion/expansion of the structure, or after a special
event listed in the relevant technical requirement.

Article 280
 142

(1) The periodical review of the existing lightning protection not subject to the standard norm
must be performed according to the relevant technical requirements present at the time of
establishment.

(2) If the law does not provide otherwise, the existing lightning protection not subject to the
standard norm must be reviewed, in terms of fire protection aspects,
a) at least every 3 years, in case of locations or outdoor areas used for the production,
processing, storage, and use of explosive materials of over 300 kg or 300 L quantities,
b) at least every 6 years in other cases,
c) after lightning protection (LPS and SPM) or after any expansion, conversion, repair of the
protected building or structure, or changes to its environment, which may modify the effectiveness
the lightning protection,
d) after injury, severe corrosion, lightning strike, and after detection of any event that may
negatively affect the effectiveness of the lightning protection,
and any discovered deficiencies must be eliminated by the deadline specified in the
qualification document, demonstrating this fact with credible evidence.

Article 281

(1) In case of buildings or outdoor areas not subject to the standard norm of lightning
protection, the lightning protection review must be performed
a) during establishment, prior to covering areas that will be later covered,
b) after establishment, before transfer,
c) according to the time intervals specified in the Table in Annex 18, and
d) after lightning protection, or after any conversion or expansion of the structure, and after a
special event listed in the relevant technical requirements.

(2) (3) The lightning protection review should be considered based on the calendar date.

XXI.
FIRE PROTECTION TECHNICAL COMPLIANCE MANUAL

132. General requirements

Article 282

(1) The owner of the structure, or in case of an apartment building, the apartment building,
must obtain a Fire Protection Technical Compliance Manual (hereinafter “TMMK”) 60 days after
occupation of the structure for
a) apartment buildings taller than five levels,
b) community buildings larger than 1 000 m2
c) industrial buildings larger than 1 000 m2,
d) agricultural buildings larger than 3 000 m2,
e) storage buildings larger than 2 000 m2, or
f) road tunnels and underground railway qualifying as special structures.

(2) Any changes affecting the building’s fire protection status must be updated in the TMMK,
must be displayed, within 30 days of the change.

(3) In case of several owners, the partner owners are jointly and severally responsible for the
content of TMMK.
 143

(4) TMMK is an attachment to the building, and in case of change in ownership, it must be
transferred to the new owner.

(5) The owner is required to provide access to TMMK for the operator.

Article 283

(1) The TMMK must be prepared and maintained in electronic or printed format, and retained
on the premises.

(2) The owner is required to perform a review of the structure in the 5th year after occupation
of the building, and afterwards at five-year intervals, demonstrating that its establishment and
condition comply with the contents of the TMMK, according to the following:
a) the structure complies with the building permit plan,
b) changes and conversions comply with relevant laws and regulations, and
c) the changes and conversions were recorded in the TMMK.

Article 284

The TMMK contains

a) the fire protection, establishment requirements of the building:
aa) the architectural design with the fire protection requirements,
ab) the design of the electrical system and lightning protection,
ac) the design of special HVAC systems,
b) the specifications of the fire alarm, fire extinguisher, alarm system, heat and smoke
protection,
c) attached drawing,
d) name, address, and entitlement of the preparer of the TMMK, and
e) document verifying the performance of the five-year review.

XXII.
CLOSING PROVISIONS

Article 285

This Decree shall enter into force 90 days after it is published.

Article 286

(1) Following the entry into force of this Decree, a fire protection protocol document prepared
according to the regulations of Decree 28/2011 (IX. 6.) on the National Fire Protection Regulation
may also be submitted in subsequently initiated proceedings, if the architectural design contract
regarding its preparation was concluded no earlier than 180 days prior to the effective date of this
Decree.

(2) The fire alarm transmission according to Article 156(2) shall be implemented by
1 July 2015.

(3) The contents of Article 282 shall be applied in the case of buildings utilised following the
effective date of this Decree.
 144

Article 287

(1) Decree 50/2011 (XII. 20.) BM on the detailed rules of initiation and continuation of fire
protection service activities, is supplemented by Sections 4/A-4/G to the following sub-heading:
“Maintaining the fire extinguisher”:

“4/A. Article (1) The fire extinguisher may not be transferred for maintenance if
a) the parts, extinguisher substance, and technological instruction specified by the
manufacturer is not available,
b) it has been withdrawn from the market or if it was illegally marketed,
c) it is a non-refillable fire extinguisher,
d) its manufacturer, or its date of manufacture cannot be determined (non-legible), or
e) its lifespan has reached the lifespan specified under the Table in Annex 9.

(2) The maintenance person must notify, in writing, the organisation responsible for working
order, if the maintenance of the fire extinguisher cannot be performed.

4/B. Article (1) The completed maintenance is indicated by a label verifying that the
maintenance has been performed, and the attached identification symbol by the National Directorate
for Disaster Management.

(2) The NDDM identification symbol must be attached in such a way as to partially cover the
label verifying that the maintenance has occurred, but as not to cover the data or the symbols of the
manufacturer. The NDDM identification symbol may only be used in combination with the
maintenance verification symbol, and only one time.

(3) During maintenance, the previously used maintenance verification labels are removed,
with the exception of the last interim or full maintenance and manufacturer’s final inspection, or the
labels that verify refilling, together with the NDDM identification symbol.

(4) The label verifying maintenance shall contain

a) the word “MAINTAINED”,
b) the name and address of the maintenance organisation,
c) the signature of the maintenance person or a symbol equivalent to a signature,
d) the nature of the maintenance (basic, interim, full maintenance, re-installation),
e) the date of this maintenance (year, month, day), and
f) the date of the next scheduled maintenance (year, month, day).

(5) The maintenance verification label

a) is self-adhesive,
b) contains common language,
c) can be read unaided (font is a minimum of 3 mm),
d) may be supplemented with a logo, emblem, and English or German text according to the
data listed in paragraph (4)(f), and
e) is of a material with a lifespan that corresponds to the maintenance term of validity.

4/C. Article (1) The maintenance organisation must contain, at its maintenance workshop, all
general and special equipment, technical guidance, and technical descriptions necessary for
performing its duties.
 145

(2) The storage and transloading of the extinguisher powder, and operations requiring wet
technology may not be performing in the same room.

(3) The measurement and inspection tools and equipment used by the maintenance
organisation must comply with the technical requirements of measurement, and the regulatory
instructions regarding measurement. The maintenance organisation shall obtain the following:
a) scale appropriate in capacity for the mass, and pitch to be measured, and in case of a fuel
cylinder, at most 1 g pitch and 1 g accuracy,
b) lighted tank inspection mirror,
c) pressure meter corresponding to the pressure to be measured – at an occurrence of 1.6 %,
d) magnifying glass,
e) tool suitable for monitoring the threads,
f) pressure test equipment (for testing the tank, head assembly, powder hose),
g) closed system powder filling,
h) humidity meter,
i) safety valve adjustment, if needed,
j) torque key,
k) calliper,
l) tools provided by the manufacturer,
m) wrenches, pliers,
n) clamping/locking device,
o) identifiable imprinted seal holder and
p) machine, equipment suitable for container drying.

(4) Maintenance may take place at the maintenance organisation’s maintenance workshop, in
a mobile service equipped according to this Decree, or at the location provided by the organisation
responsible for working order, if the conditions set forth in this Decree are met.

4/D. Article (1) The maintenance person verifies whether the fire extinguisher is suitable for
use, and does not belong to the fire extinguishers listed in 4/A.

(2) The maintenance person deems the fire extinguisher unsuitable for being held in reserve if
a) a degree of damage is observed on the tank or fittings of the fire extinguisher, which is a
risk to the safe use and reserve status of the extinguisher,
b) the fire extinguisher may be dangerous to use,
c) the fire extinguisher is not operable, due to its condition, or
d) the degree of loss of the propellant’s filling or decrease in pressure exceeds the value
provided by the manufacturer.

(3) If the fire extinguisher error cannot be corrected on site, the maintenance person attaches a
label to the fire extinguisher, in a well visible location, including the data of the maintenance
organisation, date, and the text “REQUIRES MAINTENANCE”, and notifies the organisation
responsible for working order.

(4) For a fire extinguisher that cannot be maintained, or a fire extinguisher belonging to
category 4/A, the maintenance person attaches a label with the text “SCRAP”, and notifies the
organisation responsible for the working order.

(5) If maintenance occurs on site, the maintenance person inspects the attachment of the fire
extinguisher and is other accessories.
 146

(6) The maintenance person notifies the organisation responsible for working order of any
detected errors or damage.

4/E. Article (1) The maintenance person performs at least basic maintenance on the refilled
fire extinguisher, or the subsequent level actions (interim or full maintenance) may also be
performed.

(2) The maintenance person completely empties the partially used fire extinguisher and
disposes of the extinguisher substance.

(3) The refilling of the extinguisher shall take place according to the procedures and
instructions provided by the manufacturer.

(4) The refilled fire extinguisher must show the date of refilling.

(5) When replacing parts, and in case of refilling, only parts and extinguisher substances,
which were provided, approved, or shipped by the manufacturer can be used.

4/F. Article (1) Procedures, during which the extinguisher powder comes into contact with the
atmosphere, may only be performed in spaces where the relative humidity is at most 70 % and the
temperature of the room is at least 15 °C.

(2) Prior to starting operations involving extinguisher powder, the maintenance person shall
ensure that the conditions set forth in paragraph (1) are fulfilled.

(3) In order to prevent different types of extinguisher powder from becoming mixed with one
another or with contaminants, only fire extinguishers using the same type of extinguisher powder
may be disassembled at the same time.

(4) Extinguisher powders with opened packaging, which have not been fully used, must be
locked away from ambient air.

(5) Halon, HCFC, HFC, and fire extinguishers with fillings that are harmful to environmental
elements, in particular to the atmosphere, may not be emptied into the atmosphere. The filling and
unloading operations take place with the use of a closed system process, suitable for retrieval of the
extinguisher substance, and if needed, by regeneration or by rendering the extinguisher substance
harmless.

4/G. Annex (1) Annex 10 contains the basic maintenance operations.

(2) During the interim maintenance, the person performing the maintenance, in addition to the
operations of the basic maintenance,
a) inspects the operability of the pressure indicator on the constant pressure fire extinguisher,
according to the instructions of the manufacturer,
b) empties the fire extinguisher,
c) inspects the extinguisher substance according to the instructions of the manufacturer,
d) thoroughly inspects the fire extinguisher with a magnifying glass,
da) in order to determine corrosion and injury to the closing assembly,
db) the discharge head assembly,
dc) the pressure meter and signalling device,
dd) hose assembly and gun assembly.
 147

e) examines the inside of the tank with a lighting device and mirror, with particular regard to
signs of corrosion, the flawlessness of the internal coating, and integrity of welds, acting according
to the instructions of the manufacturer, and when in doubt, contacts the manufacturer,
f) inspects every closing element, in terms of the connecting thread, shape, size, and coating,
g) permanently marks the riser or fuel cylinder with
ga) the date of maintenance,
gb) name or identification symbol of maintenance organisation, and
gc) signature of maintenance person, and
h) reassembles the fire extinguisher, filling it with the extinguisher substance according to the
instructions of the manufacturer, and completes the assembly.

(3) During the full maintenance, the person performing the maintenance, in addition to the
operations of the basic and interim maintenance,
a) following complete disassembly of the fire extinguisher, disposes of the faulty or expired
parts, and replaces these with new ones,
b) subjects the tank to an appropriate pressure test, according to the indication on the tank,
c) disposes of unmarked tanks,
d) in case of fire extinguishers manufactured according to Standard MSZ 1040, performs the
pressure test, in case of a total volume of up to 25 kg fire extinguisher, in unpainted condition, and
for larger volume fire extinguishers in the vicinity of welds, in pure metal state, except for
da) powder extinguisher tanks manufactured painted,
db) aluminium tanks using carbon dioxide as extinguisher substance, or
dc) tanks with internal coating where the removal of the paint or repainting may damage the
integrity of the coating,
e) subjects the safety valve and all assemblies of the fire extinguisher, which are exposed to
pressure during operation, to a pressure test,
f) inspects the safety assembly taking into consideration the specifications of the manufacturer,
and adjusts or replaces it.

(4) When a full maintenance of the fire extinguisher is due, both the manufacturer’s
instructions and the instructions for refilling must be followed.

(5) If the person performing the maintenance uses water in various procedures, the fire
extinguisher must be completely dried out before refilling.”

(2) Decree 50/2011 (XII. 20.) BM on the detailed rules of initiation and continuation of fire
protection service activities subject to notification, is supplemented by
a) Annex 9 according to Annex 19, and
b) Annex 10 according to Annex 20

Article 288

(1) Decree 28/2011 (IX. 6.) BM on the National Fire Protection Regulation is hereby repealed.

(2) Article 203(6) shall be repealed on 1 July 2015.

Article 289

The draft of this Decree has undergone harmonisation in accordance with Articles 8–10 of
Directive 98/34/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 22 June 1998, laying down a
procedure for the provision of information in the field of technical standards and regulations and of
 148

rules on Information Society services, as amended by Directive 98/48/EC of the European

Parliament and of the Council.

Dr Pintér Sándor
 Annex 1 to BM Decree.../2014 (......)

Table 1 to the sub-heading Determination of Risk

A B C D E
1 Risk class of risk unit Very Low Risk Low Risk Medium Risk High Risk
2 The highest elevation of the risk unit, and 0.00–7.00 7.01-14.00 14.01–30.00 >30.00
in case of a structure with viewing
platform and scaffold, the walking surface
height (m) that is suitable for occupation
by humans,
3 Elevation (m) of lowest building level of 0.00–-3.00 -3.01–-6.00 -6.01–-9.00 > -9.00
risk unit
4 The capacity of the highest elevation of the 1-50 51–300 301–1 500 >1 500
risk unit, as well as the viewing platform,
canopy structure construction, scaffold-like
structure and in case of a level, the capacity
of the structure (persons)

Table 2 to the sub-heading Determination of Risk

A B C
1 The risk at the risk unit Classification of certain
Ability of escape for those at risk unit designations on the basis of
ability to escape (examples)
2 - residence,
- office,
- business,
- only outpatient care,
Independent rescue
- accommodation,
- school for age groups
over 10
Very Low Risk - lodging for persons
typically not limited
 150

during evacuation
(dormitory, hostel,
similar designations),
- museum, exhibit hall,
church, theatre
3 - preschool,
Escape with help
Low Risk - school for ages 6-10,
- forced stay
4 - daycare,
Person to be rescued without preparation Medium Risk - inpatient care,
- nursing home of persons
limited in escape
5 Person to be rescued with preparation or not eligible to be rescued - intensive department,
High Risk - surgery

Table 3 to the sub-heading Determination of Risk

A B
1 Particulars of materials, products, items stored at the risk unit storage area Risk at the risk unit
2 Material classified only as non-flammable and only products and items made from these materials; without Very low risk
combustible packaging and storage device
3 Materials classified as flammable and non-flammable and products, items made from these materials; regardless Low risk
of the fire protection characteristics, and at most 100 L/kg quantity explosive materials.
4 Materials classified as flammable and non-flammable and products and items made from these materials; Medium Risk
regardless of the fire protection characteristics of packaging, material greater than 100 L/kg per storage space,
but belonging to the explosive classification at a quantity of 300 L/kg
5 Materials classified as flammable and non-flammable and products and items made from these materials; High Risk
regardless of the fire protection characteristics of packaging, in a quantity greater than 300 L/kg per storage
space, but at a quantity of 300 L/kg at most per storage space, explosive material.
6 Storage of materials classified as explosive in a quantity greater than 300 K/kg Medium Risk
7 Storage of materials classified as explosive in a quantity greater than 300 L/kg High Risk
8 Vehicle storage, maximum of 10 passenger cars Very Low Risk
9 Vehicle storage, more than 10 passenger cars Low Risk
 151

10 Other vehicle storage trucks, buses, trolleys, and other vehicles Medium Risk
11 Vehicle storage with parking machines or mechanical vehicle storage Medium Risk
12 Rail vehicle storage Medium Risk
13 Aircraft storage – Length of airplane is max. 12 m, trunk width is max. 2 m Low Risk
14 Aircraft storage – Length of airplane >12 m or trunk width > 2 m Medium Risk
15 Grain storage Low Risk

Table 4 to the sub-heading Determination of Risk

A B C
1 Industrial, agricultural designation Characteristics of the designation Risk at the risk unit
2 Livestock farming Without litter Very Low Risk
3 With litter Low Risk
4 Carpentry shop, plant Medium Risk
Wood plant, sawmill, parquet flooring
manufacture
Furniture-making workshop, plant (from wood
and wood-based board materials)
Manufacture of wood-based products
5 Car repair workshop, body shop locksmith shop If parts washing with liquids belonging in fire hazard category I-II is Low Risk
carried out in a qualified closed installation or outdoors, or parts
washing with liquids of fire hazard category I-II is not carried out
6 Other cases Medium Risk
7 Automobile painting, polishing Only with water-based points Low Risk
8 In case of organic solvent paints or use of polish Medium Risk
9 Concrete block and aerated concrete production, Low Risk
brick production, production of ceramics
products
10 Production of bituminous products (insulating Medium Risk
boards, roofing materials)
11 Winemaking Very Low Risk
 152

12 Cement factory Very Low Risk

13 Manufacturing of electrical equipment Medium Risk
14 Paint and varnish production Production of only water-based paints Low Risk
15 Other cases Medium Risk
16 Film studio Low Risk
17 Galvanising plant Very Low Risk
18 Gypsum, gypsum plasterboard, gypsum Very Low Risk
fibreboard manufacture
19 Automobile, vehicle manufacturing Press plant Very Low Risk
20 Body shop Low Risk
21 Assembly plant, polishing plant with only water-based paints Low Risk
22 Assembly plant, polishing plant in other cases Medium Risk
23 Tyre manufacturing Medium Risk
24 Candle manufacturing Medium Risk
25 Wire and cable manufacturing Uninsulated wire production Low Risk
26 Uninsulated cable production Medium Risk
27 Mill Medium Risk
28 Plastic manufacturing moulding Low Risk
29 synthetic fibre production, plastic foam production Medium Risk
30 resin production High Risk
31 Printing office only with water-based ink Low Risk
32 in case of using organic solvents Medium Risk
33 Distillery, liquor production Medium Risk
34 Paper production Cellulose manufacturing Very Low Risk
35 Preparation and base paper production Low Risk
36 Half-finished and finished product manufacturing from base paper, Medium Risk
corrugated paper production, carton production
37 Beer production Low Risk
38 Bakery, bread factory Low Risk
39 Milk plant Milk processing Low Risk
40 Milk and protein production Medium Risk
 153

41 Crop drying Medium Risk

42 Glass production, glass blowing Glass production, lamination, lamination, insulating glass custom Very Low Risk
packaging
43 Glass blowing Low Risk
44 Slaughterhouse Very Low Risk
45 Filling station Low Risk
46 Sewing, tailoring activity Low Risk
47 Dry-cleaning Medium Risk
48 Fruit and vegetable production Low Risk
 154

Annex 2 to Decree …/2014. (… …) BM

Table 1 to the sub-heading Structural Stability in Fire Event
Requirements for the fire classification and fire resistance performance of building structures
A B C D E F G H I J K L
1 Standard risk classification Very Low Risk Low Risk Medium Risk High Risk
2 Basement+ Baseme Baseme Baseme Other Baseme Basement Other Basement Basement Other
ground level, nt+ nt+ nt+ cases nt+ + cases + + cases
Building structure in case of a ground ground ground ground ground ground ground
residential level+ floor floor+ level level+ level level+
building max. 2 max. 2 max. 4 max. 4
basement+gro floors floors stories floors
und
level+attic
3 Weight-bearing walls and bracings, except for D D D C A2 A2 A2 A1 A1 A1 A1
basement level REI 15 REI 30 REI 30 REI 30 REI 45 REI 30 REI 60 REI 90 REI 60 REI 90 REI 120
4 Weight-bearing pillars and bracings, except for D D D C A2 A2 A2 A1 A1 A1 A1
basement level R 15 R 30 R 30 R 30 R 45 R 30 R 60 R 90 R 60 R 90 R 120
5 Basement level weight-bearing walls and A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A1 A1 A1 A1
bracings REI 30 REI 30 REI 30 REI 45 REI 60 REI 45 REI 60 REI 90 REI 60 REI 90 REI 120
6 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A1 A1 A1 A1
Basement pillars and bracings
R 30 R 30 R 30 R 45 R 60 R 45 R 60 R 90 R 60 R 90 R 120
7 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A1 A1 A1 A1
Roof slab above basement level
REI 30 REI 30 REI 30 REI 45 REI 60 REI 45 REI 60 REI 90 REI 60 REI 90 REI 90
Load-
8 D D C A2 A2 A1 A1 A1
bearing Inter-floor and attic floor slab - - -
REI 15 REI 30 REI 30 REI 45 REI 45 REI 60 REI 60 REI 90
building
9 Support structure of roof slab, bracings, and D D D C A2 C A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
structures
roof slab over a surface mass of 60 kg/m2 REI 15 REI 15 REI 15 REI 15 REI 30 REI 30 REI 45 REI 60 REI 45 REI 60 REI 60
10 D D D D A2 D A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
Partition structure of roof slab (up to 60 kg/m2)
REI 15 REI 15 REI 15 REI 15 REI 30 REI 15 REI 30 REI 30 REI 30 REI 45 REI 60
11 Roof structure D D D D D D C C C C C
12 Supporting structures of stairs and stair rest
areas and supporting structures of their walking D D D C A2 A2 A2 A1 A1 A1 A1
surfaces, qualifying as an escape route within R 15 R 30 R 30 R 30 R 45 R 45 R 60 R 90 R 60 R 90 R 90
the building
13 Support structure of entrance stairs on an
A1
escape route
14 Spread of Firewall
fire barrier Basic fire break A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
building structure REI 120 REI 120 REI 120 REI 120 REI 120 REI 180 REI 180 REI 180 REI 240 REI 240 REI 240
structures
19 Standard risk classification Very Low Risk Low Risk Medium Risk High Risk
20 Basement+gro Baseme Baseme Baseme Other Baseme Basement Other Basement Basement Other
 155

und level nt+grou nt+grou nt+grou cases nt+grou + ground cases +ground +ground cases
Building structure nd level nd level nd level nd level level max. level level max.
+2 4 stories 4 stories
stories
15 Fireproof bulkhead D D D C B B A2 A1 A1 A1 A1
EI 15 EI 15 EI 15 EI 15 EI 30 EI 30 EI 30 EI 60 EI 60 EI 60 EI 90
16 Fireproof wall A2 A2 A2
Fireproof basic A2 A2 A2 A2 A1 A1 A1 A1
(R)EI (R)EI (R)EI
structure (R)EI 30 (R)EI 30 (R)EI 30 (R)EI 60 (R)EI 90 (R)EI 60 (R)EI 90 (R)EI 120
30 45 45
17 Fireproof roof A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A1 A1 A1 A1
REI 30 REI 30 REI 30 REI 30 REI 45 REI 45 REI 60 REI 90 REI 60 REI 90 REI 120
18 Spread of Barrier against spread of fire A2 for connecting roof, same fire resistance performance as the requirement for the wall, but at most 90
fire barrier
21 In firewall A2 EI2 90-C
building
22 In fireproof D A2 A2
structures Fireproof
wall EI2 30-C EI2 60-C EI2 90-C
door
23 Elevator shaft
Fireproof According to relevant technical requirements
door
closure
24 Fireproof gap-filling, gap- Same fire resistance performance as the structure passed through, but at most EI 90
closing systems
25 Fireproof linear gap fillers Same fire resistance performance as the connecting structures, but at most EI 90
26 Fireproof closing element EI 30 EI 60 EI 90 EI 60 EI 90
27 Wall covering D s1, d0 D s1, d0 D s1, d0 D s1, d0 C s1, d0 D s1, d0 B s1, d0 A2 B s1,d0 A2 A2
28 Floor covering Dfl s1 Dfl s1 Dfl s1 Dfl s1 Cfl s1 Dfl s1 Bfl s1 A2 Bfl s1 A2 A2
29 Building Subceiling, ceiling covering D s1, d0 D s1,d0 D s1, d0 D s1, d0 C s1, d0 D s1, d0 B s1, d0 A2 B s1,d0 A2 A2
30 structures Subfloor D EI 15 D EI 15 D EI 15 D EI 15 C EI 30 D EI 30 A2 EI 30 A2 EI 60 A2 EI 60 A2 EI 60 A2 EI 90
31 used on Heat and sound insulation, without covering or
escape behind covering B s1,d0 B s1,d0 B s1,d0 B s1,d0 A2 s1,d0 A2s1,d0 A2 s1,d0 A1 A1 A1 A1
routes
 156

Annex 3 to Decree …./2014. (…. …) BM

Table 1 to the sub-heading Fire Separation Distance

A B C D D
1
Building A standard Fire Separation Distance between buildings A and B (m), if building B is standard risk
risk classification classification B
2
Very Low Risk Low Risk Medium Risk High Risk

3 Very Low Risk 3 5 6 7

4 Low Risk 5 6 7 8
5 Medium Risk 6 7 8 9
6 High Risk 7 8 9 10

Table 2 to the sub-heading Fire Separation Distance

A B C D E
1 Fire separation distance between building and storage unit (m),
If the standard risk classification of the building is
2 Very Low Risk Low Risk Medium Risk High Risk
Type of material stored in the storage unit,
flammability characteristics

3 Exclusively non-flammable materials, and products, items made only from No requirement (considering the absence of combustible packaging and
these materials; without combustible material packaging, storage device storage device)
4 Only potentially explosive materials, in an amount over 300 L 10 10 12 14
5 - flammable and non-flammable materials and products, items made from 6 6 8 10
these materials regardless of the flammability characteristics of the
packaging, and potentially explosive materials of an amount up to 300 L
- only non-flammable materials and products, items made only from these
materials with combustible packaging material
- potentially explosive material in an amount up to 300 L
 157

6 Stack, threshing floor, fibre crop storage 50 100 200

Table 3 to the sub-heading Fire Separation Distance

A B
1 Type of material stored in the storage unit, flammability characteristics Fire separation distance from the storage unit (m)

2 Exclusively non-flammable materials, and products, items made only from these materials; No requirement
without combustible material packaging, storage device
3 Only potentially explosive materials, in an amount over 300 L 15
4 - flammable and non-flammable materials and products, items made from these materials 10
regardless of the flammability characteristics of the packaging, and potentially explosive
materials of an amount up to 300 L
- only non-flammable materials and products, items made only from these materials with
combustible packaging material
- potentially explosive material in an amount up to 300 L
5 Stack, threshing floor, fibre crop storage 20
 158

Annex 4 to Decree …../2014. (…. ….) BM

Protective design against the spread of fire at the connection of fire compartments of differing
heights
Table 1 to the sub-heading Connection of Fire Compartments on External Structure of
Buildings

≥ 10,00 m ≥ 10.00 m
Tűzszakaszhatár Fire compartment threshold
 159

Table 2 to the sub-heading Connection of Fire Compartments on External Structures of

Buildings

≥ 5,00 m ≥ 5.00 m
Tűzszakaszhatár Fire compartment threshold
 160

Table 3 to the sub-heading Connection of Fire Compartments on External Structures of

Buildings

< 5,00 m < 5.00 m

≥ 10,00 m ≥ 10.00 m
Tűzszakaszhatár Fire compartment threshold
 161

Table 4 to the sub-heading Connection of Fire Compartments to External Structures of

Buildings
 162

Annex 5 to Decree …../2014. (…. ….) BM

Table 1 to the sub-heading Establishing Fire Compartments

A B C D E F G
2
1 Maximum allowed floor area (m ) of fire compartment, with/without
permanently installed fire extinguisher
2 Risk category of risk unit
3 Designation (function) Very Low Risk
4 If the If the
building’s building’s
standard standard
Low Risk Medium Risk High Risk
risk is Very risk is
Low Risk Low Risk,
Medium
Risk, or
High Risk
5 Residential, resort Residence, resort unit 1 000/- 4 000/- 5 000/- 1 000/-
6 Commercial lodging, 750/1 500 4 000/8 000 3 000/6 000 1 000/1 500
Lodging Typically lodging, dormitory and nursing home for people not limited in
escape
7 Office, Office, administration 1 000/2 000 4 000/8 000 3 000/6 000 1 000/1 500
administration
8 Conference centre 1 000/2 000 4 000/8 000 3 000/6 000 1 000/1 500
9 Daycare - - - 500/750 300/450
10 Preschool - - 1 500/3 000 1 000/1 500 500/750
Education, training Elementary, secondary, higher educational institution, school, research
11 1 000/2 000 4 000/8 000 3 000/6 000 1 000/1 500
institute
12 Special education institution for students limited in escape - - - 1 000/1 500 1 000/1 500
13 Only outpatient care 750/1 500 4 000/8 000 3 000/6 000 1 000/1 500
Healthcare
14 Inpatient care - - - 1000/1500 500/750
15 Social daytime nursing institution (e.g. club for the elderly, daytime care of 1000/1500 500/750
people limited in escape, similar designations)
16 Social Nursing home of people limited in escape (nursing home for elderly, etc.), - - - 1000/1500 500/750
institution providing temporary placement, care, treatment, rehabilitation
17 Nursing home of people not limited in escape 750/1 500 4 000/8 000 4 000/8 000 3 000/4 500 1 000/1 500
18 Religious Church, synagogue, mosque, etc. 1 000/2 000 4 000/8 000 4 000/8 000 3 000/4 500 2 000/3 000
 163

19 Museum, exhibition, collection, library, archives 1 500/3 000 4 000/8 000 5 000/10 000 4 000/6 000 2 000/3 000
Community
20 Theatre, movies, cultural centre, cultural/entertainment designation with 1 000/2 000 4 000/8 000 4 000/8 000 3 000/5 000 1 000/1 500
entertainment,
auditorium
cultural
21 Disco, musical/dance entertainment hall 500/1 000 750/1 500 2 000/4 000 500/750
22 Business, service provider unit 1 000/2 000 4.000/8 000 4 000/8 000 3 000/4 500 1 000/1 500
Commercial,
service provider Store, warehouse, supermarket 1 000/2 000 4.000/8 000 8 000/16 000 7 000/14 000 3 000/6 000
23
24 Sports facility 1 000/2 000 5.000/1 0000 1 5000/30 000 12 000/18 000 -
25 Sports (only) Sports facility, if the risk unit belongs to High Risk category due to its - - - - 2 000/3 000
height
26 Sports facility, if the risk unit belongs to High Risk category not due to its - - - - 10 000/15 000
height
27 Transportation Station, terminal, similar designations 1 000/2 000 4 000/8 000 5 000/10 000 2 000/3 000
28 Penal institution - - 2 000/4 000 1 000/1 500 500/750
Forced stay
29 Psychiatry - - 2 000/4 000 1 000/1 500 500/750

Table 2 to the sub-heading Establishing Fire Compartments

A B C D E
2
1 Building, separate building section incorporating the risk unit of Maximum allowed floor area (m ) of fire compartment
storage designation with/without permanently installed fire extinguisher
Allowed floor area (m3) of fire compartment is 10x the floor area
2 Risk category of risk unit
3 Very Low Low Risk Medium Risk High Risk
Risk
4 Single-storey building, separate building section 10 000/20 000 12 000/24 000 7 000/14 000 -
5 Multi-storey building, separate building section 8 000/16 000 10 000/20 000 5 000/10 000 3 000/6 000
6 Partially or fully basement level fire compartment 4 000/8 000 5 000/10 000 2 500/10 000 1 500/3 000

Table 3 to the sub-heading Establishing Fire Compartments

A B C D E
2
1 Building, separate building section incorporating the risk Maximum allowed floor area (m ) of fire compartment
unit of industrial, agricultural designation with/without permanently installed fire extinguisher
Allowed floor area (m3) of fire compartment is 10x the floor area
2 Risk category of risk unit
3 Very Low Risk Low Risk Medium Risk High Risk
 164

4 Single-storey building, separate building section 8 000/12 000/24 000 10 000/15 000/30 000 5 000/10 000/20 000 1 000/4 000/8 000
5 Multi-storey building, separate building section 4 000/8 000/16 000 7 000/10 000/20 000 4 000/8 000/16 000 1 000/3 000/6 000
6 Partially or fully basement level fire compartment 2 000/4 000/8 000 3 500/5 000/10 000 2 000/4 000/8 000 500/1 500/3 000
 165
Figure 1 to the sub-heading Additional Requirements of Protection Against the Spread
of Fire
Cross-section of barrier against the vertical spread of fire on the façade
Tűzszakasz határ elméleti síkja
Jellemző tűzállósági határérték nélküli, de
A1 - A2 tűzvédelmi osztályú
homlokzatburkolat és hőszigetelés
A tűzgátló szerkezetekre vonatkozó
tűzállósági határérték-követelményeknek
megfelelő szerkezet
Tűzgátló födém
A tűzterjedés elleni gátak geometriai
méreteinek meghatározásakor csak a
tűzgátló szerkezetekre vonatkozó
követelményt kielégítő szerkezetek vehetők
figyelembe
1,3xGH2 + GH1 > l,30m
Annex 6 to Decree …../2014. (…. ….) BM
Theoretical plane of fire compartment
boundary
Façade covering and thermal insulation
without typical fire resistance limit, and fire
classification A1-A2
Structure compliant to fire resistance limit
requirements for fireproof structures
Fireproof slab
When determining the geometrical
dimensions of barriers against the spread of
fire, only structures that meet the
requirements for fireproof structures can be
considered
1.3xGH2 + GH1 > l.30 m
 166
Figure 2 to the sub-heading Additional Requirements of Protection Against the Spread
of Fire
Cross-section of barrier against the horizontal spread of fire on the façade
Tűzszakasz határ elméleti síkja
Tűzállósági határérték nélküli, de A1 - A2
tűzvédelmi osztályú homlokzatburkolat és
hőszigetelés
A tűzterjedés elleni gátak geometriai
méreteinek meghatározásakor csak a
tűzgátló szerkezetekre vonatkozó
követelményt kielégítő szerkezetek vehetők
figyelembe
A homlokzati tűzterjedés elleni gát elemei a
tűzgátló falra vonatkozó tűzvédelmi
követelményeket teljesítsék!
A tűzgátló szerkezetekre vonatkozó
tűzvédelmi követelményeknek megfelelő
szerkezet
Tűzgátló fal
1,5xGH4+ GH3 > 90m
Theoretical plane of fire compartment
boundary
Façade covering and thermal insulation
without typical fire resistance limit, and fire
classification A1-A2
When determining the geometrical
dimensions of barriers against the spread of
fire, only structures that meet the
requirements for fireproof structures can be
considered
The elements of the barrier against façade
spread of fire must meet the requirements
for fireproof walls!
Structure compliant to fire resistance limit
requirements for fireproof structures
Fireproof wall
1.5xGH4 + GH3 > 90 m
 167

Figure 3 to the sub-heading Additional Requirements of Protection Against the Spread

of Fire
Cross-section of barrier against the spread of fire at high roof

B,C,D,E tűzvédelmi osztályú tetőszerkezet és Roof structure and insulation of fire classifications B,
hőszigetelés C, D, and E
Tűzgátló fal Fireproof wall
A tűzgátló szerkezetekre vonatkozó tűzvédelmi Structure that meets the fire protection requirements
követelményeknek megfelelő szerkezet for fireproof structures
Szarufa Rafter
2xGT2+ GT1 ≥ 60m 2xGT2+ GT1 ≥ 60 m

Figure 4 to the sub-heading Additional Requirement of Protection Against the Spread of

Fire

Barrier against the spread of fire at roof level in case of a flat roof
 168

A tetőszinti tűzterjedés elleni gátként figyelembe vett
szerkezetrészek csak Al, A2 tűzvédelmi osztályú
szakipari szerkezetekkel egészíthetők ki
B,C,D,E tűzvédelmi osztályú hő- és csapadékvíz
elleni szigetelés
Tűzgátló fal vagy füstszakasz határ
Tűzszakasz határ elméleti síkja
A tetőszinti tűzterjedés elleni gát geometriai
méreteibe csak a tűzgátló szerkezetekre vonatkozó
tűzvédelmi követelményeket kielégítő szerkezetek
vehetők figyelembe
A tűzgátló szerkezetekre vonatkozó tűzvédelmi
követelményeknek megfelelő szerkezet
2xGT2+ GT1 ≥ 60m
Structures used as a barrier to roof level spread of
fire can only be supplemented with specialised
industry structures of fire protection classes Al, A2
Thermal and rainwater insulation of fire
classification B, C, D, and E
Fireproof wall or smoke compartment limit
Theoretical plane of fire compartment limit
When determining the geometrical dimensions of
barriers against the spread of fire, only structures
that meet the requirements for fireproof structures
can be considered
Structures that meets the fire protection requirements
for fireproof structures
2xGT2+ GT1 ≥ 60 m

Figure 5 to the sub-heading Additional Requirements of Protection Against the Spread

of Fire
Cross-section of barrier against the spread of fire maintained at high roof
level

GT3 vonalában Al, A2 tűzvédelmi osztályú tetőhéjalás, Roofing, insulation, and structures supporting
hőszigetelés és héjalást tató szerkezetek cladding, with fire classification A1, A2 at the line of
GT3
Szarufa Rafter
Tűzgátló fal Fireproof wall
Tűzszakasz határ elméleti síkja Theoretical plane of fire compartment limit
A tűzgátló szerkezetekre vonatkozó tűzvédelmi Structures that meets the fire protection requirements
követelményeknek megfelelő szerkezet for fireproof structures
GT3 > 90cm GT3 > 90 cm

where
G T2 is the height of a barrier against the spread of fire from A1 fire classification materials, m, G T1 is the
interrupter of buildings structures made from material fire classifications A2, B, C, D, E [sic] divider bar width
made from materials of fire classification A1, m. [sic]
In case of G T1 ≥ 0.60 m interruption of rainwater insulation of fire classifications B, C, D, E can be
disregarded, if at the width of G T1 the rainwater insulation is covered from above by a material layer of fire
classification A1 or A2.
G T3 ≥ 0.90 m is the width of the barrier against the spread of fire from A1 fire classification materials, where
only roofing, insulation and structures supporting cladding of fire classification A1 can be used above the
barrier against the spread of fire.
 169

Annex 7 to Decree …../2014. (…. ….) BM

Table 1 to the sub-heading General Requirements of Evacuation

A B C D E
1 Maximum route length allowed (m), if the
risk unit to be evacuated is risk category:
2 VLR LR MR HR
3 Escape route distance
4 Temporary protected space and
30 45 45 30
safe area distance reached
without escape route
5 Escape route distance, and 45 60 60 30
temporary protected area and
safe area distance without
escape route if the internal
height of the location is more
than 4 m, it is supplied with an
installed fire alarm, and heat
and smoke protection is
provided
6 Maximum allowed length of 200 300 300 200
escape route
7 Temporary protected area
distance on the escape route for
people with limited capacity to
40
escape, calculated from the
place of entry of the escape
route

Table 2, General Requirements of Evacuation

A B C
1. Designation Person/m, other Notes
2. Vehicle parking area 1 person/vehicle If the users of the stored motor vehicles are
typically from the users of the connected building,
the parking number does not need to be added to
the number of occupants in the building.
3. Residence 4 persons/residence The number takes into consideration cases where
an activity other than normal use is taking place in
the residence (home party, event), which adds to
the actual number of residents.
4. Office 1 person/every 6 m2 begun Specific staff number is also valid in large-scale
offices.
5. Meeting rooms 1 person/3 m2 If the users of the meetings room are typically
from the users of the connected building, the
number of occupants in the building should only
be added to half the number of the meeting rooms.
6. Shopping centres, 1 person/5 m2 The floor area of all sections used by the shoppers
warehouses, businesses must be calculated, particularly the sales areas and
corridors. Wet rooms and areas only used for
storage can be excluded.
7. Foyers in general, Foyers in 2 persons/1 m2 Especially in case of stadiums, theatres, public
 170

designations where a large
number of people may wait
due to consecutive events
8. Rooms, floors, fire Twice the number of patient
compartments, buildings of
inpatient healthcare
institution
9. Exhibition halls (museum,
exhibition, gallery)
exhibition rooms
10. Restaurants and multi-
purpose rooms
11. Discos, pop concerts, open-
air mass events without seats
12. Pavilions with standing room
13. Churches, evens of religious
organisations
14. Basins of pools, spas
4 persons/1 m2 buildings, at least half of the above number must
be calculated for the capacity of the fire
compartment or building.
Specific indicators include patients, visitors, and
beds employees of the institution.
1 person/2 m2
l person/1.5 m2 The data provided indicates the most unfavourable
arrangement, without seating.
4 persons/m2 Net usable floor space available to the visitors,
reduced by the immobile furniture.
4 persons/m2 Without transportation gateway.
Seats + 1 person/1 m2 Assuming occupants are present in the corridors
between the seats and also on the balcony.
1 person/3 m2 Taking into account all areas and water surfaces
freely used by the public.

Table 3 to the sub-heading General Requirements of Evacuation

A B C
1 Evacuating number Escape route, minimum clear width Minimum clear internal dimensions
(people) of stair flight (m) of installed door on escape route (m)
2 0-50 1.2 0.9
3 51-100 1.2 or 2 pcs 0.9
4 101- 1.2 + all additionally begun 100 0.6 for each 50 people begun and the
people, an additional 0.6 clear internal dimensions of the
doors cannot be less than 0.9 m
 Working material, not to be considered the Ministry’s position

Table 4 to the sub-heading Evacuation Calculation

A B C D E
1 Allowed time period for evacuation (minutes),
if the risk category of the risk unit is:
2 Very Low Low Risk Medium Risk High Risk
Risk
3 First 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.0
compartment
4 Second 6.0 8.0 6.0 6.0
compartment

Prepared: Reviewed: Approved:

Érces Ferenc Dr. Bakondi György

Dr. Felkai László
Dr. Csernus-Bőgér Zsuzsanna Dr. Harsányi Zsolt
Dr. Farkas Gergely Dr. Magyariné Dr. Nagy Edit
 172

Annex 8 to Decree …../2014. (…. ….) BM

Table 1 to the sub-heading Providing Extinguisher Substance Required for Fire

Extinguishing

A B C
1 Fire compartment Required fire water
area (m2) intensity (Litre/minute)
2 -0 to 50 -
3 greater than 50, 600
but at most 150
4 greater than 150, 900
but at most 300
5 greater than 300 1 200
but at most 500
6 greater than 500 1 500
but at most 800
7 greater than 800 1 800
but at most 1 200
8 greater than 1 200 2 100
but at most 1 600
9 greater than 1 600 2 400
but at most 2 000
10 greater than 2 000 2 700
but at most 2 500
11 greater than 2 500 3 000
but at most 3 200
12 greater than 3 200 3 300
but at most 3 900
13 greater than 3 900 3 600
but at most 4 600
14 greater than 4 600 3 900
but at most 5 400
15 greater than 5 400 4 200
but at most 6 200
16 greater than 6 200 4 500
but at most 7 200
17 greater than 7 200 4 800
but at most 8 200
18 greater than 8 200 5 100
but at most 9 200
19 - greater than 9 200 5 400
but at most 10 400
20 - greater than 10 400 5 700
but at most 12 000
21 - greater than 12 000 6 000
 173

Table 2 to the sub-heading Establishing Wall Fire Hydrants

Establishing wall fire hydrants at each level

A B C D E F G
More than 14 and not
1 Height of top floor level Not more than 14 m More than 30 m
more than 30 m
2 Name of structure Required wall fire hydrants per level in each fire compartment

[litre/min/fire hydrant]

[litre/min/fire hydrant]

[litre/min/fire hydrant]
simultaneous

simultaneous

simultaneous
Water flow

Water flow

Water flow
3

4 Residential building – – 2 150 2 200

Administrative, office and
5 educational building 1 80 2 150 4 200

Healthcare, social institutions,

6 2 100 3 150 4 200
lodging
7 Other community buildings 2 150 3 200 4 200
Industrial, agricultural,
8 2 150 3 150 4 200
producer, storage buildings

Table 3 to the sub-heading Parameters of the fire access

Connecting building section width

A B C
1 Sill height Width of the connecting building section (m1)
2 If the distance of the firefighting access route axis from the façade is
3 8.00 m 14.00 m
4 up to 6 m 5.0 8.0
over 6 m to 9 m 3.5 5.5
over 9 m to 12 m 3.0 4.5
over 12 m to 15 m 2.5 3.5
1 The width dimension of the connecting building section must be determined in the function of the actual axis
distance of the firefighting access route, by linear interpolation of the table values.
 174

Figure 1 to the sub-heading Establishing Fire Hydrants

Description:
1. terminal plate
2. sealing rubber
3. plug.

Port terminal design

 175

Annex 9 to Decree …../2014. (…. ….) BM

Table 1 to the sub-heading Heat and Smoke Extraction

A B C

1 Minimum degree of natural smoke Degree of air

extraction supply (if the
2 Effective opening non-effective
Premises concerned surface per smoke closing
compartment Clearance of surface is
3 expressed as minimum smokeless air applied)
floor area %- (m2) layer (m)
4 Forming Corridor, hallway 1 1 m2 - -
4 the escape - - - 30/hour
route 2
5 Stairway 5 1m - 30/hour
6 Covered atrium 3 1 m2 - -
7 Rooms Calculated internal 1 - - -
with clearance of smoke
greater compartment is up
than to 4 m
1 200 m2
8 floor area Calculated internal - - Half of the -
clearance of smoke calculated
compartment internal height,
exceeds but at least 3 m
4m
9 Facility used for containing 1 3 m2 - -
crowds
10 Basement level facility 1 0.3 m2 - -

Table 2 to the sub-heading Heat and Smoke Extraction Device

A B C
1 Establishing an opening Opening angle (degree) Discharge coefficient (flow factor)
2 Clear opening - 0.65
3 Flap ≥ 90 0.65
4 Shutter 90 0.5
5 ≥ 60 0.45
opening inward 0.35
6 Flap ≥ 45 0.35
opening inward 0.3
7 ≥ 30 0.3
opening inward 0.15

Table 3 to the sub-heading Heat and Smoke Extraction Equipment

A B C D E F
1 Facility Smoke Smoke exhaust air duct Air supply air duct
2 affected by exhaust fan In the same fire In a different In the same fire In a different
smoke compartment as fire compartment as fire
exhaust premises compartment premises compartment
 176

concerned than the concerned than the

premises premises
concerned concerned
3 If an installed F300 60 E300 x S, EI x (i ↔ o) S, E300 x S, EI x (i ← o) S,
fire where where where where
extinguisher x is at least the x is the x is at least the x is the same for
that uses same as the duration same as the fireproof
water protects inter-floor slab requirement at inter-floor slab structures with
the entire area with duration the location of with duration the duration
of the fire requirement at installation requirement at requirement at
compartment the location of regarding the location of the location of
incorporating installation fireproof installation installation
the given area structures
4 In other cases F400 120 E600 x S, E600 x S,
where where
x is at least the x is at least the
same as the same as the
inter-floor slab inter-floor slab
with duration with duration
requirement at requirement at
the location of the location of
installation installation

Table 4 to the sub-heading Air supply

A B C
1 Establishing an opening Opening angle (degree) Discharge coefficient (flow factor)
2 Clear opening - 0.7
3 Flap ≥ 90 0.7
4 Shutter 90 0.65
5 ≥ 60 0.5
6 Flap ≥ 45 0.4
7 ≥ 30 0.3

Table 5 to the sub-heading Smoke-free stairway room connections, closing devices

A B C D E F G
1 Pressurised Open corrido Extinguisher Elevator Smoke-free
smoke-free smoke-free r centre machine room stairway machine
foreground foreground premises room
2 Naturally ventilated, Sa-C Sa-C - No No -
smoke-free stairway requirement requirement
3 Open smoke-free - - Sm-C Sa-C Sa-C -
foreground
4 Pressurised smoke- - - Sm-C Sm-C Sm-C
free stairway without EI2 30
foreground
5 Pressurised smoke- Sa-C - - Sm-C Sm-C Automatic closing
free stairway with EI2 30 mechanism
foreground
6 Pressurised smoke- - - Sm-C Sa-C Sm-C
free foreground EI2 30
 177

Annex 10 to Decree …../2014. (…. ….) BM

Formula 1 to sub-heading Determination of surface dimensions of pressure discharge areas

Ah= fh. V
where:
Ah is the dimension of the fissile surface, m2;
fh is the specific fissile surface factor, m2/m3;
V is the unfinished capacity of the premises, m3.

In case of V ≤ 200 m3 :

In case of 200 m3 < V ≤ 2 000 m3 :

In case of 2 000 m3 < V ≤ 10 000 m3:

In case of 10 000 m3 < V ≤ 100 000 m3:

In case of 100 000 m3 < V ≤ 500 000 m3:

In case of over 500 000 m3 fh= 0.01.

Formula 2 to the sub-heading Determination of surface dimensions of pressure discharge

areas

Ahn = fhn. V
where:
Ahn is the dimension of the fissile-turn surface, m2;
fhn is the specific fissile surface factor, m2/m3;
V is the unfinished capacity of the premises, m3
 178

Figure 1 to the sub-heading Protection of the environment receiving venting

Tömeges közlekedés Mass transportation

A tömeges közlekedés szintje
Terepszint
Vt veszélyeztetett terület
l a veszélyeztetett terület szélessége
h nyomásmentesitó felület szemöldök-magasság
ALAPRAJZ
Hasadó felület esetén : 40 m≥l≥6h
Hasadó-nyíló felületnél: 25m≥l≥6h
Min.60°
Level of mass transportation
Ground level
Vt Hazardous area
l width of the hazardous area
h pressure-release surface eye level
FLOOR PLAN
In case of pressure discharge surface : 40 m≥l≥6h
Fissile-turn surface: 25 m≥l≥6h
Min. 60°

Figure 2 to the sub-heading Protection of the environment receiving venting

 179

A tömeges közlekedés védett sávja Protected strip of mass transportation

Csak tető hasadó-nyíló felület esetén Only in case of roof fissile-turn surface
A tömeges közlekedés szintje Level of mass transportation
Terepszint Ground level
Védőfal Protective wall
Oldalfal side wall
Tető roof
Hasadó felület esetén : 40 m ≥ l ≥ 6h In case of pressure discharge surface: 40 m ≥ l ≥ 6 h
l ≥ 6h de max. 40 m l ≥ 6 h but max. 40 m
Hasadó-nyíló felület esetén : 25m ≥ l ≥ 6h In case of pressure discharge surface: 25 m ≥ l ≥ 6 h
l ≥ 6h de max. 25m l ≥ 6 h but max. 25 m
tv a védett tömeges közlekedés távolsága a tv distance of the protected mass transportation from
nyomásmentesítő felülettől the pressure-release surface
Terelőfal Baffle
Min.60° Min.60°

Figure 3 to the sub-heading Protection of the environment receiving venting

Tömeges közlekedés Mass transportation

A tömeges közlekedés szintje Level of mass transportation
min. 2,50 m min. 2.50 m
α=max.60° α=max.60°
Terepszint Ground level
k = min. 3,00 k = min. 3.00
k a védőfal távolsága a nyomásmentesítő felülettől k distance of the baffle from the pressure-release
surface
tv a védett tömeges közlekedés távolsága a tv distance of the protected mass transportation from
nyomásmentesítő felülettől the pressure-release surface
ALAPRAJZ FLOOR PLAN
 180

Figure 4 to the sub-heading Protection of the environment receiving venting

Tömeges közlekedés Mass transportation

A tömeges közlekedés szintje Level of mass transportation
min. 2,50 m min. 2.50 m
α=max.30° α=max.30°
Terepszint Ground level
Terelőfal egyik lehetséges helye One possible location of baffle
A terelőfal szélső értéke a védőfal! Extreme value of deflector is the barrier wall!
ALAPRAJZ FLOOR PLAN
 181

Figure 5 to the sub-heading Protection of the environment receiving venting

25,0 m 25.0 m
Tömeges közlekedés Mass transportation
Terelő határolású hasadó-nyíló felület Baffle bordering fissile-turn surface
A tömeges közlekedés szintje Level of mass transportation
min. 3,00 m min. 3.00 m
α=max.30° α=max.30°
Terepszint Ground level
ALAPRAJZ FLOOR PLAN
 182

Figure 6 to the sub-heading Protection of the environment receiving venting

Figure 7 to the sub-heading Protection of the environment receiving venting

 183

Figure 8 to the sub-heading Protection of the environment receiving venting

Berendezés Equipment
Leárnyékolt hasadó ill. hasadó-nyíló felület, Shadowed fissile and fissile-turn surface, which
melyet lefúvató felületként nem szabad must not be considered a blow-down surface
figyelembe venni
 184

Annex 11 to …../2014. (…. ….) BM

Table 1 to the sub-heading The operability of fire control power consumption units

A B C D E
1 duration (minutes)

2 Consumption units Risk category of risk unit

3 VLR LR MR HR
4 Safety lighting 30 30 60 90
5 Mechanical heat and smoke extraction and 30 30 60 90
air supply
6 Heat and smoke extraction and air supply 30 30 30
30
closing devices
7 Pressurised smoke removal 30 30 60 90
8 Firefighting elevator 30 30 60 90
10 Firefighting radio amplifier No 90 90
requirement
11 Booster pump for fire water supply For the same duration as the
prescribed fire water supply
12 Emergency elevator 30 30 60 90
13 Evacuation sound system 30 30 30 60
14 Communication link to temporary safe area, 30 30 60 90
emergency elevator
15 Installed fire alarm According to Chapter XV
16 Installed extinguisher using water, foam Until the operating duration
specified in the relevant
technical requirement
17 Installed extinguisher using gas, if necessary 15
for continued extinguishing
18 Installed extinguisher with water mist 30
19 Installed spread of fire barrier Until the duration determined
during the equipment’s fire
protection inspection

Table to sub-heading The operability of fire control power consumption units

A B C
1 Consumer during fire event Allowed loss rate
Risk units of VLR Risk unit of HR
LR, MR categories category
2 Security lighting At least an area of At least an area of
3 Evacuation sound amplification 1 600 m2 supplied 500 m2 supplied
system within one level of within one level of
one fire one fire compartment
compartment
 185

Annex 12 to Decree …../2014. (…. ….) BM

Table to the sub-heading Lightning Protection

A B C
1 Designation of the structure Protection level
Lightning Coordinated
protection overpressure
system protection series
(LPS) SPM
2 Buildings with educational designation III III-IV
Buildings used for placing people with limited capacity to
3 escape, buildings of healthcare designation, buildings used for III III-IV
forced stays
4 Buildings, structures used for crowds IV III-IV

5 Hotels, dormitory buildings III III-IV

(over 50 person capacity)
6 Building or outdoor area containing separate units of industrial II II
or storage designation, used for the production, processing,
storage of potentially explosive materials
 186

Annex 13 to Decree …../2014. (…. ….) BM

Figure 1 to the sub-heading Safety Lighting, Escape Symbols and Escape Route Signalling
System

Height of fixing the fire classification symbol

Felismerési távolság Detection distance

Figure 2 to the sub-heading Safety Lighting, Escape Symbols and Escape Route Signalling
System

Placement of escape signs

 187

Figure 3 to the sub-heading Safety Lighting, Escape Symbols and Escape Route Signalling
System

Various placements of safety symbols

Diagram Description
Type 1

Flat sign, mounted

parallel to wall.

Látómező Field of view

Type 2

Double-sided sign mounted

perpendicular to wall.

Type 3

Ceiling-mounted, double-sided
sign.

Type P

Panorama sign, this ensures

best visibility.
 188

Annex 14 to Decree …/2014. (… …) BM

Table to the Section Common Rules of Installed Fire Alarms and Fire Extinguishers

Requirement to establish an installed fire alarm and installed fire extinguisher.

A B C D E F
1 Risk
Additional Fire alarm Fire
Designation, risk unit category of
criteria equipment extinguisher
risk unit
2 required
3 Lodging
4 Commercial lodging, dormitory, hostel, nursing home VLR and
Over 20 yes -
for persons with limited capacity to escape LR
people
5 MR and HR yes yes
6 Office, administration
7 Office, meeting room, financial services, postal, Over 500
VLR yes -
m2
8 LR Over 1 000
yes -
m2
9 MR Over 500
yes -
m2
10 HR - yes yes
11 Education, training
12 Daycare, preschool, family day camp, school, college, Over 500
yes -
university, adult training m2
LR, MR
13 Over 500
yes -
m2
14 HR - yes yes
15 Special training institution of persons with limited At most 50
capacity to escape people yes
cared for
16 Over 50
yes yes
people
17 Healthcare and social
18 General practitioner, specialist Over 500
LR, MR yes -
m2
19 HR - yes yes
20 Inpatient care, hospital, clinic, sanatorium HR - yes
21 HR In case of
over 100 yes yes
capacity
22 HR - yes yes
23 Surgery connected to inpatient care - - yes yes
24 Religious
25 Temple, synagogue, church MR yes -
26 HR yes -
27 Cultural, entertainment
28 Theatre, musical theatre, opera, concert, ballet, Over 100
museum, art, library, cultural centre, community LR person yes -
centre, film theatre capacity
29 MR - yes -
30 MR Over 1 000
person yes yes
capacity
31 MK - yes yes
32 -
Stage higher
yes yes
than 8 m
33 Forced stay
34 Prison, penitentiary, psychiatric LR, MR, Over 100
people
yes -
HR
 189

35 Commercial, service provider

36 Store, business, supermarket, restaurant, Over 1 000
LR, MR yes -
m2
37 MR Over 4 000
yes yes
m2
38 HR - yes yes
39 Market hall, indoor market MR and HR Over 4 000
yes -
m2
40 Sports
41 Sports stadium, pool, indoor ice rink, indoor ball VLR and Over 4 000
yes -
court, gym, etc. LR m2
42 MR and HR - yes
43 Transportation
44 Community and public mass transportation public Over 2 000
LR yes -
traffic areas (waiting room, cashier’s office) m2
45 MR Over 1 000
yes -
m2
46 HR - yes -
47 Commercial, service provider, hospitality in a public The total
traffic pedestrian underpass floor area of
businesses in
- the underpass
yes -
exceeds 500
m2
48 Underground railway, closed areas of public traffic, Yes (as set
operating areas forth
- - yes according to
Article 118(2)
and 121(5))
49 Road tunnel -
Over 1 000 m
yes -
length
50 Vehicle storage
51 Indoor vehicle storage LR Over 60
yes -
vehicles
52 MR Over 30
yes -
vehicles
53 HR Over 15
yes -
vehicles
54 MR, HR Over 100
yes yes
vehicles
55 Warehousing , storage
56 Warehouse (except for bulk agricultural storage area over 50 % of
and open storage) the allowed
LR fire yes -
compartment
dimension
57
MR, HR - yes -

58 Storage and technological tank of flammable liquids Fire surface

with less than a 100 ˚C flash point is 100 m2 or
- over 1 000
- yes
m3 capacity
59 Industrial, agricultural designation
60 Operating areas
HR yes -

61 In power switch rooms used for storing 3 kV and

greater rated voltage power switch equipment,
- - yes yes
furthermore rooms used for storing 120 kV and
greater rated transformers.
62 Other
63 Large kitchen appliances that use and process oil, -
Total
- yes
performance
 190

grease of equipment
installed in a
group, or
having a
common
extractor that
exceeds
50 kW.
64 Refuelling station under buildings (in the impact area
of dispenser pumps, and in the hazard zone of filling - - yes yes
shaft, dome shaft)
65 Enclosed area of a closed container refuelling station - - yes
66 Rooms used for holding computer centres of
informatics and control systems required for the - - yes yes
operation of vital system components
 191

Annex 15 to Decree …/2014. (… …) BM

Table 1 to the Section on Requirements for the Storage and Dosage of Flammable Liquids and
Melts

Clearance distances of storage terminals used for the storage of flammable liquids and melts, calculated from other
facilities or structures, not belonging to the storage area (m)
501 m3–10 000 m3 10 001 m3–40 000 m3 over 40 000 m3
Storage terminal containing the above liquid quantities
Description I. II. III. I. II. III. I. II. III.
1)
In case of liquids with the above fire hazard classes
Residential, resort, and institution areas 100 75 40 150 100 60 300 150 75
Buildings of Medium Risk and High Risk 50 50 50 80 80 60 150 150 150
categories
Buildings of Very Low Risk and Low Risk 50 25 20 60 40 20 150 75 75
categories
Freeway, highway 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Other established public road 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
Railway track used for rail transportation 100 100 50 100 100 50 100 100 50
Railway station 200 150 100 300 200 100 500 250 100
1) In case of mixed storage, the requirement for the liquid with the more dangerous fire hazard class must be applied.

Table 2 to the Section on Requirements for the Storage and Dosage of Flammable Liquids and
Melts

Clearance distances (m)

A B C D E F
Description Dispenser – Dome shaft, Aboveground tank Treatment or LPG exchange
with steam refuelling dome – with a gas laundry site
gun drainage station, tank pendulum in case buildings,
1 in case of fuel pump – with a of fuel and petrol outdoor service
and petrol gas pendulum in equipment,
case of fuel and shops
petrol
Buildings of Medium
2 Risk and High Risk 10 10 25 10 10
categories
Buildings of Very Low
3 Risk and Low Risk 5 5 10 6 10
categories
Railway track used for
5 20 20 20 15 20
rail transportation
Towing, industrial and
6 public track loader, tram 61) 5 10 6 10
track
Underground utility
7 lines, not belonging to According to the relevant technical requirement
the refuelling station
Fuel, petroleum, or
8 According to the relevant technical requirement
product transmission line
1)
It is 3 m in case of a rail fuel dispenser.
 192

Table 3 to the Section on Requirements for the Storage and Dosage of Flammable Liquids and
Melts

Clearance distances (m)

A B C D E F G H I
Description

Aboveground

Tanks storing

PB exchange
Dome shaft

storage and

substances
flammable
show case
Dispenser

Dispenser

collection
Lubricant

Used-oil

vessel
pump

pump
tank
1

Building management,
business, car wash
2 building, closure devices 2 2 - 8 - 8 21) 5
(door, window that can
be opened)
Outdoor service
3 2 2 - 8 3 8 - 5
equipment
Outside of
4 Dispenser pump - - 2 5 - 5 10
impact area
5 Aboveground tank 2 0.5 1
- 5 5 5 10
6 Dispenser pump - 1 1
Used-oil collection
7 5 - 3 5 3 5 - 5
vessel
8 PB exchange 10 10 5 10 5 10 5 -
LPG (liquefied
petroleum gas) or CNG
9 10 10 5 10 5 10 5 10
(compressed natural gas)
tank
LPG or CNG refuelling
10 6 6 - 10 5 6 5 10
dispenser
1)
The used-oil collection vessel should be placed inside the building in case of a service building.

Table 4 to Section on Requirements for the Storage and Dosage of Flammable Liquids and
Melts

Clearance distances (m) of exchange sites

A B C D E F
Protected facility Minimum distance allowed from the exchange site in metres,
1 according to the exchange site category

2 “1” “2” “3” “4” “over category”

3 Buildings in HR and MR categories 5 10 20 30 50
4 Buildings in VLR and LR categories 5 5 10 10 10
5 Railway 20 30 50 50 50
6 Road, walkway, bicycle path 5 10 15 20 30
Buildings or structures (e.g. cellar,
7 well, sewer) deeper than ground 5 10 10 10 10
level, or open water course and trench
8 Overhead electrical power line Based on a separate provision
 193

Annex 16 to Decree …/2014. (… …. BM

Table 1 to Installed Fire Alarm and Installed Fire Extinguisher System, Fire Extinguisher,
Firefighting Outfit

Fire class Fire Class

according to according to
Extinguisher Standard MSZ Standard MSZ
substance EN 3-7 EN 1866
unit [OE] A B
1 5A 21B
2 8A 34B
3 55B
4 13A 70B
5 89B
6 21A 113B
9 27A 144B
10 34A
12 43A 183B
15 55A 233B
16 IB
17 II B
18 III B
19 IV B

Table 2 to the sub-header Installed Fire Alarm and Installed Fire Extinguisher System,
Fire Extinguisher, Firefighting Outfit

Unit of separate
Storage of
designation or outdoor
In general potentially
area up to a floor area of
explosive material
m2
50 2 6
100 3 9
200 4 12
300 5 15
400 6 18
500 7 21
600 8 24
700 9 27
800 10 30
900 11 33
1 000 12 36
Every additional 250 +2 +6
 194

Annex 17 to Decree …/2014. (… …) BM

Table 1 to Section on Conditions of Using Flammable Liquids and Gases

Maximum storable liquids of fire hazard class I-II and explosive aerosols allowed on the territory of a commercial unit

A B C D
1 Facility floor area Nature of building Extinguisher Total allowed
(m2) structures bordering equipment in the entire quantity of liquids of
the facility area of the fire fire hazard class I–II
compartment and explosive
incorporating the aerosols (L)
commercial unit
2 0–50 100
3 0–50 Fire resistant 300
4 0–50 Present 300
5 50–500 300
6 50–500 Fire resistant 1 000
7 50–500 Present 1 000
8 500–1 500 1 000
9 500–1 500 Fire resistant 1 500
10 500–1 500 Present 1 500
11 1 500– 1 500
12 1 500– Fire resistant 3 000
13 1 500– Present 3 000

Table 2 to Section Conditions of Using Flammable Liquids and Gases

Maximum storable flammable liquids and explosive aerosols in a location not designed for storage

A D E
1 Facility floor Allowed quantity Allowed quantity
area of liquids of fire of liquids of fire
(m2) hazard class I–II hazard class III (L)
and explosive
aerosols (L)
2 0–50 10 30
3 50–500 20 40
4 500– 30 60

Table 3 to Section Conditions of Using Flammable Liquids and Gases

Fire extinguishers required at LPG exchange sites

A B
1 In case of Category “1”
2 In case of Category “2”
3 In case of Category “3”
4 In case of Category “4”
5 In case of “over category”
1 extinguisher of 43A, 233B and C extinguisher performance
2 extinguishers of 43A, 233B and C extinguisher performance
4 extinguishers of 55A, 233B and C extinguisher performance
4 extinguishers of 55A, 233B and C extinguisher performance
and
1 extinguisher of A III B C extinguisher performance
4 extinguishers of 55A, 233B and C extinguisher performance,
and
1 portable powder extinguisher of A III B C extinguisher
performance
 195

1 portable powder extinguisher of 250 kg 1)

1) In place of the 250 kg powder extinguisher, 5 portable powder extinguishers of A III B C extinguisher performance
are allowed.
 Working material, not to be considered the Ministry’s position.

Annex 18 to Decree …/2014. (… …) BM

Table to Section on Control, Maintenance, Supervision

A B C D
1 Operator’s inspection Periodical audit Maintenance
Technical solution Requirement for Requirement for and
Requirement and method of
2 Cycle period and method of Cycle period
documentation
Cycle period method of
documentation documentation
6 month (+ 1 month)
1)

3 months (+ 1 Fire protection 12 months (+ 1 Fire protection

3 Fire extinguisher
week) operation log
No requirement 2) operation log
months),
5 years (+ 2 months),
10 years (+ 2 months)
Wall fire hydrant, water resources with the exception of 6 months (+ 1 Fire protection Simultaneously with Fire protection
4 a natural water source, booster pump, dry fire water line week) operation log
12 months (+ 1 week) Fire protection operation log
periodical audit operation log
1 day,
1 month, Fire protection 6 months (+ 1 week), Simultaneously with Fire protection
5 Installed fire extinguisher
3 months (+ 1 operation log 12 months (+ 1 week)
Fire protection operation log
periodical audit operation log
week)
1 week, Fire protection Simultaneously with Fire protection
6 Installed fire extinguisher
1 month operation log
12 months (+ 1 week) Fire protection operation log
periodical audit operation log
Fire protection Simultaneously with Fire protection
7 Fire and error transmission signalling equipment 1 day
operation log
6 months (+ 1 week) Fire protection operation log
periodical audit operation log
Fire protection Simultaneously with Fire protection
8 Firefighter key safe 1 day
operation log
6 months (+ 1 week) Fire protection operation log
periodical audit operation log
Simultaneously with Fire protection
9 Firefighter radio amplifier No requirement 6 months (+ 1 week) Fire protection operation log
periodical audit operation log
3 months (+ 1 Fire protection Simultaneously with Fire protection
10 Firefighter elevator
week) operation log
12 months (+ 1 week) Fire protection operation log
periodical audit operation log
Fire protection Simultaneously with Fire protection
11 Evacuation sound system 1 day
operation log
6 months (+ 1 week) Fire protection operation log
periodical audit operation log
Fire protection Simultaneously with Fire protection
12 Safety lighting 1 month
operation log
12 months (+ 1 week) Fire protection operation log
periodical audit operation log
Before each event,
Panic lock, emergency exit lock, emergency exit security Fire protection Simultaneously with Simultaneously with
13 system
but at least 3
operation log
6 months (+ 1 week) Fire protection operation log
periodical audit periodical audit
months (+ 1 week)
Fire protection Simultaneously with Simultaneously with
14 Fireproof
Fireproof closing devices 1 month
operation log
6 months (+ 1 week) Fire protection operation log
periodical audit periodical audit
closures Simultaneously with Fire protection
15 Fireproof closing panels No requirement 6 months (+ 1 week) Fire protection operation log
periodical audit operation log

Prepared by: Reviewed by: Approved by:

Érces Ferenc dr. Bakondi György

dr. Felkai László
dr. Csernus-Bőgér Zsuzsanna dr. Harsányi Zsolt
dr. Farkas Gergely dr. Magyariné dr. Nagy Edit
 197

3 months (+ 1 Fire protection Simultaneously with Fire protection

16 Smoke extractor, air supply structure
week) operation log
6 months (+ 1 week) Fire protection operation log
periodical audit operation log
3 months (+ 1 Fire protection Simultaneously with Fire protection
17 Smoke exhaust, air supply ventilator
week) operation log
6 months (+ 1 week) Fire protection operation log
periodical audit operation log
3 months (+ 1 Fire protection Simultaneously with Fire protection
18 Heat and smoke Smokeless ventilator
week) operation log
6 months (+ 1 week) Fire protection operation log
periodical audit operation log
protection 3 months (+ 1 Fire protection Simultaneously with Fire protection
19 solutions Smoke damper, shutter
week) operation log
6 months (+ 1 week) Fire protection operation log
periodical audit operation log
3 months (+ 1 Fire protection Simultaneously with Fire protection
20 Smoke control door
week) operation log
6 months (+ 1 week) Fire protection operation log
periodical audit operation log
3 months (+ 1 Fire protection Simultaneously with Fire protection
21 Mobile smoke barrier
week) operation log
6 months (+ 1 week) Fire protection operation log
periodical audit operation log
Fire protection Simultaneously with Fire protection
22 Diesel generator considered as emergency power supply 1 month (+ 3 days)
operation log
6 months (+ 1 week) Fire protection operation log
periodical audit operation log
Battery, UPS (uninterruptible power supply) qualifying Fire protection Simultaneously with Fire protection
23 as an emergency power supply
1 month (+ 3 days)
operation log
6 months (+ 1 week) Fire protection operation log
periodical audit operation log
1)
Basic maintenance of fire extinguisher manufactured according to Standard MSZ 1040 (with the exception of those that use carbon dioxide)
2)
Basic maintenance of fire extinguishers manufactured according to Standards MSZ EN 3, MSZ EN 1866 and Standard MSZ 1040 using carbon dioxide.
 Annex 19 to Decree …/2014. (… …) BM

“Annex 9 to Decree 50/2011. (XII. 20.) BM

Fire extinguisher maintenance cycles

A B C D E
Basic Interim Full
1 Type of fire extinguisher mainten mainten mainten Life span of fire extinguisher4
ance1 ance2 ance2
2 Powder extinguisher, aqueous-based 1 year 5 and 15 10 years 20 years
extinguishing foam and water years
3 Shear pin powder extinguisher3 1 year 15 years 10 years 20 years
4 Gas extinguisher 1 year - 10 years 20 years
5 All carbon dioxide extinguishers 1 year - 10 years According to the relevant technical
requirement
6 Fire extinguishers manufactured 6 - 5 years 20 years, but by 31/12/2014, at the
according to Standard MSZ 1040 (with months latest
the exception of those that use carbon
dioxide)
1
Tolerance time of mandatory maintenance cycles is 1 month week.
2
Tolerance time of mandatory maintenance cycles is 2 months.
3
The original (shearpin) powder extinguisher must be returned to the manufacturer for refilling.
4
Article 265(2) of the National Fire Protection Regulation must be also taken into consideration.”

Basic maintenance operations of fire extinguisher
A B C D E F
1 Object of maintenance
2 Inspection of emergency and
indicator assembly:
3 Inspection and audit of pressure
gauges, to check the operating
pressure of the fire extinguisher:
4 Visual inspection of the fire
extinguisher
5 Weight inspection of a fire
extinguisher that uses carbon
dioxide:
6 Inspection of the nozzle and injector:
7 Inspection of the sticker:
8 Emptying the tanks of the fire
extinguishers using water and foam:
9 Inspecting the powder in the powder
extinguisher:
10 Inspection of the fire extinguisher’s
assemblies:
11 Inspection of the operating assembly
and head assembly:
12 Removing the fuel tank:
13 Inspection of the fuel tank:
199
Annex 20 to Decree …/2014. (… …) BM
“Annex 10 to Decree 50/2011. (XII. 20.) BM
G
1 2 3 4 5 Tasks and activities to be performed
In order to determine the operability of the fire
X X X X X extinguisher, the emergency and indicator assembly
must be inspected.
If the pressure gauges are not working smoothly, or if
the measured pressure is different than what is specified,
X X the manufacturer’s instructions must be followed. The
fuel quantity must be monitored with pressure
measurement.
The fire extinguisher must be inspected for corrosion,
dents or bulging, which inhibit perfect and safe
X X X X X
operation. If these are present, the manufacturer’s
instructions must be followed.
The fire extinguisher must be weighed, and checked
X against the value entered on the tank. Carbon dioxide
loss may be up to 10 %.
The condition of the nozzle and injector must be
X X X X X inspected, and suitable, perfect condition for use must be
verified.
The perfect condition, legibility, and appropriate content
X X X X X
of the sticker must be verified.
The extinguisher filling substance must be emptied into
a clean vessel, and inspected according to the
X
manufacturer’s instructions that it is suitable for further
use.
The extinguisher must be inspected for the presence of
foreign substances, clumping, and clotting. The
extinguisher powder must be loosened by turning the
extinguisher upside down, while taking care not to allow
X
it to leak out. If any of the above listed errors is seen, or
if the powder is not loosened, or if any deviations are
detected, it must be disposed of and refilled according to
Article 4F.
If needed, the fire extinguisher assemblies must be
cleaned by blowing air through them. The perfect
condition of the nozzle, injector, filter (if there is one),
tube and filling valve must be verified. In case of error,
X X
it should be corrected, or replaced. The operating and
emptying assemblies (if present) must be inspected.
They must be cleaned, updated, or replaced with a new
assembly, if needed.
If the operating assembly and head assembly can be
removed without removing the filling, it must be cleaned
and error-free operability must be verified, along with
X X X the soundness of the parts. Damaged components must
be replaced. The moving parts and threads must be
protected with a lubricant recommended by the
manufacturer.
The fuel tank must be removed by loosening the
X X
attachment assemblies.
The fuel tanks must be visually inspected. Replacement
of damaged fuel tanks must be carried out according to
X X the instructions of the manufacturer. The fuel tank must
be weighed and the value must be compared to the value
entered on the fuel tank. If there is more than a 10 %
 200

loss in the fuel tank when compared to the specified

value, the fuel tank must be replaced according to the
manufacturer’s instructions. National regulations of
pressure maintaining vessels are applicable.
14 Replacement of O-rings, washers: When inspecting or replacing the seal components, the
X X X X X manufacturer’s instructions must be followed. If the
nozzle has a sealing ring, it must be replaced each time.
15 Internal inspection of the tanks of The operation must be performed with a lighting tool.
water and foam extinguishers: The soundness of the external and internal coating and
X
corrosion-free condition of the tanks must be verified.
Damaged coating must be updated.
16 Inspecting the tanks of powder The operation must be performed with a lighting tool.
extinguishers: X The tank must be inspected for being free from
corrosion.
17 Refilling water and foam The original substance must be refilled, or replaced by a
X
extinguishers: new one, following the instructions of the manufacturer.
18 Assembly of fire extinguishers: Reassembly must take place with the consideration of
the manufacturer’s instructions. In order to prevent
accidental operation, a security assembly must be used.
X X X X X
The fire extinguisher must be sealed with a seal clamp
suitable for unique identification, or an equivalent
procedure must be performed.
19 Filling out the maintenance Each maintenance operation must be indicated
X X X X X
verification label: according to the instructions set forth in Article 4B.

1. constant pressure water, foam, powder and gas extinguishers,

2. shearpin, constant pressure powder extinguishers,
3. fuel tank water and foam extinguishers,
4. fuel tank powder extinguishers,
5. carbon dioxide extinguishers.”